KV Studio Ver5 Man Ks

Ladder Support Software
KV STUDIO Ver.5
User's Manual
Please read this Manual before use.
Keep this Manual in a safe place for later reference.
Preface
"KV STUDIO" is an easy-to-use powerful ladder software.
This manual describes how to use KV STUDIO and its functions.
Be sure to carefully read and fully understand This manual before installation. In addition, please keep
This manual in a easy-to-reach place so that you can use it from time to time.
KV STUDIO related manuals

Please read the following manual when using KV STUDIO.
Manual Name
Description
KV-5000/3000 series
User's Manual
This Manual describes the composition/ specification, CPU

internal function, ladder programming method of "KV-5000 /
3000 series".
KV-5000/3000/1000 Series
Instruction Reference Manual
This manual describes various instructions available in ladder

program.
KV-5000/3000/1000 Series
Script programming manual
This manual describes the script programming method and

available operators, control statements and functions, etc.
KV STUDIO User's Manual
This manual describes how to operate KV STUDIO.
KV-5000/3000/1000 Series
System Macro Manual
This manual describe the system macros available for the

"KV-5000 / 3000 / 1000 series" .
KV-1000 Series Introduction Manual
Guide manual for the import of "KV-1000". please carefully

read the manual for first time use.
KV-1000 series
User's Manual
This manual describes the specifications, integrated functions
KV-1000 series
Programming Manual
This manual describes how to make ladder programs using
KV-7000 series
User's Manual
Describes the specifications, integrated functions and
KV-7000 series
and operating method of the KV-1000 PLC.

the KV-1000 PLC, and modules/macros and local devices.
operating method of the KV-7000 PLC.
Describes the instructions used in "KV-7 00" .
KV series
User's Manual
Describes the specifications, integrated functions and operating
KV-P series
User's Manual
Describes the specifications, integrated functions and
method of the KV-10/16/24/40PLC.

operating method of the KV-P16 PLC.
Safety Precautions
This Manual details how to use KV STUDIO and warnings that you should pay attention to. For proper
use of KV STUDIO, please read this manual carefully and fully understand this manual before you use the
product.
Please keep this manual in a easy-to-reach place so that you can use it from time to time.
Please provide this manual to the end users of KV-1000 Series.
Symbols
To prevent personal hazard and equipment damage, the following types of warning symbol are given in
this manual:
Danger
Indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions
are not taken.
Warning
Indicates that death or severe personal injury can result if proper precautions
are not taken.
Caution
Indicates that damage to property can result if proper precautions are not
taken.
Important
Indicates that an undesirable result or status can occur if the relevant notice is
ignored.
Note
Describes cautions for easily mistaken operations.
TIP
Indicates useful information or information that aids understanding of text descriptions.
Indicates a reference item or page to be referred to in this manual and other manuals.
- KV STUDIO Ver.5 Users Manual -
E:\KEYENCE(en)\No10_Kv_studio_ver4_ver3\084160_kv_studio\FC-24SM_001J.fm
General precaution
Verify that the KV Series function correctly when using the KV STUDIO.
Verify that this device functions correctly before the start of work and when operating the device.
Provide a safety circuit that bypasses PLC to enable failsafe operation of the entire system in the event
that the PLC fails.
Output circuit or internal circuit malfunctions sometimes prevent control from being performed
normally.Be sure to provide a safety circuit in control systems where circuit malfunction may lead to
fire or other serious accidents.
Proceed with care when modifying the KV-1000/700 Series, or when using it in a manner that falls
outside of the ranges indicated in its specifications, since KEYENCE is unable to guarantee device
functionality or performance in such situations.
Use this product in combination with other devices only after careful consideration, since the product
may fail to satisfy its functionality and performance capabilities as a result of the conditions and
environment in which it is used.
Do not use the product with the purpose of protecting human beings.
Notes
When using this device under the following conditions or operating environments, please consult with
your KEYENCE agents in addition to implementing safety measures such as product operation that
allows redundancy with respect to ratings and functions and use of failsafe provisions.
Use of the product under conditions and environments not described in this manual;
Use of the product in nuclear power control, railroad facilities, aviation facilities, vehicles, combustion
devices, medical equipment, entertainment machinery, safety equipment, etc.;
Use of the product in applications that may have a significant impact on human life or property, or that
place a high priority on safety.
Software License Agreement

Before you use this software, be sure to read the terms of this agreement.
Once you have started to use these softwares, it is assumed that you have consented to these terms,
and an agreement is established between KEYENCE CORPORATION and the user.
Terms
1. Rights of Use
KEYENCE CORPORATION shall permit the user the non-exclusive rights to use this software in
accordance with the terms of this agreement.
2. Copyright
Copyright relating to this software and manual shall belong to KEYENCE CORPORATION, and the
user shall not have rights other than the rights of use.
3. Forbidden Items
The user shall not be able to copy this software, nor be able to sell or distribute it to a third party.The
user, however, shall be able to copy this software for the purpose of making backups for the user's
own use.
4. Exemption of Liabilities
KEYENCE CORPORATION shall not be subject to liability with respect to damage on the part of the
user or a third party as a result of having operated this software.
5. Cancellation of Agreement
Should the user have violated any terms of this agreement, KEYENCE CORPORATION shall
immediately be able to cancel this agreement, and the user shall destroy or return this software and
copies to KEYENCE CORPORATION.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States or other respective countries.
IBM is the registered trade mark of USA IBM Corporation.
UNLHA32.DLL is the free software provided by Mr. Micco.
Other company names, product names, and model names used in this manual are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective companies.
MEMO
How This Manual Is Organized

Chapter
2
Chapter3
Chapter4
Chapter5
Chapter6
Chapter7
Chapter8
Chapter9
Chapter10
Chapter11
Chapter12
Chapter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
A
Describe packaging content confirmation, product function,
BEFORE USING
computer connection methods and general operating methods.
PROJECT
Describe project management.
MANAGEMENT
Describe "Unit editor" configured for the connection unit,
UNIT EDITOR
compilation and transfer unit.
FILE AND PRINT
Describe file management and print function.
Describe the function of editing Ladder using editor.
EDIT
Describe display method of various function windows,
DISPLAY
command or macro command entry method.
MODULE/MACRO
CONVERT
MONITOR/
Describe module or macro edit window.
Describe functions such as Ladder conversion, invalid

operand and dual coil check, etc.
Describe application of monitor and simulator functions.
SIMULATOR
DEBUG
TOOL
SCRIPT
APPENDICES
Describe the function of debugging program using monitor

and simulator.
Describe tools calling tools of Unit Editor, logging setting,
location parameter setting function, etc.
Describe script entry and edit method.
Error Codes table, fault processing method and shortcut

keys list, etc.
Contents
Safety Precautions 1
Software License Agreement 3
How This Manual Is Organized 5
Contents 6
Conventions Used In This Manual16
Terminology 16
About Symbols 16
Chapter 1 Before Using

1-1 Check the Package Contents 1-2
1-2 KV STUDIO function 1-3
Operating Environment and System Configuration 1-3
KV STUDIO Function 1-4
1-3 About the data compatibility 1-5

Ladder program generated by using KV BUILDER 1-5
KZ Ladder program1-8
1-4 Install software 1-9

Preparing for Installation 1-9
Precautions in Windows XP/2000 1-9
Precautions in Windows Vista 1-10
Installation 1-10
KV STUDIO Uninstall 1-10
1-5 USB Driver Installation 1-11

Install in Windows XP 1-11
1-6 Safety Precautions 1-13

1-7 About basic operation 1-14
Flow and mode of creating Ladder Program 1-14
About Screen 1-15
About screens of modes 1-15
About current window 1-15
About Help 1-16
1-8 Editor 1-19

Editor function overview 1-19
Names and Functions of Editor Screen 1-20
About ladder editing window 1-22
Chapter 2 Project Management

2-1 Project management 2-2
About project folder2-2
Create project folder2-2
About user data file 2-3
File operation of project folders 2-4
Chapter 3Unit Editor

3-1 Unit editor function 3-2
Function Overview 3-2
6
Settings on Unit Editor 3-2
3-2 Menu list in Unit Editor 3-4

File 3-4
Edit3-4
Convert 3-4
Set slave3-5
Display 3-5
Selected project 3-5
Window 3-6
Help3-6
3-3 Menu list of slave setting screen 3-7

File 3-7
Edit3-7
Convert 3-7
Display 3-7
Window 3-8
Help3-8
3-4 Names and Functions of Different Parts of Screen 3-9

Names and Functions of Different Parts of UE 3-9
Unit configuration area 3-10
Unit selection icon 3-10
Unit setup icon 3-11
Refresh setting tab 3-11
Message area 3-12
3-5 Basic Operation of UE 3-13

System Configuration Procedure 3-13
3-6 Operation of UE 3-15

Start UE 3-15
Exit UE 3-15
Window 3-16
Unit Configuration 3-16
Delete a configured unit 3-17
Copy/move a configured unit 3-17
Auto Assign Unit Relay/DM 3-18
Manually assign unit relay/DM 3-18
Batch relay number assignment 3-20
Check system Relay/DM assignment 3-21
Unit setting details 3-22
Set up Configuration Unit 3-22
Display Unit Monitor 3-23
Display Customize Monitor. 3-23
Display Buffer Memory Monitor 3-24
Import unit setting Info and unit comments 3-25
Read unit configuration from PLC 3-26
Enter Comments 3-26
Reserve /Dereserve 3-27
Jump to error line 3-27
Diplay the "Slave Setup" screen 3-28
Import Slave Information 3-28
Copy KL Unit Information 3-29
Paste KL Unit Information 3-29
Start KL Address Setup Software 3-30
Change the Display Mode of Bitmap 3-30
Display Help 3-30
E:\KEYENCE(en)\No10_Kv_studio_ver4_ver3\084160_kv_studio\KVSUSETOC.fm
3-7 Use the Slave Setup Screen 3-31

Names and Functions of Different Parts of Slave Setup Screen 3-31
Slave Configuration Area 3-31
Unit selection icon 3-32
Unit setup icon 3-32
Address setup icon 3-33
Display the "Slave Setup" screen 3-33

Exit the "Slave Setup" screen 3-33
Switch Over Cursor Position 3-34
Slave Configuration 3-34
Delete a slave that has been configured 3-34
Copy/move a configured slave 3-35
Automatic address assignment 3-35
Manual address assignment 3-35
Check Address Assignment of System 3-36
Import Slave Information 3-36
Input Comments 3-37
Preset Unit / Preset Client / Remove Preset 3-37
Jump to error line 3-37
Display Help 3-38
3-8 Environment Setting 3-39

About Environment Setting of UE 3-39
View Setting 3-39
Color setup 3-40
Device assignment setting 3-41
Set unit color 3-42
Other Settings 3-43
Chapter 4 FILE & PRINT

4-1 Various File Instructions 4-2
New Project 4-2
Open Project 4-3
Close Project 4-3
Save Project 4-3
Save Project As 4-3
Pack/save Project4-4
Verify Project 4-4
Project Properties4-5
Import Modules/macros4-7
Import Comments/labels 4-7
Import Logging Info 4-8
Import Device Default 4-8
Import File Register Setting 4-8
Import CPU Positioning Parameters 4-9
Save/read Memory Card 4-9
Save Device Comments in Text Format 4-10
Read Text Format Comments 4-10
Save Mnemonics List 4-11
Read Mnemonics List 4-12
Output CSV Files (Unit Specifications) 4-13
Output File in CSV format (Cross ref info) 4-13
Change Model 4-14
Auto-save 4-15
Auto-load 4-16
Exit 4-16
4-2 Print 4-17

Print 4-17
Print Preview 4-19
Printer Setting 4-20
Chapter 5 EDIT
5-1 About Edit Functions 5-2
Undo5-2
Redo5-2
Cut/Copy/Paste 5-2
Select a range 5-3
Cut 5-4
"Copy (C)" 5-4
Paste 5-4
Multiple Paste5-4
Search 5-6
Replace 5-7
Instruction Search / Replacement 5-8
Convert NO/NC Contacts 5-10
Search Rung Comments 5-11
Text Search/Replace 5-12
Batch Replace 5-13
Verification 5-14
Jump 5-15
Rung/step No. 5-15
Top/bottom 5-16
Previous/next block 5-16
Previous/next symbol 5-16
Home/end 5-17
Change previous/Next block 5-17
Open modules/macro 5-17
Insert 5-18
Empty rung 5-18
Rung comment 5-18
Folded ladder 5-19
Deleting Rungs 5-19

Set Disabling Rungs and Cancel Disabled Rungs 5-20
Rung Setting 5-21
Width 5-21
Height 5-21
Auto-adjust 5-21
Bookmark 5-22
Empty rung 5-22
Setting 5-23
Remove 5-23
Edit Mode 5-24

Expanded Ladder Mode 5-24
Connection Rung Edit Mode 5-25
Edit Connection Rungs 5-26

Input connection rungs 5-26
Delete connection rungs 5-26
Ladder Arrangement 5-27

Edit List 5-27
Display and edit mnemonics list 5-27
Mnemonics list format 5-28
Change Operands 5-29

Edit Device Comment 5-30
Change device comment 5-30
Delete all device comments 5-30
Chapter 6 DISPLAY
6-1 About View Functions 6-2
Toolbar/Status Bar6-2
Workspace 6-3
"Project" tab. 6-5
"Macro" tab 6-10
"Monitor" tab 6-11
Output Window 6-12

Module Library 6-13
Input Instruction 6-14
Displaying the Comment Edit Window 6-17
Displaying the Label Edit Window 6-20
Device Use List 6-25
Display Use Status 6-26
Display CPU System Setting 6-27
Mnemonics List 6-28
Zoom in/Zoom out 6-29
Auto Zoom 6-29
Displaying Labels 6-29
Displaying Comments 6-29
Displaying Unit Devices 6-30
Local Assignment Target Display During Monitor 6-31
Display Monitor Value of Ladder in Hex 6-31
Clear Changed Background Color 6-31
6-2 Entering and Deleting Instructions 6-32

Entering Instructions 6-32
Entering from the Instruction/Macro/Palette 6-33
Directly Entering Instructions Using Mnemonics 6-35
Enter command from tool bar (editing symbol 1) 6-36
Select the instruction to enter from the tool bar (edit symbol 2). 6-37
Select the instruction to enter from the tool bar (edit symbol 3). 6-38
Enter command from tool bar (CPU positioning symbol) 6-39
Enter command from the device comment edit window, etc. 6-40
Deleting Instructions 6-41

Specifying the Default Suffix 6-41
6-3 CPU System Setting 6-42

Program Settings 6-42
Set up module execution sequence 6-42
Fixed cycle execution and user interrupt setting 6-43
10
Scanning time related setting 6-45

Protection setting 6-46
System Setting 6-47

Local/whole assignment setting 6-47
Setup module/macro device 6-51
CPU unit buffer capacity setting 6-52
Power OFF hold setting 6-53
Action taken in case of error 6-54
Upper value setting of digital trimmer 6-55
Chapter 7 MODULE/MACRO
7-1 About Module/Macro 7-2
Create a new module 7-2
Create a new macro7-2
Open Modules/macro 7-3
Close module/macro 7-3
Delete module/macro 7-3
Module/macro properties 7-4
Macro Argument Settings 7-5
Convert Unit Devices7-6
Module execution sequence setting7-6
Chapter 8 CONVERT
8-1 About Conversion Functions 8-2
Conversion 8-2
Converting Individual Modules and Macros 8-3
Test Race Contention of Device 8-3
Clear Invalid Operands 8-4
Duplicate Coil Check 8-5
Local Devices Settings by Module/macro 8-6
Entire Assignments Settings of Local Devices 8-6
Chapter 9 Monitor & Simulator

9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions 9-2
Preparation before monitoring9-2
Returning to editor 9-3
Communication setting 9-4
Communication setting 9-4
Global device comment transfer range setting 9-15
Comment transfer setup 9-16
Monitor mode 9-17

PLC Transfer -> Monitor Mode 9-17
Read PLC -> Monitor mode 9-23
PLC Transfer 9-24
Read PLC 9-25
Verify/Synchronize PLC 9-25
Verifying PLC 9-28
11
Start Monitor 9-28

Stop Monitor 9-28
Online Edit 9-28
Simulator Setting 9-29
Set up Simulator 9-29
Real-time Chart Monitor 9-30
High-speed Time chart monitor 9-31
Register monitor window 9-31
Batch monitor window 9-32
Batch change window 9-32
Display/hide observation window 9-33
Unit Monitor 9-33
Custom monitor 9-33
9-2 Monitor Function 9-34

Function Overview 9-34
Restrictions ON Monitor 9-34
Communication with PLC 9-34
Precautions when using serial ports 9-34
Precautions when using USB ports 9-35
Various monitor functions 9-35
Register Monitor 9-35
Batch Monitor 9-35
Batch Change 9-35
Watchdog Window 9-35
Custom Monitor 9-35
High-speed Time Chart Monitor 9-36
Unit Monitor 9-36
Online Edit Function 9-36
Start and Exit Monitor 9-36

Names and Functions of Monitor Screen 9-37
Ladder Program Monitor 9-37
PLC Setting and Operation 9-40
9-3 Register Monitor 9-41

Register Monitor overview 9-41
Display Register Monitor Window 9-41
Device Registration 9-42
Change Current Value 9-43
9-4 Batch Monitoring 9-46

Overview 9-46
Change displayed devices 9-46
Change Current Value 9-47
9-5 Custom Monitor 9-49

Features of Custom Monitor 9-49
Display Custom Monitor 9-49
Registering Custom Monitors 9-50
9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor 9-51

The Features of Real-time Chart Monitor 9-51
Display the Real-time Chart Monitor 9-51
The Composition of Real-time Chart Monitor 9-51
"File (F)" Menu 9-57
"Edit(E)" Menu 9-59
"View(V)" Menu 9-63
"Communications (C)" menu 9-70
12
"Help (H)" menu 9-72
9-7 High-speed Time Chart Monitor 9-73

Features of High-speed Time Chart Monitor 9-73
Display High Speed Time Chart Monitor 9-73
Names and Functions of Parts in High-speed Time Chart Monitor 9-73
9-8 Unit Monitor 9-81

Features of Unit Monitor 9-81
Displaying Unit Monitor 9-81
About the "Unit Monitor" window 9-81
16-, 32- and 64-point Unit Monitor 9-82
9-9 Batch Change 9-83

About "Batch change" Window 9-83
Create a New CSV File 9-83
Open CSV File 9-84
Save CSV File 9-84
Save the CSV File by Another Name. 9-84
Read Memory Card 9-85
Save to Memory Card 9-85
Close File 9-86
Exit Window 9-86
Verification 9-86
Undo 9-87
Redo 9-87
Select All 9-87
Cut Selected Range/Copy/Paste 9-88
Delete Rung 9-88
Delete Selected Range. 9-88
Arrange in Device Sequence 9-88
Read All Projects from PLC 9-89
Read Selected Range from PLC 9-89
Write All Projects to PLC 9-89
Write Selected Range to PLC 9-89
Batch Insert 9-90
Insert Rung 9-90
Increment Insert 9-91
9-10 Online Edit 9-92

Overview 9-92
Online Edit Features 9-92
Cautions Upon Using the Online Edit Function 9-92
Start Online Edit 9-93
Transfer Online Edit 9-94
Set Online Edit 9-95
9-11 Simulator 9-96

Overview 9-96
Simulator Restrictions 9-96
Starting Up and Exiting Simulator 9-99
Starting up and Stopping Simulator 9-100
Names and Functions of Screen Parts 9-100
Executing Simulator 9-100
Scan Execution 9-100
Step control9-102
13
Chapter 10 DEBUG
10-1 About Debugging Functions 10-2
Execute RUN/continuous Scan 10-2
PROGRAM/stop 10-2
Execute 1 Scan 10-3
Execute Continuous Step 10-3
Execute 1 Block 10-4
Execute 1 Step 10-4
Execute Continuous Reverse Step 10-5
Execute Reverse 1 Block 10-5
Execute reverse 1 step 10-6
Pause 10-6
Reset 10-7
Set Device Break 10-7
Device Breaks 10-8
Rung breaks10-10
Forced set/reset Register 10-11

Error Monitor Window 10-12
Inhibit Input Refreshing 10-13
Inhibit Output 10-14
Scan Time Monitor 10-14
Set Calendar Timer 10-15
Clear All PLC Devices 10-16
Clear CMs For KV-D30 10-17
Chapter 11 TOOL
11-1 About Tool Functions 11-2
Unit Editor 11-2
Switch Unit Configuration 11-2
Logging/tracing Setting 11-3
Set Device Default Value 11-4
Add / change File Register Setting 11-5
Mail Setting 11-6
Mail Communication Instruction Maker 11-6
Edit CPU Positioning Parameter 11-7
CPU High-speed Counter Setting Wizard 11-8
Setup KV-DN20 11-8
Setup KV-CL20 11-8
Protocol Builder 11-8
Motion Builder 11-9
Positioning Unit/simple Settings 11-9
Protocol Studio 11-10
MV Link Studio 11-10
Panel Editor 11-10
KL Connection Setting 11-11
Customize 11-11
Shortcut keys 11-11
Toolbar 11-12
Option 11-13
14
Chapter 12 SCRIPT
12-1 Insert Script 12-2
Insert Field Script 12-2
Insert Box Script 12-2
Switch Edit Method 12-3
12-2 Convert Script 12-4

Convert Selected Script Only 12-4
Convert All Scripts 12-4
Set Warning Level of Script Conversion Error 12-4
12-3 Display Converted Ladder Program 12-5

Display Converted Ladder 12-5
Display Entire Content of Converted Ladder 12-6
Fold Entire Content of Converted Ladder 12-7
12-4 Input Auxiliary Function 12-8

Display Script Function List 12-8
Display Simple Format 12-8
APPENDICES
1 Error Message Lists A-2
Errors That Occur on Editor
Errors/Warnings That Occur in Conversion
Errors at Start of Monitoring and Communications Errors
Errors During Ethernet Communications
PLC Unit Errors
Errors That Occur on Unit Editor
A-2
A-3
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-9
2 List of Unavailable Characters A-11

3 Shortcut Key List A-13
Shortcut Keys Valid on Unit Editor A-13
Shortcut Keys Valid on Unit Editor "Slave Setup Screen" A-13
Shortcut Keys Valid on KV STUDIO A-14

Shortcut keys valid in the initial screen
Shortcut keys valid in the Editor mode
Shortcut keys valid in the Monitor mode
Shortcut keys valid in the Simulator mode
Shortcut keys valid during online editing
A-14
A-14
A-16
A-17
A-18
GPPQ/GPPA Mode Shortcut Key List

CX Mode Shortcut Key List
/ How to use "/" key
Input Instruction by Omission Method
A-19
A-20
A-21
A-22
4 Remedies for Frequently Occurring Communications Errors A-24

5 Index A-26
15
Conventions Used In This Manual

Headline
9-3
Registration Monitor
Registration Monitor is for registering any device, and displaying the current values and time
charts of registered devices. This monitor comes in handy for batch-checking different types of
devices. This section describes how to view and operate Registration Monitor.
Mid-heading
Registering Devices
Sub-heading
Displaying the Registration Monitor
Vision(V)
Register monitor window(B)
Multiple devices can be registered in register monitor window, and current value and
time curve of the registered device can be displayed or its current value can be changed.
Indicate the procedures

for executing functions
from menu bar.
Icon also displayed even
if it exists in tool bar.
Change current value, see next page
Exponent arithmetic operation

Indicates the related chapters.
From the menu, select Vision(V)

window.
Other steps
Register monitor window(B)to open register monitor
Click button.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Chapter title.
Other procedure
Describe the methods to
achieve the same results
using other procedures.
TIP
Note
Every operation will open a new window.

Register monitor window can be selected from the menu only in monitor,
simulator or online Editor.
By dragging and registering devices from the Ladder Monitor window

Drag-and-drop devices from the Ladder Monitor window to register devices by the
following procedure.
Display Information
Describe the methods to
achieve the same results
using other procedures.
1
2
Procedures
Indicates the page or manual

to refer to. The page or
manual containing the
related
information
is
indicated here.
Note
Describes cautions for easily
mistaken operations.
Be sure to read carefully.
Select the cell containing the device to register in the Ladder Monitor window.
Move the mouse cursor to the boundary of the selection,

and click the mouse when the cursor shape changes to .
(At this time, the mouse stays clicked.)
Operation screen
Drag-and-drop the device on the Registration Monitor window.

During the drag-and-drop, the mouse cursor changes to the .
9-42
* This page was made for the purpose of explaining page components, and differs from an actual page.
Terminology
This manual uses the following terminology excluding some instances.
Terminology
"KV-5000"
"KV-3000"
"KV-1000"
"KV-700/700+M"
"KV-10(16)/24(40)"
"KV-P16"
PLC
PC
"KV STUDIO"
Ladder program
Explanation
KV-5000 series PLC products produced by Keyence Corporation.
KV-10/16/24/40 series PLC products produced by Keyence Corporation.
KV-P16 series PLC products produced by Keyence Corporation.
This refers to the overall system of a programmable logic controller.Represent overall system.
Stands for personal computer.
KV STUDIO Ladder Support Software.
The program compiled with KV STUDIO Ladder support software.
About Symbols
Menus and buttons in this Manual are described using the following symbols.
Terminology
Explanation
[ ]
""
Menu item, which can be selected from menu.

Name of dialog box or item.
Buttons with text description in dialog box for various operations (such as performing
and canceling).
""
Ctrl
16
CTRL key in keyboard.
BEFORE USING
1
BEFORE USING
The chapter describes packaging content confirmation, product function,
computer connection and installation methods and general operating
methods.
1-1
Check the Package Contents 1-2
1-2
KV STUDIO Overview 1-3
1-3
About Data Compatibility 1-5
1-4
Software Installation 1-9
1-5
USB Driver Installation 1-11
1-6
Safety Precautions 1-13
1-7
About Basic Operation 1-14
1-8
About Editor 1-19
E:\KEYENCE(en)\No10_Kv_studio_ver4_ver3\084160_kv_studio\FC-24SM_011-2J.fm
1-1
1-1 Check the Package Contents

1
The package contains the following items. Before using, make sure that the package contains
BEFORE USING
everything that it is supposed to contain.
KV STUDIO Ver.5 CD-ROM

This CD-ROM contains the Installer of KV STUDIO Ver.5. Please keep it in a safe
place after installation.
Note
It is recommended that a backup of this CD-ROM be made to safeguard accidental

damage.
1-2
1-2 KV STUDIO Overview

This section describes the system configuration and operating environment of KV STUDIO, as well as
Be sure to read this section before you start to use .
Operating Environment and System Configuration

The following environment is required for operation of KV STUDIO.
Make sure that the system you are using meets the following conditions and is equipped with the
required devices.
Monitor
Resolution 1024 x 768
High Color (16-bit) or more
Computer system supported

Computer installed with Windows XP, Windows 2000
Printer
or Windows Vista, equipped with RS-232C or USB

Printer
Windows-compatible
printer (300 dpi or
more) that can be
connected to a PC
interface.
CD-ROM drive
CPU
Windows XP/2000:
KV series
Pentium 800MHz or more

(Pentium 1GHz or more recommended)
Windows Vista:
Processor recommended by Microsoft Corporation.
Memory capacity
Windows XP/2000:
Expanded memory 256 MB or more (512 MB or more recommended)
Windows Vista:
Expanded memory 512 MB or more (1 GB or more recommended)
Applicable OS
WindowsXP
Windows2000(SP3 or more)
Windows Vista(Not included 64-bit version)
(Only Japanese operation system)
Free Space Available on Hard Disk

850M bytes or more
(PLC)
KV STUDIO Ver.5 support the followingPLC.
KV-5000
KV-3000
KV-1000
KV-700/700+M
KV-P16
KV-10/16/24/40
1
BEFORE USING
its features and functions.
1-3
1-2 KV STUDIO Overview
KV STUDIO Function
BEFORE USING
KV STUDIO Features
Unit Editor
This is provided for the KV-5000/3000/1000/700 series.
Used to set up all the units and assign relays/DMs in the KV5000/ 3000/1000/700 series.
Unit structure diagram and settings list can be printed.
Editor
Ladder programs can be compiled by using various ladder
language instructions.
Structured programming can be performed by using module
macros and local devices.
Device comments and label registration can be enable and
tranferred to PLC
The generated ladder programs can be onverted to codes
that can be read by every KV series.
The lists of ladder programs, mnemonics, comment labels, and device use can be displayed and printed.
Simulation
Off-line operation simulating is performed on every KV series.
Ladder debugging is also possible.
Troubleshooting is easy by conducting continuous scanning,
single step scanning, and single step execution.
Reversed one-step operation is also possible.
Monitoring
Contact ON/OFF status can be real time monitored by using
compiled ladders
Time curve can be displayed.
Online edit is possible.
1-4
1-3 About Data Compatibility

1
KV STUDIO Ver.5 supports the CPU units in KV series.

can be easily transplanted.
* The supported PLCs include KV-5000, KV-3000, KV-1000, KV-700/700+M, KV-10/16/24/40, and KV-P16.
How to Use a Ladder Program Generated by KV BUILDER

Notes about reading
The following points shall be noted when reading KV-700/700+m , KV-10/16/24/40, KV-P16, KZ-300 /
350 Ladder file (*.ldc) generated from KV BUILDER via KV STUDIO Ver.5.
When KV STUDIO Ver.5 is used to read the KV-700/700+M, KV-10/16/24/40 and KV-P16-specific
ladder files (*.ldc), these files will be converted into the KV TUDIO file format (*.kpr). If these
converted files (*.kpr) are saved to the initial folder (the folder in which the *.ldc files are saved), they
will not be opened with the KV BUILDER. Please save them to other folder.
When KV STUDIO Ver.5 is used to read KZ-300/350 ladders (*.ldc) , the KV-700 is read as the
support model.
"Comment 1" and "Comment 2", and "label" can be read, but not "Comment 3".
Circuit library is not supported.
When using label, please confirm non-use of the following character strings.
Do not use a character string as the lable name.
! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ ] ^ ` { | } ~ (area)
Character unusable at the start part of label name: _0123456789*1
Unusable character string: global *1 , (name identical to instruction), (device name)
English letter, 1 character +R, or M+ digit
Letter 1 character + number
X+(A to F)
Y+(A to F)
The following key words are specified in KV script
IF, THEN, ELSE, END, SELECT, CASE, IS, TO, MC, MCR, FOR, NEXT, WHILE, DO, UNTIL, TYPE
The following key words are specified in IEC61131-3
TRUE, FALSE
TIME,DATE,TIME_OF_DAY,TOD,DATE_AND_TIME,DT
BOOL, SINT, INT, DINT, LINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, STRING, WSTRING,
BYTE, WORD,
DWORD, LWORD
ANY,
ANY_DERIVED,
ANY_ELEMENTARY,
ANY_MAGNITUDE,
ANY_NUM,
ANY_REAL,
ANY_INT, ANY_BIT, ANY_STRING,

ANY_DATE
ACTION, END_ACTION,
E:\KEYENCE(en)\No10_Kv_studio_ver4_ver3\084160_kv_studio\FC-24SM_013-J.fm
1-5
BEFORE USING
Due to automatic switching function, ability to read Ladder file generated, programming environment
ARRAY, OF,
BEFORE USING
AT,
CASE, END_CASE,
CONFIGURATION, END_CONFIGURATION,
CONSTANT,
EN, ENO,
EXIT,
F_EDGE,
FOR, TO, BY, DO, END_FOR,
FUNCTION, END_FUNCTION,
FUNCTION_BLOCK, END_FUNCTION_BLOCK,
IF, THEN, ELSIF, ELSE, END_IF,
INITIAL_STEP, END_STEP,
NOT, MOD, AND, XOR, OR,
PROGRAM, WITH, END_PROGRAM, R_EDGE,
READ_ONLY, READ_WRITE,
REPEAT, UNTIL, END_REPEAT,
RESOURCE, END_RESOURCE,
RETAIN, NON_RETAIN,
RETURN,
STEP,
STRUCT, END_STRUCT,
TASK,
TRANSITION, FROM, END_TRANSITION,
TYPE, END_TYPE,
VAR,VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT, VAR_IN_OUT, VAR_TEMP, VAR_EXTERNAL, VAR_ACCESS,
VAR_CONFIG,VAR_GLOBAL,
END_VAR,
WHILE, DO, END_WHILE
Other (IEC61131-3 standard)
2 above continuous "_" are not allowed in label forename. "a_b_c" can be used, but, "a_bc" is
forbidden.
It not case-sensitive. "aBc" and "abC" are treated as same label name.
When reading Ladder containing label name inhibit character string, do not read character string
inhibit label, but display after replaced to device name.
*1 It can be used only when the models "KV-700/700+M, KV-10(16), KV-24(40), KV-P16" are selected
Note
When a ladder is transferred to KV-700/700+m, KV-10/16/24/40, KV-P16, label message

used will not be transferred (due to no label information storage area).
So, when reading Ladder from KV-700 / 700+M , KV-10 / 16 / 24 / 40 , KV-P16 by using
KV STUDIO Ver. 5, label application position will be replaced to device name before
displayed.
1-6
Important
Logging function is replaced to the logging setting of KV STUDIO via Ladder

Change of high-speed counter, frequency counter, cam switch function and
external input relay
KV-L20 cannot be used in KV-5000/ 3000/ 1000. Set up KV-L20V by using Unit Editor
There is no corresponding VT multi-link mode in KV- L20V. Please use VT2 multilink. Besides, please modify and compile Ladder in KV-L20 and use it into KV- L20V.
QL cannot be used in KV-5000/ 3000/ 1000. Please delete Ladder via QL .
Change Model
KV STUDIO Ver.5 can be used to switch over to a model that the ladder supports.
Only the models that are supported by the host model can be switched over.
For detail, see
"Change model", Page 4-14
Precautions when changing KV-700 to KV-5000/3000/1000 model

CTH instruction operand of high-speed counter is automatically replaced according to following
method. Besides, relay device adds R before all Device No..
Before replace
After replace
000040 -> R00010

000050 -> R00011
Note
R004- R007 used in the operand of other instructions (HSP instruction, etc.) cannot
be automatically replaced.
The control relay set via external input break polarity, will be replaced automatically as follows.
INT0 to INT3
INT R00000 to INT R00003
(CR2700 to CR2707)
(CR2600 to CR2607)
"Pack" instruction is automatically replaced with usable system macro.

Text transfer control memory, will be automatically replaced as follows.
Receive:CM1000 to CM1099
Receive: CM03000 to CM03099
Send
Send
: CM1100 to CM1199
: CM04000 to CM04099
Symbol of SCMP instruction, will be replaced automatically as follows.

SCMP
SCMP
1-7
BEFORE USING
According to function, it can be divided into instruction to be set in Ladder, Ladder

setting and KV STUDIO setting, etc.
Besides, add/ change also exists in external input output relay (R), control relay
(CR) and control memory (CM), so, please see every CPU manual for confirmation.
Key points
KZ Ladder Program
BEFORE USING
KV STUDIO Ver.5 can read KZ-300 / 350, KZ- A500 ladders. In reading KZ-300/350 (*.ldc) and KZA500 files (*.ldx), the format is converted into KV STUDIO file format (*.kpr).
1-8
1-4 Software Installation

1
This section briefly describes how to install KV STUDIO on the PC's hard disk.
BEFORE USING
Preparing for Installation

Check the following before you start to install it.
Note
We recommend backing up the CD-ROM using main CD in case it is damaged.
Free Space Available on Hard Disk

KV STUDIO can be installed only on hard disks 300M bytes of residual space shall be supplied on the
hard disk to be installed. If there is not enough free space, clean up the hard disk so that there is
enough space.
Windows Environment and Installation Directory

KV STUDIO should be installed and operate on Windows.
Make sure that Windows XP/2000/Vista are installed and are operating normally on the PC when you
are using.
USB (USB port)

PC transfers ladder programs to KV-5000/3000/1000/700 via USB port. USB port must be enabled
when Monitor starts up.For details on how to set the RS-232C port, refer to the manual for the PC you
are using.
Ethernet (Ethernet card port)

To transfer program from computer to KV-5000 via Ethernet port and use monitoring function, shall preset computer Ethernet port (LAN function) to enabled. For details on how to set, refer to the manual for
the PC you are using.
RS-232C (serial port)

To transfer program to KV series using RS-232C and use monitoring function, PC RS-232C (serial
port) must be set to enabled. For details on how to set, refer to the manual for the PC you are using.
Precautions in WindowsXP/2000
Access Right
When installing KV STUDIO to standard folder (C:\Program files\ keyence\ KVS5\ ), please set following
access rights.
Assign "Power User" rights or higher to users using KV STUDIO.
1-9
1-4 Software Installation
Precautions in Windows Vista
BEFORE USING
Access Right
When installing KV STUDIO to standard folder (C:\Program files\ keyence\ KVS5\ ), please set following
access rights.
Assign "Standard User" rights or higher to users using KV STUDIO.
Installation
We will take following drive configuration as an example to describe how to install software on a PC.
: Hard drive
: CD-ROM drive
Start Windows, insert CD- ROM driver to "KV STUDIO Major Disk".
The autorun function on the PC will start up the installer program.
If failed to start up the installer program, please select "Specified file name" from Start menu, and type
"e:\setup" in "Specified file name" dialog box, then click "OK".
Please install according to the indication of installation sequence.
Note
When installing KV STUDIO on Windows Vista/XP/2000, only the user with "Administrator"
rights or higher can log in.
Uninstall
KV STUDIO can be unistalled when KV STUDIO is not used.
Please click "add or delete program" in Windows control panel, uninstall KV STUDIO .
Note
Only the user with administrator rights can uninstall KV STUDIO under Windows
Vista/XP/2000.
1-10
1-5 USB Driver Installation

When KV-5000/3000/1000/700 is connected to PC via USB, USB driver must be installed in PC. Mostly
Install In the Windows Vista Environment

When installing Windows Vista and KV STUDIO, the USB driver is installed automatically.
Install In the Windows XP Environment

Connect KV-5000/3000/1000/700 with Windows XP PC. When connecting to the PC for the first time,
the USB driver of KV-5000/3000/1000/700 must be installed on the PC. During the 2nd or later
connection, due to automatic identification of USB, USB driver needs not to be installed again.
Here, describe the step to install KV-5000/3000/1000/700 driver in Windows XP. Hardware test must
be conducted when installing USB driver of KV STUDIO.
Install according to the following step.
1
2
Only the user with system setting change power such as Administrator, etc. can start Windows XP.
Connect PC USB port and KV-5000/3000/1000/700 USB port using USB cable.
"Found New Hardware Wizard" is displayed, and then the added hardware information is displayed.
After select "Install from a list or specific location(Advanced)" radio button, click the "Next" button.
1
BEFORE USING
describe installation method of USB driver.
1-11
1-5 USB Driver Installation
Select "Search for the best driver in these locations" button and "Include this location in the
BEFORE USING
search" check box.

Then input "C:\Program Files\Keyence\KVS4E", click "Next" button.
Note
"C: \Program files\Keyence \ KVS4E" in above step, is the position where KV STUDIO
software is installed. Please read again according to the environment used.
When following dialog box is displayed,

click "Continue" button, continue
installation.
Click the "Finish" button.
So far, KV-5000/3000/1000/700 USB driver has been installed.
TIP
1-12
When installing in Windows 2000 system, please install USB driver according to the guide.
1-6 Safety Precautions

1
This section describes the notes when using KV STUDIO.Be sure to read carefully.
Before using, please confirm that the system has been set to the status of using USB and RS-232C.
If these ports are not set, a communications error will occur during Monitor operation, and the Monitor
cannot be operated correctly.
For details on how to set the USB port, refer to the manual for the PC you are using.
When the monitoring feature is engaged

When operating Monitor, communication will be abnormal if KV series powers off or the connected
cable is pulled out. This abnormal operation is not allowed before exiting Monitor.
Monitoring after the ladder is changed

After changing Ladder, when operating with monitor, from the menu, select 'PLC transfer -> monitor
mode', transfer the program to PLC.
Display resolution
Please set display solution to a setting higher than 1024 x 768 pixels, High Color (16 bits), small
fonts.Also, it will be comfortable to operate if setting a higher display solution. (1280 * 1024 above image
recommended)
Precautions when using USB

USB can be directly connected to computer USB interface not via USB port, before used.
Communications may be disrupted if noise or other factors cause unstable communications.If
communications is disrupted, re-insert the USB cable.
For this, please use shielded cable and a common mode ferrite core with both wires and the cable
shield passing through the core.
1-13
BEFORE USING
Confirmation of PC settings
1-7 About Basic Operation

1
The programming flow and various modes, software start and closing method are described as follows,
before actual programming with KV STUDIO, shall master some basic operation contents.
BEFORE USING
Ladder Programming Procedure and Mode

KV STUDIO has 4 modes: "Unit Editor", "editor", "monitor" and "simulator". Actual programming step,
step operating mode, major mode setting, etc. are as follows.
1 System Configuration
Set up the system configuration according to the design drawing. Set the
following contents with Unit Editor.
Editor
Prepare unit configuration information of
KV-5000/3000/1000/700 system
Set unit relay/DM assignment
Ladder Programming
Set unit function

Set KL system
Program ladder program according to PLC control project.
Editor
Create modulesTo create corresponding ladder program for each module.
Create macro To create corresponding macros as required.
Set execution sequence of modules
Conversion and Transfer of Ladder Program

Editor
Convert programmed ladder programs to codes that can be read by KV series.

After conversion, transfer to KV series.
Commission
Check the operation status such as devcie change.

Erroneous locations can be detected, and the ladder program can be fixed.
To simulate a KV-1000 connected state and perform debugging, use "Simulator."
To make an actual connection, write a program to the KV-1000 and perform debugging, use "Monitor."
Debug without the CPU Unit connected.
Debug with the CPU Unit connected.
Simulator
Monitor
Correction of ladder program and program transference

Editor
Ladder programs can be fixed and changed on Editor in addition to debugging on Monitor or Simulator.
Finally, when all debugging has ended, and it has been confirmed that a normal operating program has been
made, transfer and write the completed program to KV-1000.
1-14
About Screen
BEFORE USING
Mode screens
KV STUDIO modes, relations as follows
Editor
Monitor
Simulator
Online Editor
Describes the name and function of every image on the next page.
"About Editor", Page 1-19
"9-2 Monitoring", Page 9-34
"9-10 Online Edit", Page 9-92
"9-11 Simulation" Page 9-96
About current window

Now, the selected current window is called "Current window".
When several screens are displayed, if you want to select the operation screen, you just click the
header line to be used as current screen.
In general, the color of title bar of counter window is different from other windows.
1-15
About Help
BEFORE USING
Online help and PDF manual shall be also supplied in addition to document manual in KV STUDIO. For any
problem in operation, from tool bar, click
button or from "Help(H)" menu, select HTML help or PDF
manual.
On the menu, click "Help (H)" drop down menu, select the following help and PDF manual.
The contents displayed in the dropdown menu will vary with PLC model being edited.
Select Menu of KV-5000/3000

Name
Content
KV STUDIO User's Manual
PDF
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV

STUDIO user manual".
PDF
"KV-5000 / 3000 / 1000 series instruction reference

manual" PDF version.
CPU Unit User's Manual
PDF
"KV-5000 / 3000 / 1000 series User's Manual" PDF

version.
PDF
"KV-5000 / 3000 / 1000 series script programming

manual" PDF version.
System Macro Manual
PDF
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV5000 / 3000 / 1000 series System Macro Mannual".
KV-FL20V User's Manual
PDF
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KVFL20V User's Manual".
KV-LE20V User's Manual
PDF
"KV-LE20V series User's Manual" PDF version.
KV-L20V User's Manual
PDF
"KV-L20V series User's Manual" PDF version.
Instruction help
Help
Introduce HTML help of KV-5000 / 3000 / 1000

instructions used in "KV STUDIO".
Script function help
Help
Introduce HTML help of script function used in "KV

STUDIO".
Shortcut key list
Help
Introduce HTML help of KV-5000/3000 instructions

used in "KV STUDIO".
Related
Manuals
1-16
Format
Select menu of KV-1000

Format
Content
KV STUDIO
User's Manual
PDF
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV STUDIO user

manual".
Programming Manual
PDF
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-1000 series

Programming Manual".
Instruction
Reference Manual
PDF
"KV-5000/3000/1000 series PLC instruction reference manual"

PDF version.
CPU Unit
User's Manual
PDF
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-1000 series

User's Manual".
Instruction Manual
PDF
"KV-1000 series PLC Guide Manual" PDF version.
PDF
"KV-5000/3000/1000 series PLC script programming manual" PDF

version.
System macro
Manual
PDF
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-5000 / 3000 /

1000 series System Macro Manual".
Instruction help
Help
Introduce HTML help of KV-1000 instructions used in "KV STUDIO".
Script function help
Help
Introduce HTML help of script function used in "KV STUDIO".
Shortcut key list
Help
Introduce HTML help of KV-1000 instructions used in "KV STUDIO".
Select menu of KV-700/KV-700+M

Name
Format
Content
KV STUDIO
User's Manual
PDF

manual".
Instruction help
Help
Introduce HTML help of KV-700/700+M instructions used in "KV STUDIO".
Shortcut key list
Help
Introduce HTML help of KV-700/700+M instructions used in "KV STUDIO".
Select menu of KV-10(16)/KV-24(40)

Name
Format
Content
KV STUDIO
User's Manual
PDF

manual".
Instruction help
Help
Introduce HTML help of KV-10(16), KV-24(40) instructions used in

"KV STUDIO".
Shortcut key list
Help
Introduce HTML help of KV-10(16), KV-24(40) instructions used in

"KV STUDIO".
1-17
BEFORE USING
Name
Select menu of KV-P16
BEFORE USING
Name
Format
Content
KV STUDIO
User's Manual
PDF

manual".
Instruction help
Help
Introduce HTML help of KV-P16 instructions used in "KV STUDIO".
Help
Introduce HTML help of KV-KV-P16 instructions used in " KV

STUDIO".
Shortcut key list
1-18
1-8 About Editor

1
Describe function overview in editor, image display in editor, etc.
Editor is a tool applied to compile Ladder. In addition to instruction entry and comment registration,
various edition operations can be also conducted.
Use editor, can perform the following editions.
Ladder can be compiled using various instructions of Ladder language.
It can be transplanted to other projects via Ladder structurization.
Can conduct copy and move operation, etc.
Can register the comment to the device, and then transfer to PLC
The compiled Ladder is converted and then transferred into PLC
Can print the compiled Ladder, mnemonic symbol table, label comment and device status list, etc.
Notes About Ladder Program Editing

Limit
(1) Maximal 950 module macros can be compiled in 1 project. *
(Max. 750 modules)
(2) Max. line number that every module / macro *can edit, when KV-5000, KV-3000, KV-1000, 40000
rungs; when KV-700/700+M, KV-10(16), KV-24(40), KV-P16, 29998 rungs.
(3) The size of 1 program block is maximal 100 lines.
*
Multiple modules and macros cannot be used for KV-700/700+M, KV-10(16), KV-24(40), KV-P16.
Note
For example, 950 module macros of 40000 lines can not be transmited to CPU.
Finally confirm according to data size limit after conversion. So, shall confirm the
transmissible data size after "convert".
"Conversion", Page 8-2
When KV STUDIO running speed is slow

When using KV STUDIO, if multiple application softwares are started at the same time, inadequate
system memory and resource may occur sometimes. So, frequent hard disk access, slow operating
speed will occur.
Please close other application software, add computer memory, etc., guarantee valid memory and
resource.
1-19
BEFORE USING
Editor Function Overview
1-8 About Editor
Names and Functions of Editor Screen
BEFORE USING
When starting KV STUDIO, main window is only displayed before Ladder edit window displayed.
Ladder edit window is only opened when creating new module and macro and opening the compiled
module and macro.
TIP
Set auto-read function, when the set file has been started, will be auto-read and displayed.
"Auto-load", Page 4-16
Menu bar
Header field
Ladder editing window
Display menu for

executing different
functions.
Display item name.
Edit window of ladder program

and macro.
Display each module and
macro.
Toolbar
Arrange and display
buttons for executing
different functions.
Mode bar
Display current mode
of KV STUDIO.
Workspace
Arrange and display
buttons for executing
different functions.
Module library
Display registered module.
1-20
Output window
Label edit window
Comment edit window
Display search result

or error and other
information.
Edit window of device

label.
Edit commented window.
Status bar
Instruction/macro/pack pallet
Display description of
the selected function
and key status, etc.
Enter instruction and macro / PACK instruction into Ladder edit

window. Enter into Ladder edit window using drag method.
1-8 About Editor
Docking Navigator
box, Docking Navigator of the specified configuration target will be displayed.
Place to Docking Navigator, the window will be combined to the specified position.
Besides, Docking position is displayed in grid form on image.
Docking Navigator type
Description
Display the up and down, left and right position of image edited.
Release mouse button on the above mark, will dock to the up/down, left/
right position of the edit image.
Displayed when the mouse pointer is located on Ladder edit window.

Release mouse button on the up/down, left/right mark, will dock to up/
down, left/right position of the Ladder edit window.
Displayed when mouse pointer is located in workspace and output
window, etc.
Release mouse button on the up/down, left/right mark, will dock to up/
down, left/right position of the Docking target window.
When released to the central
of Docking Navigator, the Docking
target window will be displayed as tab.
Auto-hide function
It is a function to display workspace, output window, observation window, etc. if necessary.
Click the PIN icon displayed on the top right corner of up/down and left/right workspace, output window,
observation window, etc.
Icon
Description
Display status of workspace, output window, observation window, etc.
Workspace, output window, observation window, etc., , will be displayed
as tab on up and down, left/right side of the edit image. Displayed when
moving mouse pointer to the tab or clicking the tab.
1-21
BEFORE USING
When customizing edit image, drag workspace, output window, observation window, etc. and dialog
1-8 About Editor
About Ladder Editing Window
BEFORE USING
Every module and macro can be displayed in Ladder compiler window.
Header field
Column No.
Display module/macro name.
Column No. of Ladder Program
Cursor
Select device and
other edit objects.
Connecting wire
Rung number
Display instruction in
symbol format.
Line No. of Ladder

Program
Instruction symbol
Step No.
Display instruction in
symbol format.
Step No. of Ladder

ProgramDisplayed
only after converted,
not displayed after
Ladder changed.
1-22
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
2
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
About project management.
2-1
Project Management 2-2
2-1
2-1 Project Management

This chapter details project management.
About Project Folder
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
KV STUDIO processes various data files. Batch management of data file in every project folder.
The following tool support data exists in a project folder.
KV STUDIO data
Unit Editor data
CPU positioning parameter edit data
MOTION BUILDER/positioning unit simple setting data
PROTOCOL STUDIO data
MV LINK STUDIO data
KV-DN20Set up data
KV-CL20 Set up data
Mail setting data
Device default value data
File register setting data
Real-time chart monitor data
High-speed time chart monitor data
Panel setting data
Logging/tracing data
FLSetting tool data
Project Folder
KV STUDIO
data
Unit Editor
data
CPU positioning
parameter
edit data
KV
MOTION+
data
MOTION
BUILDER
data
Ladder,
comment ect.
Connection unit
setting, relay
assignment, KL
slave setting ect.
KV-5000/3000/
1000/700 CPU unit
Simple positioning
function parameter
KV-ML16V/MC40V/
MC20V Positioning/
motion unit
parameter
KV-H20S/
H40S/H20G
Positioning
unit parameter
PROTOCOL
STUDIO
data
KV-L20V/R
PROTOCOL
STUDIO
parameter
MV LINK
STUDIO
data
MV-L40
MV LINK
STUDIO
parameter
...
After compiling project in KV STUDIO, project folder and KV STUDIO data file will be automatically generated.
During tools start, unit editor, CPU positioning parameter edit, MOTION BUILDER, PROTOCOL STUDIO, MV
LINK STUDIO, KV MOTION+, and data for every support tool of MV LINK STUDIO setting tools will be generated.
Create a Project Folder

Project folder is created under the following cases by default.
Project folder is created in " PROJECT " subfolder, the installation target of KV STUDIO.
When installation target folder is not changed,
Windows Vista:
C:\Users\<User name>\Documents\KEYENCE\KVS5\KVS\PROJECT
Windows XP/2000:
C:\Documents and Settings\<User name>\My Documents\KEYENCE\KVS5\KVS\

PROJECT
Example
When "USER" project folder is created in subfolder "PROJECT", the KV STUDIO
installation target.
Windows Vista:
C:\Users\<User name>\Documents\KEYENCE\KVS5\KVS\PROJECT
Windows XP/2000:
C:\Documents and Settings\<User name>\My Documents\KEYENCE\

KVS5\KVS\PROJECT
User data files such as KV STUDIO data files, etc. are stored in "USER" folder.
2-2
About User Data File
Project folder stores KV STUDIO data file, user data file, etc.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Item
File name
Extension
Content
name
KV STUDIO data file

Project name
.kpr
Module name
.mod
Project file
Module name
Macro name
.mcr
Macro file
Project name
.cm1, .cm2
Comments file
Project name
.lbl
Label file
Project name
.klg
Recording setup file
Project name
.mil
Mail setting file
DevInit
.dvi
FR folder
Device default value setting data

Store File Register setting file.
CpuMb
.inf
CPU positioning parameter setting file
MonEnv
.kem
Monitor File
Project name
.cde
Program file for conversion
Project name
.dcm
Comments file for conversion
UnitSet
.ue2
Unit setting file
UnitSet
.ue1
UnitSet2
.ue1
UnitSet3
.ue1
KV STUDIO Ver.3.07Use unit setting file for version above
Module/macro name
.mnm
Mnemonics list output file
( user input)
.csv
Unit specification output file
( user input)
.csv
Reference information output file (verification)
( user input)
.csv
Batch change output file
operand-history
.txt
Keep txt entry, complete backup.
Project name
.pnl
Hold panel information(only KV-P16).
componentFolder
Can save in positions

other than project
folder
Hold unit configuration switch information.
Positioning unit simple setting / MOTION BUILDER data file

(user input)
.mb2
Positioning unit file
PROTOCOL STUDIO data file

(user input)
.psm
PROTOCOL STUDIO communication macro file
MV LINK STUDIO MV-L40 parameter file

(user input)
.mls
MV LINK STUDIO MV-L40 parameter file
.d20
DeviceNetconnection setup file
.c20
CC-Linkconnection setup file
KV-DN20Set up data file

(user input)
KV-CL20 Set up data file

(user input)
KV MOTION+ Data file

(user input)
.mvl
KV-ML16V setting data file
(user input)
.mvc
KV-MC40V/MC20V setting data file
(user input)
.mul
SV series MECHATROLINK-II setting data
(user input)
.mup
SV series address/pluse input setting data
"Project compression save", can collect user data file in project folder and save in a "Project compressed file (*.kp Z)".
"Compress/save Project", Page 4-4
2-3
File Manipulation
Create a project
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
A new project is created for ladder porgram making.

For more information, please refer to
"Various File Commands", Page 4-2.
Change project name
Select "File(F)" -> "Open project(O)" in sequence from menu.

Other procedure
Click
button.
Press Ctrl key + O key
Select the folder whose project name to be changed, from right-click menu, select "name
change", enter filename.
Change item name.
Note
In "changing Project names", only the project folder can be changed. After changing
project folder, data in folder will be not changed. To change data file name in folder, must
operate "Save project as" on edit image.
"Save project as", Page 4-3
Delete project
To delete a project, select the folder where the project name is to be deleted, press the
Delete
key or
select "delete" from right-click menu.
Note
Once project folder is deleted, all data in project folder will be deleted.
Copy project
Select file project name, press Ctrl + C keys to copy and press Ctrl + V to paste, or right-click, then
from the menu, select according to " Copy", " Paste" sequence, and can copy the project.
Set up password
"Password setting" is a feature to inhibit reading unit setting message, program, comment and record
setting saved in KV-5000/3000/1000/700.
Once a password is set, data cannot be read unless the correct password is entered.
Password can be set when reading program from KV-5000/3000/1000/700 is not allowed.
For details, please refer to
Note
2-4
"Set password", Page 4-6.
Password cannot be setup for KV-P16, KV-10 (16), and KV-24 (40).
3
UNIT EDITOR
UNIT EDITOR
This chapter describes the features of Unit Editor, and how to use these
features.
3-1
Overview 3-2
3-2
Menu list in Unit Editor 3-4
3-3
Menu List in Slave Setup Window 3-7
3-4
Names and Functions of Different Parts of Screen 3-9
3-5
Basic Operation of Unit Editor 3-13
3-6
Operation of Unit Editor 3-15
3-7
Use the Slave Setup Window 3-31
3-8
Environment Setting 3-39
3-1
3-1 Overview
This section gives a high-level description of features of Unit Editor, and the cautions to follow when
using Unit Editor.
TIP
Unit Editor cannot be used by KV-10 (16), KV-24 (40), and KV- P 16.
3
UNIT EDITOR
Functional Overview
To execute a ladder program, the units connected with KV-5000/3000/1000/700 PLC series should be
registered in CPU.
Unit Editor is used to select and configure the units and transfer the configuration to KV-1000 PLC. In
addition, unit and KL slave station settings need to be done.
On conventional PLC models, hardware settings have to be made on each unit by setting the DIP
switches. With the KV-5000/3000/1000/700, however, hardware settings are basically no longer
required, and units can be set up simply in Unit Editor. After you have built your system, you can
change set-tings without having to remove units.
Settings on Unit Editor
KV-5000/3000/
Unit Editor
1000/700
KV STUDIO
series
Ladder program
Note
Unit Editor cannot be started up separately. You have to open the ladder file and start
it from KV STUDIO.
Unit Editor Settings

The following settings are required in Unit Editor.
Create unit configuration information of KV-5000/KV-3000/KV-1000/KV-700 system

A list of KV-5000/KV-3000/KV-1000/KV-700 unit configurations is created and check to ensure all the
units act properly in system operation.
Also the "Auto-replace Devices" tab should be configured, whereby you can change relay/DM numbers
in the ladder simply by changing the corrsponding unit relay/DM numbers in Unit Editor. Since unit
configuration information is integrated with the ladder program, device configuration errors are then
avoided.
Integration
Integra
Ladder file
3-2
Unit Editor
3-1 Overview
Unit relay/DM setting

For KV-5000 / KV-3000 / KV-1000 / KV-700, the setting range for non-CPU unit relays/DMs is as follows:
Manual and Auto modes are available for relay/DM assignment.
Relay No.
DM No.
KV-5000
R1000 to R99915
DM0 to DM65534
KV-3000
R1000 to R99915
DM0 to DM65534
R1000 to R59915
DM0 to DM65534
KV-700+M
R1000 to R59915
DM0 to DM39999
KV-700
R1000 to R59915
DM0 to DM19999
UNIT EDITOR
KV-1000
Unit setting
You can set up the functions of each unit.
Mistakes are possible as you set up units while reading the manual.
Easy setup. Just select according to the menu.
Building/setting KL systems from Unit Editor

KL Link System using the KL Master Unit KL-N20V can be set on Unit Editor.
Switch setting is very tedious!
With Unit Editor, master unit settings transfer

is an easy thing to do.
3-3
3-2 Menu list in Unit Editor

The section descibes Unit Editor menus and icons. For more information, please see the relevant
pages.
File
3
UNIT EDITOR
The options for file operation and print are as follows:

Item
Icon
Description
Import
Read unit configuration from PLC
Close
Page
Read unit settings and comments from other projects.
3-25
Read unit configuration information from PLC.
3-26
Exit Unit Editor, return to Ladder edit image.
3-15
Edit
The editing options are as follows.
Item
Icon
Description
Page
Cut
Cut the selected area.
3-17
Copy
Copy the selected range.
3-17
Paste
Paste the cut data on the cursor position.
3-17
Delete the selected area.
3-17
Delete
Display the "Unit comments" dialog box appears
Unit comments
Edit
comments
and enter unit comments.

Display the "Block comments" dialog box and enter
Block comments
block comments.
Display the "System comments" dialog box and
System comments
enter system comments.

Reserve/unreserve a unit.
Reserve nunit
Manually set up the relay number of a connected
Batch input relay No.
unit in the list.
3-26
3-26
3-27
3-27
3-20
Convert
The relay/DM assignment-related options are as follows.
Item
Jump to error line
Auto-assign relay/DM
Verify device
3-4
Icon
Description
Jump to the unit position that corresponds to the error
displayed in message window.
Automatically Assign relay/DM.
Check to enture duplicated relay/DM settings are
avoided.
Page
3-27
3-18
3-21
Setup Slave
The options for KL slave setting are as follows.
Note
The menu is displayed only when KL- N20V unit is selected in the unit configuration area.
Icon
Description
Open slave setup window.
Read unit setting message and comment of slave
Import slave information
station from other projects.

Copy unit information compiled using address setting
Copy KL information
software via KL.
Paste KL information
Paste KL unit information
KL-N20V setup
Start KL Address Setup Software
(KL address setup)
UNIT EDITOR
Item
Setup slave
Page
3-28
3-28
3-29
3-29
3-30
View
The items that are related to window display are as follows.
Item
Icon
Description
Toolbar
Display/hide the selection toolbar.
Status bar
Display/hide the selection status bar.
Message area
Display/hide the selection message area.
Display unit setting
Display unit setting window of the unit selected by the

current cursor.
Switch between bitmap display/box display of the unit in
Display bitmap/with box
unit configuration area.
Page
3-12
3-22
3-30
When KV STUDIO is in monitor / online editor mode,

Unit Monitor
the monitor of the selected unit is displayed in the unit
3-23
configuration area.
Custom Monitor
Buffer memory monitor
When KV STUDIO is in monitor / online editor mode,

the customized monitor is displayed.
3-23
When KV STUDIO is in monitor / online editor mode, the

expansion buffer memory of the selected unit in unit
3-24
configuration area is monitored via batch monitor window.
Options
This menu groups together options relating to environmental settings on Unit Editor.
Item
Setup options
Icon
Description
Environment setting of option setting Unit Editor.
Page
3-39
3-5
Window
The window navigation options are as follows.
Item
Icon
Description
Page
UNIT EDITOR
Unit configuration area
Select a unit configuration area.
3-10
Select unit
Select a unit icon.
3-10
Setup unit
Select a unit setting icon.
3-11
Update setting
Select a refresh setting tab.
3-11
Message area
Select a message area.
3-12
Help
Display help information.
Item
How to use Unit Editor
3-6
Icon
Description
Page
Display the help information on operations of Unit Editor.
3-30
3-3 Menu List in Slave Setup Window

The section describes the slave setup menus and icons. For more information, please see the
respective pages.
File
3
Item
Icon
Description
UNIT EDITOR
The commands for file operation and printing are summarized as follows.
Page
Copy the slave setting information from other project.
3-36
Close slave setup window
Close currently edited slave station setting window.
3-33
Edit
The options for unit editing are as follows.
Item
Icon
Description
Page
Cut
Cut the selected area.
3-35
Copy
Copy the selected area.
3-35
Paste
Paste the cut data on the cursor position.
3-35
Delete the selected area.
3-34
Delete
Display the " Unit/slave comments" dialog box and enter
Edit unit/slave comments
unit and slave comments.

Reserve a unit/slave.
Reserve unit/slave
3-37
3-37
Convert
The slave address assignment-related options are as follows.
Item
Icon
Description
Jump to the unit position that corresponds to the error
Jump to error rung
displayed in message window.

Assign addresses automatically.
Auto assign adress
Check to ensure that duplicated slave station address
Check device
assignment is avoided.
Page
3-37
3-35
3-21
View
Item
Icon
Model
See
Page
Toolbar
Display/hide the selection toolbar.
Status bar
Display/hide the selection status bar.
Message area
Display/hide the selection message area.
Setup unit/slave property
Open unit setting window of slave station selected by

the current cursor.
3-7
3-3 Menu List in Slave Setup Window
Window
Item
Icon
Model
See
Page
UNIT EDITOR
Slave Configuration Area
Select slave configuration area.
3-31
Select unit
Select unit selection icon.
3-32
Setup unit
Select unit setting icon.
3-32
Setup address
Select address setting icon.
3-33
Message area
Select message area.
3-12
Help
Display help information.
Item
3-8
Model
See
Page
Display the help information on operations of Unit Editor.
3-38
Icon
3-4 Names and Functions of Different Parts of Screen

This section describe the screens displayed in Unit Editor.
Names and Functions of Different Parts of Unit Editor
3
UNIT EDITOR
Unit selection icon

Unit setup icon
Refresh setting tab.*
Select configuration unit, and
display,
set,
change
the
message of unit configured.
Display unit configuration.
Message area
Display error and action message in
operation of Unit Editor.
When KV-5000 / 3000 is selected, this is displayed when KV-FL20V (KV-FL20V mode) or KV-5000
(FL-net mode) is selected via unit configuration area.
3-9

The configuration of unit set is displayed in Unit Editor.
Following operations can be conducted in unit configuration area
Unit configuration, deletion, connection position change
UNIT EDITOR
Selection of the unit with detailed setting

Display of current consumption, weight and size of overall system
Every unit assignment, relay address display
Display unit configuration message
System information.
Displays the width (mm), height (mm), depth (mm), current consumption (mA), and weight (g) of units in a linked connection for each stage.
Unit No.
Displays the connection No. of the
unit assigned as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and so
forth starting from the CPU.
Extension cable
Extension cables are displayed as a broken line when Extension Unit KV-EB1 is
used in a multi-stage configuration.
Unit cursor (red frame)
Unit information
Displays the model No. of placed units
and assigned relay Nos.
Displays the currently selected cursor position.
Select unit tab

This is used for unit configuration. Select the unit to be configured fromthe Unit Selection window.
Indicates unit type.
Indicates unit model.
3-10
Setup unit tab

Display detailed settings such as the mode, assignment relay No. of the unit configured in unit
configuration area or the setting that can be changed.
3
Indicates setting item.
UNIT EDITOR
The project whose setting cannot be

changed is displayed in grey.
Indicates
the
setting
content
corresponding to every project.

"*" is displayed in initial value of the
selected project.
"Set up Configuration Unit", Page
3-22
Refresh setting tab

When KV-5000/3000 is selected, this tab is displayed only when KV-FL20V (KV-FL20V mode) or KV5000 (FL-net mode) is selected via unit configuration area.
KV-FL20V auto refresh setting and refresh cycle setting.
For details, please see
"KV-FL20V User Manual".
3-11
Message area
Display error and conversion result in operation of Unit Editor.
3
UNIT EDITOR
Display conversion result and processing content message.

Indicates the position of message corresponding unit.
Display processing of Unit Editor.
Display processing result using icon.
Prompting message is displayed as per
following sequence.
: Error message
: Alarm information
: Normal processing information
3-12
3-5 Basic Operation of Unit Editor

This section describes how to use Unit Editor.
System Configuration Procedure

The following example describes the procedure for creating a new system using Unit Editor in the
K
V
K
V
K
V
K
V
K
V
K
V
U
7
3
0
0
0
C
3
2
X
C
B
1
6
T
C
B
1
6
T
C
L
2
0
V
H
2
0
S
A
D
4
0
Select "File(F)"
End unit
K
V
K
V
UNIT EDITOR
following unit configuration.
"New project(N)" from the KV STUDIO edit screen menu.
The [New project] dialog box is displayed.
Enter new project name, select corresponding type, click "OK" button. To change the save
directory, click the "reference" button, select the save directory and click the "OK" button.
The Unit Editor startup confirmation dialog box is displayed.
Click the "Yes" button. This starts up Unit Editor.
Item
"Yes"
"No"
(Read Unit setting)
Explanation
Start Unit Editor. Please set up unit configuration.
Display KV STUDIO editor image.
When setting unit composition, separately start the Unit Editor.
Read the unit setting information from CPU unit.
Please pre-set computer and CPU unit to communication enabled status.
Click "select unit(1)" label.
3-13
3-5 Basic Operation of Unit Editor
From unit selection window, select the connected unit, drag it to unit configuration area.
Displayed in edit image.
Here, still take above unit configuration as an example, drag according to KV-U7->KV-c32xc->KVAD40
3
UNIT EDITOR
TIP
CPU unit and terminal unit have been configured during initial start of Unit Editor.
From the menu, select "Convert (P)"
"Auto assign relay/DM (A)" (relay / DM automatic
assignment).
Auto-assign relay No. and its result are displayed in message window.
TIP
Auto-assign relay / DM step is described here. When manually assigning relay no., please
see
"Manually Assign Unit Relay/DM", Page 3-18
From unit configuration area, double click on the unit where detailed setting will be made, set
with "Setup unit" tab.
TIP
For setting method and content of every unit, please refer to related manual of every unit.
After setting up all the units, then click the "OK" button.
Saving the generated system, the KV STUDIO
screen is displayed.
3-14
3-6 Operation of Unit Editor

This section describes how to use Unit Configuration Area
Start Unit Editor

"Tool(T)"
"Unit Editor(U)" Ctrl + U
UNIT EDITOR
Select "Tool(T)" -> "Unit Editor(U)" from the KV STUDIO editor menu.
Start Unit Editor.
TIP
If project does not exist, Unit Editor cannot be started.

"Various File Instructions", Page 4-2
Exit Unit Editor

File(F)
Close(S)
Select "File(F)" -> "Close(S)". The "Confirm" dialog box appears.

Item
"Yes"
"No"
"Cancel"
Note
Explanation
Save unit configuration setting,
exit the Unit Editor.
Abandon unit composition setting,
exit the Unit Editor.
Return Unit Editor.
To enable operation of KV-5000 / 3000 / 1000 / 700 unit, the unit setting message must
be set up. To transfer the project to CPU unit during non-saved exit, please recompile unit setting message.
TIP
Click the "OK" button and the confirmation dialog box will not displayed. Then save unit
configuration and exit Unit Editor.
3-15
Display Window
Window (W)
Select unit(1)
Alt + 1
Setup unit (2)
Alt + 2
UNIT EDITOR
Refresh setting (3) Alt + 3

Three types of windows are displayed on the right side of Unit Editor: unit configuration window, unit
selection window, and unit setup window. These windows can be toggled to be displayed.
"Select unit tab", Page 3-10
"Setup unit tab", Page 3-11
"Refresh setting tab", Page 3-11
TIP
When Unit Editor is started, the Unit Selection window will be displayed.
And the last-exited windows is displayed when Unit Editor is started next time.
Unit Configuration
Select the unit to be connected from the unit selection window, and drag-and-drop the unit to the edit
window.
The unit is placed at the drag-and-drop position.
Note
CPU unit and terminal unit have been configured during initial start of Unit Editor.
The Power Supply Unit can be placed at only the leftmost position.
Only one CPU unit is allowed per system, and can be placed at the leftmost
position of the upper row or next to the Power Supply Unit.
Extension Unit KV-EB1 is automatically placed when each unit is placed positions
on the lower row even if KV-EB1 is not placed.
The maximum number of units that can be connected to a single system is 16
(excluding Power Supply Unit, CPU Unit and Extension Unit) per horizontal layer.
Three rows are provided.
3-16
Delete a Configured Unit

"Edit(E)"
From the menu, select the unit to be deleted, click "Edit (E)"
"Delete(D)" Delete
"delete (D)" or from right-click menu,
UNIT EDITOR
select "delete".
TIP
CPU unit and terminal unit cannot be deleted.

To delete multiple continuous units, select the multiple units with the mouse and then delete.
The deleted section will be displayed in gray.
Note
If you delete the unit of a system already assigned relays/DMs, the relay/DM Nos. of
the units that were deleted from the ladder program are displayed in red as invalid
operands, and the program can no longer be transferred to the PLC.
Please clear invalid operand via Ladder edit image or compile Ladder again. Besides,
in "Tool (T)" -> "option (O)" of Ladder edit image, when "Device auto-convert mode
by changes to unit config" checkbox of "system settings" label is not selected, it
cannot be invalid operand.
"Clear Invalid Operands", Page 8-4
Copy/move a Configured Unit

"Edit(E)"
"Cut(T)" Ctrl + X
"Copy(C)" Ctrl + C
"Paste(P)" Ctrl + V
To copy, select "Edit(E)" -> "Copy(C)" from the menu. To move, select "Edit(E)"-> "Cut(T)" from
the menu.
Other procedure
Copy
Select the unit, right-click and select "Copy".
Move
Select the unit, right-click and select "Cut".
TIP
The moved part is displayed in dark.

When moving the unit to lower segment for the first time, expansion unit KV- EB1 is
automatically configured (auto-configuration is set to ON).
3-17
Note
If you "cut" the unit of a system already assigned relays/DMs, the relay/DM Nos. of
the unit that was cut from the ladder program are displayed in red as invalid
operands, and the program can no longer be transferred to the PLC.
The relay/DM Nos. of the pasted unit will not be inherited even if "Paste" is executed.
Please clear invalid operand via Ladder edit image or compile Ladder again.
UNIT EDITOR
"Clear Invalid Operands", Page 8-4

Besides, in "Tool (T)" (tools)
"option (O)" of Ladder edit image, when "Device
auto-convert mode by changes to unit config)" checkbox of "system settings" label

is not selected, it cannot be invalid operand.
Move the unit cursor to the unit paste position, right-click the mouse button, and select "Paste".
Other procedure
Select "Edit(E)"
"Paste(P)"
Moving a reserved unit to which relays/DMs are assigned

Select the unit, and drag-and-drop the unit to place where you want to move it to. When you do this, the
relays Nos. do not change even if the unit is moved after relays have been assigned.
Auto Assign Unit Relay/DM

"Convert(P)"
From the menu, select "Convert (P)"
"Auto assign relay/DM(A)" F5
"Auto assign relay / DM (A)" (relay / DM automatic
assignment).
Auto assign relays/DMs.
TIP
Auto assignment rules can be set in option setting.

It is defaulted that relays are assigned from R300000 and DM from DM100000 from the
neighbouring position of CPU unit.
"Device assignment setting", Page 3-41
Manually Assign Unit Relay/DM

View(V)
Display unit setting(R)
Assign relay/DM No. manually by the following steps.
From the menu, select the unit to be set, click "View (V)"
"display unit setting (R)" or select
"display unit setting" from the right-click menu.

The setting of the unit selected in unit configuration area is displayed in the unit setting window.
3-18
Select "leading DM" of "Item" and "Setting value" of

"Leading input (Output) relay No.", and enter the setting
value.
3
It has the " Auto- replace function " that relay / DM No. can be also automatically changed
when relay/ DM No. of relay / DM system is changed.
It has been set to automatic switching status in initial setting. When automatic switching
function is not required, in "Tool (T)"
"Option (O)" of ladder edit image, do not select
the "device auto-convert mode by changes to unit config" checkbox of "system settings"
label and change corresponding settings.
Note
Use channel unit to enter leading relay No. Channel no. refers to the part of every
relay No. except the final 2 bit.channels for relay R 10000.
Assignable relay in every unit, DM is within global device range.
When specifying other than above range, error may occur in conversion. Please
confirm within global device range during setting.
"Entire Assignments Settings of Local Devices", Page 8-6
An even number should be entered for the leading DM No.
3-19
UNIT EDITOR
TIP
Batch Relay Number Assignment

"Edit(E)"
"Batch input relay No.(A)"
UNIT EDITOR
Select "Edit(E)"
Click "Relay No." column, enter relay No. assigned via ch unit, click "OK" button.
TIP
"Batch input relay No.(A)" from menu.
It has the "Auto-replace function" that relay / DM No. can be also automatically changed
when relay/DM No. of relay/DM system is changed.
It has been set to automatic switching status in initial setting. When automatic switching
function is not required, in "Tool (T)"
"Option (O)" of Ladder edit image, do not select
the "device auto-convert mode by changes to unit config" checkbox of "system settings"
label and change corresponding settings.
Note
Use channel unit to enter leading relay No. Channel No. refers to the part of every
relay No. except the final 2 bit. channels for relay R10000.
3-20
Check System Relay/DM Assignment

"Convert(P)"
"Check device(C)" F6
Check whether unit configuration in Unit Editor and every unit relay / DM assignment are correct.
When exiting Unit Editor, the device is automatically checked, in case of any error, its content
message will be displayed.
Select "Convert(P)"
"Check device(C)" from the menu.
Start checking unit configuration and relay / DM assignment.
Inspection result is displayed in message area.

Error
content,
or
related
message are displayed in

message area.
"Jump to Error Line",
Page 3-37
3-21
UNIT EDITOR
TIP
Unit Setting Details

View(V)
Select the unit to be set, on the menu, select "View (V)"
"Display unit setting (R)" or select "Display
UNIT EDITOR
unit setting" from the right-click menu.

The setting of the unit selected in unit configuration area is displayed in the unit setting window.
The Unit Setup window of the selected unit is displayed.
According to the following step, display the unit selected in unit configuration area in unit setup icon.
Set up Configuration Unit

View(V)
Conduct detailed setting of configuration unit in unit configuration area. For details about the setting
project and setting method of every unit, please see corresponding manual for every unit.
Select the unit to be set, on the menu, select "View (V)"
"Display unit setting (R)" or select
"Display unit setting" from the right-click menu.

Select unit in unit configuration area displayed in the unit setting icon.
Click the item whose setting is to be changed, and enter the new set value.
When entering from the text box

The text box is displayed. Enter the desired numerical value.
When entering from the pull-down list

The pulldown list is displayed. Select the desired item.
3-22
Display Unit Monitor

Unit monitor(U) Ctrl + Alt + U
View(V)
When KV STUDIO is in monitor status, unit monitor cannot be displayed from Unit Editor.
"Unit monitor (U)" or from
right-click menu, select "Unit monitor".

For details of unit monitor, please see user manual of every unit.
Display Customize Monitor.

View(V)
Custom Monitor(M) Ctrl + Alt + M
When KV STUDIO is in monitor status, customized monitor cannot be displayed from Unit Editor.
To select CPU unit, on the menu, select "View (V)"
"Unit monitor (M)" or from right-click menu,
select "Customize monitor".

For specific information related with customize monitor, please see
"9-5 Custom monitor", (Page 9-
51)..
3-23
UNIT EDITOR
Select the monitor unit to be displayed, on the menu, select "View (V)"
Display Buffer Memory Monitor

Display(V)
Buffer memory monitor(B) Ctrl + Alt + R
3
When KV STUDIO is in monitor status, buffer memory monitor cannot be displayed from Unit Editor.
UNIT EDITOR
Select the buffer memory monitor unit to be displayed, on the menu, select "View (V)"
memory monitor (B)" or from right-click menu, select "buffer memory monitor".
For detailed settings, please see
3-24
"9-4 Batch monitoring", (Page 9-48).
"Buffer
Import Unit Setting Info and Unit Comments

File(F)
Import(I)
According to the following step, read the unit setting message and unit comment compiled via other
UNIT EDITOR
projects.
Select from menu "File(F)"
"Import(I)".
Import Unit" dialog box is displayed.
Specify the position where unit setting message file and unit comment are imported.
Item
Explanation
Name of unit setting
Display the storage position imported to unit setting message file and unit comment.
info file
Click "browse" button, use (open file) dialogue, can select unit setting message file.
Unit list
Unit No.
The list displays message related to unit composition to which the file to be imported.
Display Unit No. of unit setting message.
After selecting checkbox, change to import target.
Unit name
Indicates unit name.
Position
Display the number of sections of unit and unit connection position (No.).
Comments
Display unit comments.
(select All)
Set all Unit No. checkbox to ON.
(Unselect)
Set all Unit No. checkbox to OFF.
Select import unit, click OK" button.

Import unit setting info and unit comments.
3-25
Read Unit Configuration from PLC

From the menu, select "File (F)"
"Read unit config from PLC (G)".
Read unit configuration information from PLC.

On the menu, select "File (F)"
UNIT EDITOR
Note
"Read unit composition from PLC (G)".
Please set KV STUDIO and PLC to communication enabled status.

"Communication Settings", Page 9-4
Every unit setting of unit composition read out changes to initialization (unsetting)
status. Unit setting message cannot be read under read out status of unit composition.
Enter Comments
"Edit (E)"
Edit cmnts (O)
Unit cmnts (U)
Ctrl + Shift + U
Block cmnts(B)
Ctrl + Shift + B
System cmnts(S)
Ctrl + Shift + S
Enter the comment into the unit configuration area.

Note
Up to 80 half-width characters (40 full-width characters) can be inputted for

comments.
Unit cmnts
Use unit configuration area, add comment on the selected unit.
On the menu, select "Edit (E)"
"Edit cmnts (O)"
"Unit cmnt
(U)".
"Unit comments" dialog box appears and input unit comments.
TIP
Unit comment entered is displayed in hint (tool tip)

method on unit configuration area.
Block cmnts
Use unit configuration area, add comment on the block containing
the selected unit.
"Edit cmnts (O)"
"Block
cmnt (U)".
"Block cmnts" dialog box appears and input block comments.
TIP
Block comment entered is displayed under system

information of unit configuration area.
3-26
System comments
Add comment on to the system composition set.
"Edit cmnts (O)"
"System
cmnts".
"System cmnts" dialog box appears and input system comments.
UNIT EDITOR
TIP
The system comment entered will be displayed left-above

of unit configuration area.
Reserve /Unreserve
"Edit(E)"
"Reserve unit(R)" Ctrl + R

Unreserve unit(R) Ctrl + R
Select the unit to be reserved, on the menu, select "Edit (E)"
"unit reserve (R)" or from right-click
menu, select "unit reserve".

To increase preset unit, and to install, disassemble unit due to device category in same Ladder, can
use " Reserving " unit method to flexibly set Ladder unit.
Setting message of " Reserving (preset)" unit is not transmitted.
To remove reserve, firstly select the unit reserved, on the menu, select "Edit (E)"
"unit unreserve
release (R)" or from right-click menu, select "unit reserve release".
Jump to Error Line

"Convert(P)"
"Jump to error line(E)" F4
Display the slave device concerned in error messages that are displayed when an address is assigned,
slave devices are added or deleted, etc.
Click the error message on the message area of Unit Editor.

The selected message
is displayed inverted.
3-27
Select "Convert(P)"
Other procedure
"Jump to error line (E)" from the menu.
Double click the selected message.
The cursor moves to the slave device on the slave placement area where the error occurred.
UNIT EDITOR
Diplay the "Slave Setup" Window

"Setup slave(K)"
"Setup slave(N)" Ctrl + N
Select KL- N20V, set slave station to connect KL.
Select setting slave station KL- N20V, press menu, select "Setup slave (K)" (slave station setting)
"Setup slave(N)" (slave station setting).
The "Slave setup window" screen is displayed.
Other procedure
TIP
Select setting slave station KL- N20V and right-click, select "Stave setup".
For setting method of KL slave station units, please refer to related manual of every unit
Import Slave Information

"Setup slave(K)"
"Import slave info(I)" Ctrl + K
Read slave device setup information created in other projects. For the system with same slave station
configuration, using "Import slave info" method, can directly read system message and simply set.
Read slave settings information by the following steps.
Select KL - N20V reading slave station message, on the menu, select "Slave station setting (K)"
"Import slave info (I)" or from right-click menu, select "Import slave info".
3-28
Specify the position where slave station setting message file is imported.
3
UNIT EDITOR
Item
Explanation
Display the position where slave station setting message file is imported. Click
Name of slave setting info file
"preview" button, use (open) dialog box to select unit setting message file.
List
Display unit (master) list
Select All
Select all units (masters).
Unselect
Deselect
Select the unit (Master Station) to which slave information will be imported, click "OK" button.
Slave setting information is imported.
Copy KL Unit Information

"Setup slave(K)"
"Copy KL info(K)" Ctrl + Alt + C
Copies KL unit information created on the KL address setup software to the Clipboard. For details of
operation, refer to the "KL-N20V User's Manual".
Paste KL Unit Information

"Setup slave(K)"
"Paste KL info(L)" Ctrl + Alt + V
Imports KL unit information pasted to the Clipboard by "Copy KL info" to the Unit Editor. For details of
operation, refer to the "KL-N20V User's Manual".
3-29
Start KL-N20V Setup(KL Address Setup) Software

"Setup slave(K)"
"KL-N20V setup(KL adress setup)(E)" Ctrl + E
3
Start up the KL address setup software, and set the addresses of the KL-N20V. For details of operation,
UNIT EDITOR
refer to the KL-N20V User's Manual. "
TIP
When using the KL address setup software for setting addresses, "Communications with
other KL master units" in the KL-N20V unit setup window is automatically set to "TRUE".
Change the Display Mode of Bitmap

View(V)
Display bitmap(B)
In unit configuration area and slave station configuration area, change the bitmap display method of
configuration unit. Actual unit connection status is displayed in bitmap. The assignment relay No. can
be displayed in the box.
TIP
The system saves setting content. It will directly enter setting status during the next start.
Display Help
"Help(H)"
Display the Unit Editor help information.
3-30
"How to use Unit Editor(H)" F1
3-7 Use the Slave Setup Window

This section describe slave station setting window and operating method of every window.
For detailed setting method of KL slave station, please see "KL- N20V user manual".
Names and Functions of Different Parts of Slave Setup Window
screen.
Select " Setup slave" in the Unit Editor, and the slave station setting window will be displayed.
Slave station setting menu can be selected only when KL- N20V is selected.
Unit selection icon

Unit setup icon
Address setup icon
Select configuration slave station, and
display or set, change the message of
slave station configured.

Display slave configuration
"Diplay the "Slave Setup" Window", Page 3-28

Display the slave configuration that has been set in "Slave setup window".
The slave configuration area can be operated as follows.
Configurate or delete slaves or change connection position
Selection of slave devices to be set in detail
Display of current consumption and weight of overall slave system
Display of assigned relay addresses for each slave device
Display slave configuration message
System information.
Displays the current consumption (mA)
and weight (g) of the overall slave system.
Display a cursor (red box)
Indicates the currently selected
cursor.
Unit information
Displays the model No. of placed
slave devices and assigned relay
Nos. and addresses.
3-31
UNIT EDITOR
When using KL series, the slave station to be connected must be set up in the slave station setting
Select unit tab

Used when configurating the slave unit in the slave configuration area.
Select to co figurate the slave unit from Unit Selection window.
3
UNIT EDITOR
Indicate slave type.
Indicates slave size
Setup unit tab

Unit Setup window allows to change settings and display of slave and master units configured in slave
configuration area.
Indicates setting item.

The project whose setting cannot
be changed is displayed in grey.
Indicates the setting content corresponding

to every project.
"*" is displayed in initial value of the
selected project.
"Set up Configuration Unit", Page
3-22
3-32
Setup adress tab

Address Setup window allows to display lists of detailed address assignment of the slave units
configured in slave configuration area, assign addresses manually and change settings, etc.
Enter slave station comment.
UNIT EDITOR
Indicates the assigned relay/

DM No..
It represents the status of slave
station assigned in every address.
"*" is displayed in slave station
of terminal settings.
Assignment address is the
Can be set and changed
receiving address or sending
manually.
address. It represents the

address assigned to every
slave station.
Display the "Slave Setup" Window

Select KL- N20V, set slave station to connect KL.
"Diplay the "Slave Setup" Window", Page 3-28
Close the "Slave Setup" Window

"File(F)"
Select "File(F)"
"Close Slave Setup Window(C)"
"Close Slave Setup screen(C)"
from the menu. When slave station setting message is

updated but not saved, confirmation dialog box will
appear.
TIP
When "Auto-assign Address" or "Address Check" is executed, the slave setup information at
that time is automatically saved. The above confirmation box will not be displayed when you
exit without saving changes to the slave setup information after you have executed "Autoassign Address" or "Address Check".
Note
The relay/DM assignments of KL Master Unit KL-N20V are assigned according to the slave
information set in the Slave setup screen. When the Slave setup screen has been exited
without saving the slave setup information, either create the slave setup information again or
manually set the addresses of KL-N20V when transferring the ladder program to the CPU Unit.
3-33
Switch Over Cursor Position

Window(W)
Slave contig area(U) Alt + C
UNIT EDITOR
Select unit (1)
Alt + 1
Select unit (2)
Alt + 2
Setup adress (3)
Alt + 3
Message area(4)
Alt + 4
Switch cursor position from the menu (active field, tab).
Slave Configuration
From the unit selection window, select the connected slave station, and drag it to edit image.
Delete a Slave That has Been Configured

"Edit(E)"
Select the slave station to be deleted from the menu, and click "Edit (E)"
"Delete(D)" Delete
"delete (D)" or select
"Delete" from right-click menu.
TIP
The deleted section will be displayed in gray.

After deleting the slave that has been assigned addresses, its address will become
blank.The address must be set again when setting the embedded address.
"Automatic Address Assignment", Page 3-35
3-34
Copy/move a Configured Slave

"Edit(E)"
Ctrl + X
"Copy(C)"
Ctrl + C
"Paste(P)"
Ctrl + V
3
UNIT EDITOR
"Cut(T)"
Copy, move, paste for the selected slave station.

Can also operate by right-clicking on the menu.
TIP
Note
The moved part is displayed in dark.

After cutting the slave that has been assigned addresses, the address No.s of pasted
slaves will not be continuous even if "Paste" is performed.
Move a unit without changing its address

After selecting a slave, drag and drop it to the target position.In this case, after assigning addresses,
relay No. and address No. will not change even if moving the slave.
Automatic Address Assignment

"Convert(P)"
Select "Convert(P)"
"Auto assign address(A)" F5
"Auto assign address(A)" from the menu.
Auto assign address.

Note
Even if the address of relay / DM slave station assigned is changed, relay / DM No. in
Ladder is not changed.
TIP
Address Auto-Assign rule is to assign address according to the sequence configured.
Manual Address Assignment

"Window(W)"
"Setup address (3)" Alt + 3
Select the unit to be set, and select "Setup address tab".

The address setup of the unit selected in the Slave Device Setup
screen is displayed in the address setup window.
3-35
Select the address of the slave device to be changed, and enter the address No. to be set.
3
UNIT EDITOR
Note
Be sure to set only unique address to each slave.

Even if the address of relay / DM slave station assigned is changed, relay / DM No.
in Ladder is not changed.
Check Address Assignment of System

"Check address(C)" F6
"Convert(P)"
Verify the unit configuration set in Slave Setup screen and whether or not errors exist in the address
assignment of each unit.
TIP
When exiting slave station setting image, address is automatically checked, in case of error,
its content message is displayed in message area of Unit Editor.
Select "Convert(P)"
"check address(C)" from the menu.
Start verifying the unit configuration and address assignment.
The verified result is displayed in the message area of Unit Editor.

Error content, or related message are
displayed in message area.
"Jump to Error Line", Page 3-27
Import Slave Information

File(F)
Import slave info(I) Ctrl + K
Read the slave information saved in other project files.For the system with same slave station
configuration, using "Import slave info" method, can directly read system message and simply set.
"Import Slave Information", Page 3-28
3-36
Input Comments
"Edit(E)"
3
Select the unit or slave station to be entered, on the menu, select "Edit (E)"
"Edit Unit / slave
cmnts (U)" or select "unit/slave station comment edit" from right-click menu.
"slave comment (slave station comment)" dialog box pops up for slave station, "Unit comment" dialog
box pops up for unit.
Enter comment, click "OK" button.

Comments are input.
TIP
The input comments will be displayed in the slave

configuration area and address setup window.
Up to 80 half-width characters (40 full-width characters) can be
inputted for comments.
Reserve Unit / Slave Unreserve Unit / Slave

"Edit(E)"
"Reserve Unit/ slave(R)" Ctrl + R

Unreserve reset unit/slave(R)
Select unit / slave station to be reserved, on the menu, select "Edit (E)"
"Reserve unit / slave (R)"
or select "Reserve unit / slave" from right-click menu.

To increase preset unit / slave station, and to install, disassemble unit / slave station due to device
category in same Ladder, can use " Reserving " unit/ slave station method to flexibly set Ladder unit /
slave station.
To unreserve, firstly, select unit / slave station reserved, on the menu, select "edit (E)"
"unreserve
unit / slave (R)" or from right-click menu, select "unreserve unit / slave".
Jump to Error Line

"Convert(P)"
"Jump to error line (E)" F4
During address assignment, adding and deletion of slave station, etc., the corresponding slave station
with error message appears.
Click the error message in the message area of Unit Editor.

The message clicked will be displayed inversely.
3-37
UNIT EDITOR
"Edit Unit/slave cmnts (U)" Ctrl + Shift + U
Select "Convert(P)"
Other procedure
"Jump to error line(E)" from the menu of Unit Editor.
Double click the selected message.
The cursor will move to slave station with error on slave station configuration field.
UNIT EDITOR
Display Help
"Help(H)"->"How to use Unit Editor(H)"
Display the Unit Editor help information.
3-38
3-8 Environment Setting

Environment setting change method of Unit Editor is described as follows.
About Environment Setting of Unit Editor

"Option(O)"
"Setup option(S)"
UNIT EDITOR
Display "Option Setup" dialog box, complete option setting of Unit Editor.
On the menu, select "Option (O)"
"Setup option (S)", display "Setup option" dialog box.
Can set up the following contents.

Tab type
Setup display
Setup color
Content
The unit displayed in unit configuration area and slave station configuration area
displays multiplying power, font size and cursor movement unit
Font color and background color in Unit Editor
Device assignment
setup
Auto-assign rule of relay/DM
Set unit color
Every unit color displayed in unit configuration area and slave station configuration area
Other Settings
Whether KL Master Station unit, KL-N20V manual address setting are conducted, etc.
The changed setting is saved to KV STUDIO, and immediately valid after setting.
View Setting
Item
Scale of unit(slave) area
Font size
Block-move cursor *1
Description
Change unit display multiplying power displayed in unit
configuration area and slave station configuration area.
Change font size of window other than unit configuration area
and slave station configuration area.
Set the cursor action method after pressing the cursor key in
unit configuration area and slave station configuration area.
Default
100%
12
None.
*1 Cursor move unit
3-39
Block-wise cursor movement

Cursor can be only moved in the block, and can not be moved outside the block.
3
UNIT EDITOR
System-wise cursor movement

Cursor can move in block, and move on the corresponding side of upper (lower) block.
Color setup
To change color, click "Color" button and select color.
TIP
The colors that you set here are saved to KV STUDIO and are enabled when KV STUDIO
is next started up.
To return saved colors to their defaults, click the "Initialize" button.
3-40
Device assignment setting

Set automatic assignment rule of relay device in KV-5000/3000/1000/700. If manually assigning a No.
before the no. of the defined relay/DM, when selecting "save after exit" or "device testing", prompting
message of error existing in relay/DM/address will be displayed without processing. To change leading
relay, DM No. assignable, please reset.

UNIT EDITOR
Item
Description
Relay setting
Batch
setup
Leading relay No.(in ch)
Relay
Leading relay No. of input
setting(KV)*1
unit(in ch)
Setup
Leading relay No. of output

unit(in ch)
Leading relay No. of special
unit(in ch)
Leading DM No.
DM setting (KV)
*1
Batch
setting / separate setting" .
setting
Input leading relay No..
300
Input unit leading relay No..
300
I/O unit leading relay No..
400
Input special unit leading relay No..
500
Input leading DM No..
Take 100 as unit to distribute DM in the unit
Default
Select relay setting in "batch
"hook selection" is to assign DM in

unit using 100 unit.
10000
Yes
Batch settings refer to an method assigning according to horizontal sequence of CPU unit.
Separate settings refer to a method assigning according to horizontal sequence of CPU unit with
unit category (entry, output, specific).
3-41
Set unit color

In this case, the color set will change to the unit color of unit configuration area displayed in border and
the character color of relay, DM no.
To change color, click "Color" button and select color.

UNIT EDITOR
TIP
is next started up.
3-42
Other Settings
3
UNIT EDITOR
Item
Display slave
Window
setting window
foreground in Unit
Editor
Pop up
confirmation
message when
auto assign adress
Description
Default
Slave station setting image is displayed before the Unit Editor. Initial
value is that slave station setting image is displayed before the Unit
Yes
Editor window. *
Confirmation message displayed during setting of auto-assign relay
/ DM No. and address. Initial value is set to pop up the confirmation
Yes
message.
KL-N20V address of KL Master Station unit can be manually set. In
Allow manual setup general, KL- N20V uses address in slave station setting image or
of KL-N20V adress "KL address setting software", to manually assign address, select
Other
Yes
this project, and can manually enter setting in the unit setting image.
Automatic design function is effective.After auto design function is
Enable automatic
enabled, the unit unusable in real system arranged in Unit Editor can
layout function
be automatically identified and not configured.
Initial value is
Yes
automation design function enabled.

Display comments
Via unit configuration area, display various comments such as unit
in unit configuration comment, block comment, system comment, etc. After checkbox is
screen.
Yes
cancelled, all comments will be not displayed.
*"Window" setting is effected after the Unit Editor is restarted.
3-43
MEMO
3
UNIT EDITOR
3-44
4
FILE & PRINT
FILE & PRINT

This chapter describes the functions of the file and how to print.
4-1
Various File Instructions 4-2
4-2
Print 4-17
E:\KEYENCE(en)\No10_Kv_studio_ver4_ver3\084160_kv_studio\FC-24SM_040xJ.fm
4-1
4-1 Various File Instructions

This section describes instructions in "File (F)" menu.
For details on projects, modules and macros, refer to KV-5000/3000 Series Programming Manual.
New Project
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
4
FILE & PRINT
Select "File (F)"
"New project (N)" from the menu, and create new project.
Item
Project name
New project (N) Ctrl + N
Explanation
Inputs project name. (Within 32 half-width characters/16 full-width characters)
PLC model
Selects the PLC type.
Position
Specifies the project storage directory.
Comment
Inputs the comment here. (Within 64 half-width characters/32 full-width characters)
Access Window
Inputs the project name to display on the Access Window. (Up to 12 half-width
display comments*1
alphanumeric katakana characters)
Register special
device cmnts
*1
When this checkbox is marked, special device comments are registered.
Input ASCII codes 20 to 7E (HEX) and A1 to DF (HEX) due to restrictions in the characters that
can be displayed on the Access Window.
TIP
For unusable characters in project name, please see

Characters", Page A-11.
4-2
"A-2 List of Unavailable
Open Project
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"File (F)"
Select "File (F)"
"Open project (O)". Ctrl + O
"Open project (O)" from the menu, specify the available project.
["Open project" dialog box pops up.
FILE & PRINT
TIP
* To open the files other than .kpr, use "KD " to specify extension name.
Close Project
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
Select "File (F)"
"Close project (C)" from the menu, and close the currently opened project.
Save Project
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
Select "File (F)"
Save project (S) Ctrl + S
"Save project (S)" from the menu, and save the project being edited.
Save Project As
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
Select "File (F)"
Close project (C)
Save project as (A)
"Save project as (A)" from the menu, and save the opened file in other name.
" New Project", page 4-2
4-3
Save Compact Project
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
Select "File (F)"
Pack/save project (J)
"Save compact project (J)" from the menu, and specify the saving position and
filename.
FILE & PRINT
TIP
The packed project file is saved in.kpz format.

Use when the project is swapped via mail.
Verify Project
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
Verify project (B)
Verify the currently open project against other projects.

Select "File (F)"
"Verify project (B)" from the menu, and specify the project file to be verified.
Checking result is displayed in "Check" dialog box.
4-4
Project Property
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File(F)
Select "File (F)"
Project property(F)
"Project property (F)" from the menu.
4
FILE & PRINT
Item
Explanation
Project name
Displays the project name.
Date created
Displays the date when the project was created.
Date updated
Displays the date that the project was last updated.
Date updated
Displays the date that the project was last transferred to the PLC.
This is the ID for the project. The project ID is automatically assigned by KV STUDIO
Project ID
when the project is created.
Set password*1
You can set a password to prevent unauthorized reading of the program from PLC
Save to
The project's save destination is displayed.
Comment
Inputs the comment here. (Within 64 half-width characters/32 full-width characters)

Inputs the name of the author here. (Within 64 half-width characters/32 full-width
Author
characters)
Inputs the project name to display on the Access Window. (Up to 12 half-width
Access Window
display comments
*1
*2
*2
alphanumeric katakana characters)
Cannot be set when KV-10 (16), KV-24 (40) and KV-P16 are used.
Cannot be set when KV-700/700+M, KV-10 (16), KV-24 (40) and KV-P16 are used.
Due to limit of displayable character in Access Window, the input range must be between ASCII
code 20 to 7E (HEX) and A1 to DF (HEX).
4-5
Set password
The password setting disables reading of unit setup information, programs, comments/labels, logging
setup, mail setup (KV-5000/3000 only) and device default setup (KV-5000/3000 only) stored in KV5000/3000/1000/700.
Once a password is set, data cannot be read unless the correct password is inputted. Password setting
can prevent programs from being read from the KV-5000/3000/1000/700 by unauthorized personnel.
4
FILE & PRINT
Select "File (F)"
"Project property (F)" from the menu, and click "Set password(P)" button in
"Project attribute" dialog box.

The "Set password" dialog box appears.
Input the password, and click the "OK" button. To delete an already registered password, delete
the currently displayed password, and click the "OK" button.
Passwords up to six half-width alphanumerics long can be set.
Caution
When you forget the registered password, the password can be cleared by
clearing all in the KV-5000/3000/1000/700 Access Window or overwritting the
project. All settings and user programs will be cleared thereafter.
For the project with set password, project backup in advance is recommended
to avoid data loss in case you forget the password.
The protection ranges are as follows when a password has been set to a project that has been
transferred to KV-5000/3000/1000/700.
Operation
PC->
KV-5000/3000/1000/700
KV-5000/3000/1000/700->.
PC
Memory Card ->
KV-5000/3000/1000/700
KV-5000/3000/1000/700->
Memory Card
4-6
Protection Range
Overwrite is possible.
Password protection
Read is possible
PC->Memory card
Memory card->PC
Password protection
KV-5000/3000/1000/700
Import Module/macros
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
From the menu, select "file (F)"
"import (I)"
Import (I)
Import modules/macro (M)
"import module / macro (M)", and specify the
module /macro to be imported.
FILE & PRINT
Item
Explanation
Module type after importing

Import log info
Either sets the desired module type after an import, or selects from
"Every-scan/Initialization/Standby/fixed cycle module*".
When this checkbox is marked, logging information is imported from other
projects.
Import CPU positioning info
When this checkbox is marked, CPU positioning information is imported

from other projects.
*Selectable only when KV-5000 / 3000 is used.
TIP
Module file extension
: .mod
Macro file extension
: .mcr
Note
*.ldc files can be imported from projects for KV-700 made on KV BUILDER. (Select
KVB ladder diagram files (*.ldc) at "Files of type").
For details on importing projects for KV-700 made on KV BUILDER, see
KV-1000
Series Programming Manual, "5-6 Fully Utilizing KV-700 Data."
Import Comments/labels
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
Select "File (F)"
"Import (I)"
Import (I)
Import cmnt/label (C)
"Import cmnt/label (C)" from the menu, and specify the file to be
imported.
The comment or label that you specified is imported.
*.cm1
: Comment 1 file
*.cm2
: Comment 2 file
*.lbl
: Label file
4-7
Import Logging Information
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File( F)
Select "File (F)"
"Import (I)"
Import (I)
Import log info (L)
"Import log info (L)" from the menu, and specify the file to be
imported.
The logging information of the project file that you specified is imported.
FILE & PRINT
*.kpr: KVS Project file
Import Device Default
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
Select "File (F)"
"Import (I)"
Import (I)
Import device default (D)
"Import device default (D)" from the menu, and specify the file
whose device default to be imported.

The specified device default infor is imported.
Other procedure Select "import" from the "device default" right-click menu of the "project" tab in workspace
DevInit.dvi
TIP
: Device default file
Device default file is generated when default is set in "device default setting" dialog box.
Import File Register Setting
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
Select "File (F)"
"Import (I)"
Import (I)
Import file register setting (F)
"Import File Register setting (F)" from the menu, and specify the
file register setting file to be imported.

The specified file register setting infor is imported.
Other procedure Select "import" from the "file register setting" right-click menu of the "project" tab in workspace
FR***.frb
TIP
4-8
: File register setting file( *** indicates the No. of file register.
File register setting file is generated in setting of "file register setting" dialog box.
Import CPU Positioning Parameters

File (F)
Select "File (F)"
"Import (I)"
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Import (I)
Import CPU positioning parameters (P)
"Import CPU positioning parameters (P)" from the menu, and
specify the file to be imported.

The CPU positioning parameters of the project file that you specified is imported.
: CPU positioning file
CpuMbPrm.inf
: CPU positioning file (KVB)
Save/read Memory Card
FILE & PRINT
CpuMb.inf
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
Memory card (M)
Write (W)
Memory card (M)
Read (R)
Connect memory card to PC.

KV-5000/3000 Series User's Manual, "2-2 Memory Card"
"Memory card (M)"
"Write (W)" or "Read (R)".
When saving a new file on memory card using KV STUDIO, be sure to create a new folder on the
"Memory card" dialog box, and save the file.
Select drive to which

memory card is assigned
New a folder
"New" button is not displayed
when reading the memory card.
?
Select folder for saving

data.
Display file types
saved in the selected
folder.
Caution
When the original folder is selected for saving, the data will be overwritten,
and the previous data will lose.
4-9
TIP When creating a new folder for saving, click the "New",
and input the folder name. The project folder will be
created.
Data management on the memory card must be executed
by project folder.
When the auto-loading function is used on the KV-5000/3000/1000/700 CPU Unit, name the
project folder "autoload" when saving the data.
FILE & PRINT
For the autoloading function, please see User's Manual of every CPU.
Save Device Comments in Text Format
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
Save device cmnts in in text format (K)
Save ladder program comment currently opened as text format file (*.txt) or CSV formatted file (*.csv).
Select "File (F)"
"Save device cmnts in text format (K)" from the menu, and specify comment
storage destination.
Item
Save position
Explanation
Specifies the position where text format file or CSV formatted file are saved.
File name
Inputs its saving filename.
Files of type
Specifies "text format file (*.txt)" or "CSV formatted file (*.csv)".
Select the module/

macro to save
Specifies the module / macro to be saved.
Read Text Format Comments
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
Read text format cmnts (Q)
Read comments saved in text format file (*.txt) or CSV format file (*.csv) to the currently opened ladder
program
Select "File (F)"
4-10
"Read text format cmnts (Q)" from the menu, and specify the comment to be read.
4
FILE & PRINT
Item
Explanation
Position
Specifies the position where the comment is saved.
File name
Inputs the file name.
Files of type
Specifies "text format file (*.txt)" or "CSV formatted file (*.csv)".
Select the module/

macro to read.
Specifies the module/macro to read.
Save Mnemonics List
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
Mnemonics list (R)
Save (S)
Save ladder programs to a mnemonics list. Mnemonics lists are regular text format files with the "mnm"
extension.
Note
This menu is not available unless a project is opened.

Module/macro ladder program containing script, PACK command can be saved to
mnemonics list, but cannot be read from mnemonics list.
Select File (F)
Mnemonics list(R)
Save (S) from the menu.
"Select different comment types" dialog box is opened, select the comment added to the list.
4-11
Click "OK" button, "Folder select" dialog box appears, and specify storage destination of
mnemonics list.
4
FILE & PRINT
TIP
Save corresponding module / macro in filename (module / macro name).mnm format.
Read Mnemonics List
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
Mnemonics list (R)
Read (R)
Read ladder program from mnemonics list. Mnemonics lists are regular text format files with the "mnm"
extension.
Note
This menu is not available unless a project is opened.

Module/macro ladder program containing script, PACK command can be saved to
mnemonics list, but cannot be read from mnemonics list.
"Mnemonics list (R)"
"Read (R)", and specify the file of
mnemonics symbol list to be read..

The module/macro of the same name as the file name is added to the project.
When a module/macro of the same name as the file name already exists in the project, the "Input
module/macro name" dialog box appears.
Input the module/macro name, and click the "OK" button.
4-12
Output CSV Files (Unit Specifications)

File (F)
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Output CSV file (U)
Unit specifications (U)
Save the pin assignments of connected units and the list of comments as a CSV format file.
Select "File (F)"
"Output CSV file (U)"
Unit specifications (U) from the menu, and specify the
FILE & PRINT
storage target of CSV file.

Output file example
Output File in CSV format (Cross ref info)
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
Output CSV file (U)
Cross ref info (C)
Save cross ref info in CSV format.

Select "File (F)"
"Output CSV file (U)"
"Cross ref info (C)" from the menu, and specify the
destination to save CSV file.

Output file example
4-13
Change Model
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File(F)
From the menu, select "file (F)"
Change model(L)
"change model (L)", model switch dialog box appears, and the
model can be changed .

Convertible PLC models are as follows.
FILE & PRINT
Model editing
KV-P16
KV-P16
Convertible model
KV-700
KV-700+M
KV-10/(16)
KV-24/(40)
KV-1000
KV-3000
KV-5000
KV-10/(16)
KV-24/(40)
KV-700
KV-700+M
KV-1000
KV-3000
KV-5000
TIP
Click "Open file", select file format, and KZ300/350 and KZ-A500 ladder program can be
read. The KZ300/350 and KZ-A500 ladder program are read as
respectively.
"1-3 About Data Compatibility", (Page 1-5)
4-14
KV-700 and KV-1000
Auto-save
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
Auto-save (Z)
After auto-save setting, when reaching the preset time, system will automatically generate backup.
Note
When KV STUDIO is started after the program quits due to an error, the file that was
STUDIO without executing "Auto-save" to automatically make a backup file, the back
file will be lost.
TIP
The following illustrates how to auto-save.

The backup file is automatically made in the AutoSave
By setting time
Ladder file
Backup
folder in the BackUp file at preset time intervals.
Backup
The backup file is automatically deleted.
In case of normal exit
Ladder file
Auto delete
In case of abnormal exit
Ladder file
Backup
te
o
Aut
Select "File (F)"
The backup file is automatically loaded when KV

STUDIO is started next time.
dele
"Auto-save (Z)" from the menu.
"Setup auto-save" dialog box pops up.
2
3
Select "Auto-save" check box, and Input the auto-save interval.

Click the "OK" button.
The auto-save setting is enabled.
To cancel the auto-save function
Select "File (F)"
"Auto-save (Z)" from the menu.
"Auto-save settings" dialog box pops up .
Deselect the "Auto-save" check box, and click the "OK" button.
The auto-save setting is disabled.
4-15
FILE & PRINT
backed up by the auto-save function will be automatically loaded. If you exit KV
Auto-read
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
Auto-read (T)
The file to be auto-loaded when KV STUDIO is started can be specified.
4
FILE & PRINT
Open the project to be set in auto-read.
"Auto-read(T)", click " OK" button.
Set the opened project to auto-load.
Note
To set the file of new project in auto-read, the project must be saved in advance.
To cancel the auto-read function
1
2
Open the project whose auto-load setting is to be canceled.

"Auto-read (T)", click " OK" button.
Cancel auto-read of the opened project.
Exit
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
Save the project being currently edited and exit KV STUDIO.
4-16
Exit (X)
4-2 Print
This section describes the print function contained in the "File (F)" menu.
Print
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
Print (P) Ctrl + P
The corresponding environment for PC printing must be available. Please refer to Operation
FILE & PRINT
Instructions of PC and set the PC in printable status.

The following details can be printed:
Front cover
Logging/tracing setting*1
Set logging *2
CPU positioning parameter*3
Select unit*3
Setting unit*3
Unit relay/DM*3
Mail setting*1
CPU System setting*1
Module configuration
Local device assignment*2
Default setting*1
Ladder
Mnemonics list
Comment
Label
Device application status
Line comments
Panel setting*4
*1
Display only when "KV-5000" "KV-3000" (CPU) is used.
*2
Display only when "KV-1000" (CPU) is used.
*3
Display only when "KV-5000" "KV-3000" "KV-1000" "KV-700" "KV-700+m" (CPU) are used.
*4
Display only when "KV-P16" (CPU) is used.
TIP
When <print-break>(half-width) is inputted in a rung comment, the ladder is printed in next

line.
Before printing, the content to be printed must to be set in advance.
Select "File (F)"
"Print (P)" from the menu.
"Print settings" dialog box pops up .
4-17
4-2 Print
Set contents to be printed. Select the checkbox of desirable items.

Select desirable items.
Click and specifiy the
setting content of the

items whose setting can
FILE & PRINT
be changed.
TIP
The font and font size to be used for printing can be specified. Click the setting item, and
specify the setting from the dropdown list that is displayed.
Click "Setup page" button, the "Setup page" dialog box is opened.
Item
Header
Selects the check box, and the"print page/total pages" is printed at bottom of each
Footer
page.
Blank
Sets printer paper margin.
Preview
Initialize
Explanation
Selects the check box, and the project date is printed at left top corner of each page.
Display print position after change of margin value.

Restore all setting values in "page setup" dialog box to initial state.
Click "Print" button, and "Print" dialog box appears.

Press "OK" in " Print " dialog box, start printing.
TIP
Note
Click "Print preview" button, and "Print preview" window appears.
After the setting is changed, click "Cancel" button, and the changed content will be
invalid.
4-18
4-2 Print
Print Preview
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
Print Preview (V)
Display print message.
Select "File (F)"
"Print Preview (V)" from the menu.
Set contents to be printed. Select the checkbox of print project, click "Print preview" button to
display preview.
Select desirable items.
Click and specifiy the

setting content of the
items whose setting
can be changed.
TIP
The font and font size to be used for printing can be specified. Click the setting item, and
specify the setting from the dropdown list that is displayed.
4-19
FILE & PRINT
"Print settings" dialog box pops up .
4-2 Print
Printer Setup
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
Printer setup (W)
Sets the size of the paper, printing direction (portrait/landscape), and other settings.
Note
FILE & PRINT
TIP
4-20
The displayed contents may be different according to specific printers.
For how to set, please refer to the Operation Instructions of printer.
5
EDIT
EDIT
The chapter describes various edit functions.
5-1
About Edit Functions 5-2
E:\KEYENCE(en)\No10_Kv_studio_ver4_ver3\084160_kv_studio\FC-24HM_050xJ.fm
5-1
5-1 About Edit Functions

This section describes functions contained in the "Edit (E)" menu.
Undo
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Edit (E)"
"Undo (U)" Ctrl + Z
Cancel the last operation and restore the previous state.
Note
The following operations can be undone:
EDIT
7,3
Entry of instructions
Deletion of instructions
Editing of operandsCut
Paste
Multiple paste
Replacement of operands
Text replace
Insertion of rung comments
NO/NC contact conversion Insertion of empty rungDeletion of rungs
Editing of rung comments
Disabling of rungs
Insertion of loopback ladders

Insertion of area scripts
Conversion of unit devices
Insertion of box scripts
Conversion of scripts
Setting of rungsEditing of connection rungs
Insertion of PACK instruction
When an operation cannot be undone, the button is displayed in gray and cannot be
selected.
Device comment change, only return to the part edited via device comment edit window.
Redo
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Edit (E)"
"Redo (R)" Ctrl + Y
Ccancels an operation undone by "Undo (U)".
7,3
When an operation cannot be redone, the button is displayed in gray and cannot be selected.
Cut/Copy/Paste
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Edit (E)"
"Cut (T)" Ctrl + X
"Edit (E)"
"Copy (C)" Ctrl + C
"Edit (E)"
"Paste (P)" Ctrl + V
Select the range, and cut, copy or paste the selected range.
Those that can be cut, copied, pasted are,
Cell unit
Ladder labels of rung unit.
5-2
Select a range
Select a range for cutting/copying/pasting.
There are two ways to select a range.
Select by the mouse

Select the range by the mouse.
Move the mouse to the first cell to select and click.

The cursor is displayed.
EDIT
Drag the cursor to the last position to select.

The selected range is displayed by a different color.
Select in cell units

Drag to the desired cell. Any number of cells can be selected as desired.
To select all cells, click the top left corner of the ladder edit window screen.
Drag to the desired cell.
Select in rung units

Click on the number of the desired rung. You can select multiple rungs by combining this operation
with the Shift key.
Other procedure
On the 1st cell, press Shift + key.

On the 10th cell, press Shift key + key
7,3
Ctrl key key
Multiple rungs can be selected by dragging on the rung No.

To cancel a selection, click anywhere on the ladder.
5-3
Select by arrow keys
1
2
Move to the first cell to select by moving the cursor with the arrow keys.
Move the cursor to the last cell to select by pressing with the Shift key held
down.
The color of selected area is changed.
5
EDIT
7,3
To cancel a selection, press the arrow keys again.

To select in rung units, move the cursor to the top cell of the desired rung, and press the
Shift + End keys/ Ctrl + Shift + keys/ Ctrl + keys.
To select all cells, move the cursor to the top cell (rung No. 00001, column No.1),
and press the Ctrl + Shift + End keys.
Cut
Cut selected cells.
Copy
Copy the selected unit.
Paste
Paste cut/copied cell to the specified position.
Multiple Paste
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Edit (E)"
"Multiple paste (D)" (Multiple paste Ctrl + Shift + V
When Multiple paste is used, multiple ladder programs copied in rung units can be copied with device
No. shifted by an offset amount.
It is handy to make a program having multiple rungs in which only device No. differ.
5-4
Select the rungs to copy, and select "Edit (E)""
Copy (C)" from the menu.
"Select a range", (Page 5-3)
Other procedure
Click
Press
button.
Ctrl + C keys.
Select "copy (C)" from right-clicking menu.
Move the mouse to paste position, from the menu, select "Edit (E)"
" Multi paste (D )".
The "Paste selected" dialog box appears.
Item
Set common offset for
same device type
Explanation
When selecting checkbox, offset can be specified to each device
type.
When deselecting, offset to the device can be specified separately.
Paste number
Set the numbers of pastes.
(Clear offset)
Reset all offsets set.
Row offset
Display the rung position of corresponding device within copy range. *
Column
Select "Multiple paste(D)" from the right-clicking menu.
EDIT
Other procedure
Display the column position of corresponding device within copy

range.*
Device
Display copied device No. (or label). *
Offset
Set the offset of set device No.

*When "Setting the offset of same device type to common", "-" appears.
Note
Mutiple pastes can be conducted when copying with rung unit.
When script rung, rung comment, PACK instruction (KV-700 ) are containd, mutiple
paste cannot be made.
Example
R1000 offset is 5, DM1000, DM0001 offset is 10, the number of pastes is 2
5-5
Search Device
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Edit (E)
Select "Edit (E)"
Search device( S) Ctrl + F
"Search (s)" from the menu. The "Search/Replace" dialog box appears.
5
EDIT
Item
Explanation
Device
Label
Constant
Input the operand and module/macro to be searched. Click

button,
and the last 10 searched records will be displayed in drop down menu.
Target Module/macro
Device Comment
Label Comments
Reserve/Disable
(Search) width *2
From inputted device No., set the value quantity device as search object.
Seach with instruction*1
Specify the instruction to be searched at the same time with the project
specified by the object.
Range
Direction
Entire project
Take all modules / macros as the searched object.
Module / macro *4
Take module / macro displayed currently as search object range.
Up
Search upwards from current cursor position.
Down
Search downwards from current cursor position.
Case sensitive *3
Option
Search 100% match
When selecting the checkbox, upper/lower case search will be executed.

*3
Search
direct device only *2 *5
(List display)
(Search)
(Close)
When selecting the checkbox, the project completely conformable to the

input character is only searched/input.
When selecting, only direct I/O device (DR) is searched.
Search according to specified conditions, the result is displayed to
output window in list form.
Start searching according to the specified condition, .
Search / replace close dialog box.
*1
Fail to be displayed when "module / macro" is selected.
*2
Displayed only when "device" is selected.
*3
Displayed only when the object is selected as any one of "label", "module / macro", "device
comment", "label comment".
5-6
*4
Valid only when the models "KV-5000", "KV-3000" and "KV-1000" are used.
*5
Valid only when the models "KV-5000" and "KV-3000" are used.
Replace Device
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Edit (E)
Select "Edit (E)"
Replace device (I) Ctrl + H
"Replace (I)" from the menu, and the "Search/Replace" dialog box appears.
5
EDIT
Item
Explanation
Input the operand before the replace is executed. When
Before replace
button
is clicked, a pulldown menu is displayed, and a list of the last ten

selected operandsare displayed.
Operand
Input the operand after the replace is executed. When

After replace
button
is clicked, a pulldown menu is displayed, and a list of the last ten

selected operands is displayed.
Input the replace width (range of number of operands to be
(Replacement) Width
Replace
range
Direction
replaced from the operand before the replace is executed).
Entire project
Take all modules / macros as the replaced object range.
Module / macro *2
Take module / macro displayed as replacement object.
Selected range
Take the selected range on editor as the replaced object range.
Up
The replacement is operated upwards from current cursor position.

The replacement is operated downwards from current cursor
Down
position.
Move device comments

Option
Left source comment

Search direct device
only*3
(Replace all)
(Search)
When selecting the checkbox, the comment will be also transferred

to be conformable with the replaced operand .
When selecting, comments of mobile sources will be reserved.
When selecting, only direct I/O device (DR) is searched.
Batch-replaceobject device in specified range.
Search according to the specified condition. Replacement is not
operated.
(Replace)
Separately replace the object device in specified range.*1
(Close)
*1
When replacement cannot be made, click "search", the cursor is moved to the next instruction.
*2
*3
Valid only when the models "KV-5000" and "KV-3000" are selected.
5-7
Search / Replace Instruction
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Edit (E)
Search / Replace Instruction ( E )
After searching the specified instruction, all instructions will be displayed or replaced
to other
instructions.
From the menu, select "Edit (E)"
"Search /Replace Instruction (E)", and input the required project.
5
EDIT
Search
Search Ladder instruction.
Item
Explanation
Input search instruction, *1 click
button, and the last 10
historic records will be displayed in drop down menu.

Specify multiple projects marked with "" using OR condition.
Search instruction to be searched
Example) "LDLDB"
Postfix can be added when LDB is specified.
Example"ADD.F"
Replace with (the following instructions)
Range
Direction
Fail to search when searching.
Entire project
Module / macro *2
Take module / macro displayed currently as search object range.
Up
Search upwards from current cursor position.
Down
(List display)
Search downwards from current cursor position.

Search according to the specified condition, all retrieval results
are displayed to output window.
(Search)
Search according to the specified condition.
(Close)
*1
Wildcard character cannot be used in the instruction inputted. Besides, partial search cannot be
operated (only partial instruction inputted for search). Please utilize help to input correct
instruction.
*2
5-8
Replace
Replace Ladder instruction..
After selecting "Replace to the next instruction", necessary projects appears when the replacement is
operated.
5
EDIT
Item
Explanation
Input search instruction. *1Click
Seach instruction to be searched
button, last 10 historic records are
displayed in drop down menu.

Can specify multiple instructions marked with " " using OR condition.
(Example) "LD I LDB"
Replace with (the following
When selecting, entry box appears, and input the instruction to be
instructions)
replaced.
Range
Direction
Option
Entire project
Take all modules / macros as the replaced object range.
Module / macro *3
Selected range
Up
The replacement is operated upwards from current cursor position.
Down
The replacement is operated downwards from current cursor position.
Replac Suffix/differential
Replace all
(Search)
When deselecting and replacing, postfix / differential is ignored, and

only the instruction is replaced.
Batch-replace object instruction in specified range.
operated.
(Replace)
Separately replace the object instruction in specified range.*2
(Close)
*1
Wildcard character cannot be used in the instruction inputted. Besides, partial search cannot be
operated (only partial instruction inputted for search). Please utilize help to input correct
instruction.
*2
When replacement cannot be made, click "search", and move the cursor to the next instruction.
*3
5-9
NO/NC Contacts
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Edit (E)"
Select "Edit (E)"
"Convert NO/NC contacts(A)"
"Convert NO/NC contacts (A) " from the menu, and "Search/Replace" dialog box
appears.
5
EDIT
Item
Explanation
Input the operand to be converted. When
Target operand
button is clicked, a
pulldown menu appears, and a list of the last ten selected operands
are displayed.
Conversi
on range
Direction
Replace all
(Search)
Take all modules / macros as the converted object range.
Module / macro *1
Take module / macro displayed currently as converted object range.
Selected range
Take the selected range on editor as the converted object range.
Up
The conversion is operated from current cursor position upwards.
Down
The conversion is operated from current cursor position downward.

Batch-convert the object device in the specified range.
Search according to the specified condition.Do not operate
conversion.
(Replace)
Separately convert the object device in specified range.
(Close)
*1
5-10
Entire project
Valid only when the models "KV-5000" and "KV-3000" and "KV-1000" are used.
Search Rung Comments
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Edit(E)"
Select "Edit (E)"
"Search rung cmnts(M)"
"Search rung cmnts (M)" from the menu, and the "Search/Replace" dialog box
appears.
5
EDIT
Item
Explanation
Only initial 1 rung of rung comment of every Ladder rung is
Only display leading rung of comment
displayed, when rung comment acrossing multiple Ladder rung is

contained in rung comment inside search range.
Search range
Entire project
Take whole project as search range.
Module / macro *1
Take selected module/macro as search range.
(List display)
(Close)
Search according to the specified condition, all results are

displayed to output window. *2
*1
Valid only when the models "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" are selected.
*2
When double-clicking a rung comment currently displayed in the list, the cursor moves to that
rung comment.
7,3
When specifying "module/macro unit" with " Search range", object module/ macro must be
set to current window in advance.
5-11
Search/Replace Text
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Edit (E)
Select "Edit (E)"
Search/Replace text(K)
"Search/Replace Text(K)" from the menu, and the "Search/Replace" dialog box
appears.
5
EDIT
Item
Explanation
Input the character string to be searched. When
Search string
button is clicked,
a pulldown menu appears, and a list of the last ten selected operands
is displayed.
Replace with (the following strings)

Entire project
Range
Module / macro *3
Selected range*1
Up
Direction
Objects*3
Down
Take all modules / macros as the searched/ replaced object range.

Take module / macro displayed currently as searched/ replaced
object range.
Take the cell selected on editor as the object range of search /
replacement.
From current cursor position upwards, operate search / replacement.
Search / replacement is operated from current cursor position
downwards.
Rung comments are set as the search object.
Script
Scripts are set as the search object.
Module/macro name
Module/Macro names are set as the search object.
Case-sensitive
Option
Search 100% match
(Replace all)*1
(List display)*2
5-12
character string into the poping up entry box after selecting.
Rung comment
String value
"Search"
Select when character string is replaced. Input the replacement
Take script character string value as search object. The in operation

bit is included.
When selecting the checkbox, upper/lower case search/ replacement
will be executed.
When selecting the checkbox, only the project completely
conformable to the input character is searched/ replaced.
Batch-replace object character string in specified range.
Search according to the specified condition, all retrieval results are
displayed to output window.
operated.
(Replace)*1
Separately replace the object character string in the specified range.
(Close)
*1
Displayed when "replaced to the next character string" is selected.
*2
Displayed only when "replaced to the following character string" is not selected.
*3
Batch Replace
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Edit (E)
Batch replace (G)
Specify range, and replace the specified device.

Select "Edit (E)"
"Batch replace (G)" from the menu. Input the required project.
5
EDIT
Item
Explanation
No.
Batch replace No..(No.1 to No.32)
Replace source
Specify device No. of replacement source.*1
(Replace destination)
Specify device No. of replacement source.*1
Number of points
The value in replacement range is not specified. *2

The input format in "Point form" project can be selected from DEC/
Point form
HEX.
Replace content
Display Ladder of content replacement.
Entire project
Module / macro *3
Select
Range
module
Selected range

After selecting, device comment of the replacement source is moved
Move device comment.
to the device of replacement object when the replacement is operated.
Keep source comments
After selecting, comment of mobile sources will be reserved.
"Execute"
Batch-replace processing statement.
(Close)
"Batch-replace device" close dialog box.
*1
When error device No. is specified, "-" will be displayed in "replacement content", indicating the
irreplaceable device.
*2
When the number of devices exceeding device range is specified, "-" will be displayed in "
replacement content", indicating range error.
*3
7,3
When irreplaceable device and range are specified, click "operation" button, and
"irreplaceable" message pops up, then the cursor will be moved to error entry box.
Copy and paste can be made to Microsoft Excel.
(Press
Ctrl + C , Ctrl + V keys)
5-13
Cross Reference
Edit (E)
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Cross reference(X)
Create operand list (O)
(Space)
Create rung cmnts list (L)
Ctrl + L
Previous (A)
Next (B)
Where the operand to be used is specified, and a list is displayed in the output window.
EDIT
Making a cross-reference
Select creating cross reference operand, double click on the displayed project, the cursor will be
moved to operand of corresponding editor.
Select "Edit (E)"
"Cross reference (X)"
"Create operand list (O)" from the menu.
When making a cross-reference, where the specified operand to be used will be specified, and a list is
displayed in the output window.
Note
When selecting script, cross reference will not be created.
Create rung comment list

Slect "Edit (E)"
"Creat rung cmnts list (L)" from the menu, and the rung
comment list in the project is displayed in output window.
Select previous cross reference

Select "Edit (E)"
"Previous(A)" from the menu, the previous cross
reference will be selected.
Select next cross reference

Select "Edit (E)"
"cross reference (X)"
"Next (B)" from the menu, the next cross reference will
be selected.
5-14
Jump
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Jump to any specified position such as a rung No. or step in a program, or jump to the start or the end
of a rung.
Rung/step No.
Select "Edit (E)"
"Jump (J)"
"Rung /step No. (L)" from the menu.
Select "Edit (E)"
"Jump (J)"
"Rung / step No. (L)" from the menu.
"Jump to Specified Rung" dialog box pops up.
Other procedure
From right-click menu, select "Jump (J)"
"Rung /step No. (L)"
Input the rung No. or step No. of the jump destination. To jump a specified step No., select the
"Jump to step No." checkbox.
The specified rung or step is displayed. The cursor is also moved to the specified rung.
7,3
To cancel a jump, click the "Cancel" button.

When the specified No. is greater than the last rung No. or step No. of the ladder
program, the last rung or step is displayed.
Note
When performing a jump by a step No., the program must be converted in advance.
5-15
EDIT
Jump to any specified position such as a rung No. or step No. in a program by the following procedures.
Top/bottom
"Edit (E)"
"Jump (J)"
"Top (T)" Ctrl + Home

Bottom(B) Ctrl + End
Jump to the top rung
Select "Edit (E)"
"Jump (J)"
"Top (T)" from the menu.
The cursor is jumped to the top of the ladder.
EDIT
Jump to bottom
Select "Edit (E)"
"Jump (J)"
"Bottom (B)" from the menu.
The cursor is jumped to the bottom of the ladder.
Previous/next block
"Edit (E)"
"Prev. block (P)" Ctrl +
"Jump (J)"
Next block (N) Ctrl +
Jump to the previous network block

Select "Edit (E)"
"Jump (J)"
"Prev. block (P)" from the menu.
Jump to the next network block

Select "Edit (E)"
"Jump (J)"
"Next block (N)" from the menu.
Previous/next symbol
"Edit (E)"
"Jump (J)"
"Prev. symbol (W)" Shift + Tab

Next symbol (F) Tab
Jump to the previous symbol

Select "Edit (E)"
"Jump (J)"
"Prev. symbol (W)" from the menu.
Jump to the next symbol

Select "Edit (E)"
5-16
"Jump (J)"
"Next symbol (F)" from the menu.
Home/end
"Edit (E)"
"Jump (J)"
"Home (H)" Home

End (E) End
Jump to the start of a rung

Select "Edit (E)"
"Jump (J)"
"Home (H)" from the menu.
EDIT
Jump to the end of a rung

Select "Edit (E)"
"Jump (J)"
"End (E)" from the menu.
Change previous/Next block

"Edit (E)"
"Prev. changed block (O)" Ctrl + Alt +
"Jump (J)"
Next changed block (Q) Ctrl + Alt +
Jump to the previous program change block

Select "Edit (E)"
"Jump (J)"
"Prev. changed block (O)" from the menu.
Jump to the next program change block

Select "Edit (E)"
"Jump (J)"
"Next changed block (Q)" from the menu.
Open target modules/macro

Edit (E)
Jump (J)
Open target modules/macro(M)
Open the module / macro using the instructions/ functions of MDSTRT, MDSTOP, MCALL. MSTRT and
ECALL as object.
Select instructions/ functions of MDSTRT, MDSTOP, MCALL. MSTRT and ECALL, and select "Edit
(E)"
"Jump (J)"
"Open target module/macro (M)" from the menu.
5-17
Insert
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Insert empty rungs and Rung comment in a ladder.
Cell
"Edit (E)"
5
EDIT
1
2
"Insert (W)"
Cell (C) Ins
Move the cursor to the rung where the cell to be inserted.

Select "Edit (E)"
"Insert (W)"
"Cell(C)" from the menu.
Insert the cell to the cursor position.

Other procedure
Select "Insert cell(V)" from right-click menu.
Empty rung
"Edit (E)"
"Insert (W)"
Empty rung (E) Shift +

Shift + Ins
Move the cursor to the rung where the empty rung to be inserted.
7,3
To insert multiple empty rungs as a group, select the group of rungs where the empty rungs
to be inserted.
Select "Edit (E)"
"Insert (W)"
"Empty rung (E)" from the menu.
An empty rung is inserted at the selected rung.

Other procedure
Select "Insert empty rung (E)" from right-click menu.
Rung comment
"Edit (E)"
"Insert (W)"
Rung cmnt (H) Ctrl +
Insert rung comment in a ladder.

Rung comments are placed to make it easier to understand the content of each network block when
editing ladders.
Note
Rung comments are transferred to the KV-5000/3000/1000/700.

Can't transfer to the PLC other than KV-5000/3000/1000/700.
1
2
Move the cursor to the rung where the rung comment is to be inserted.
Select "Edit (E)"
"Insert (W)"
"Rung cmnt (H)" from the menu.
A new rung is added and is displayed on the ladder.

Other procedure
5-18
Select "Insert rung comment (H)" from right-click menu.

Input the comment on the keyboard.

Press the Ctrl +
keys to confirm.
The comment can also be confirmed by pressing the Esc key
7,3
To edit an already inputted rung comment, either double-click on the rung comment or press
the
key. F2 key.
Loopback ladder
Insert (W)
Loopback Ladder (K) Ctrl + Shift + F8
Compile simple folded ladder.

It is quite useful in compiling longer ladder
from busbar to output rung.
From the menu, select "edit (E)"
"Insert (W)"
"loopback ladder (K)". When selecting ON,
connecting rung of loopback ladder will be displayed.
7,3
When support model is "KV-5000/3000/1000", return Ladder with return symbol can be
inserted in option setting.
"System setting", (Page 11-15)
Note
When insert folded ladder, select the cells from the third rails afterward from the menu.
5-19
EDIT
Edit (E)
Deleting Rungs
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Edit (E)"
Move cursor to the rung to be deleted.
7,3
5
EDIT
"Delete rung (Y)" Shift + Delete
To delete multiple rungs in one time, select all rungs to be deleted.

" Delete rung (Y)".
The selected rung is deleted.

Other procedure
Select "Delete Rung (Y)" from right-click menu.
Set Disabling Rungs and Cancel Disabled Rungs
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Edit (E)"
"Disable rung (Q)"
"Edi (E)"
"Disable rung (Q)"
Setup (Q)
Ctrl + Q
Cancel (W) Ctrl + W
After processing ladder rung comment, part ladders of comment processing will not be operated during
conversion. In debug mode, temporarily set if the operation is not required.
Select range for setting invalid rung, or invalid rung canceled.

Set or cancel disabling of rungs.

When a rung is disabled, the selected rung is turned into a comment. When the disabling setting is
canceled, the rung returns to the state before the ladder program was converted.
To set disabling to a new rung: Select "Edit (E)"
To cancel disabling of a rung: Select "Edit (E)"
Other procedure
"Disable rung (Q)"

"Disable rung (Q)"
"setup (Q)" from the menu.

"Cancel (W)" from the menu.
Set disabling of rungs

Select "Set rung disable(Q)" from right-click menu.
Cancel disabling of rungs
Select "Cancel rung disable(W)" from right-click menu.
Note
5-20
Ladders to which disabling of rungs is set are not transferred to the PLC.
Rung Setting
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Adjust the column width and rung height of a selected range.
Width
"Edit (E)"
"Rung setup (N)"
Width (W)
Adjust the column width of the selected range.
Select "Edit (E)"
"Rung setup (N)"
"Width (W)" from the menu.
Other procedure
Select "Rung setup(N)"
EDIT
The "Column width" dialog box pops up.
"Width(W)" from the right-clicking menu.
Input the value.

The column width is adjusted to the specified width.
Height
"Edit (E)"
"Rung setup (N)"
Height (H)
Adjust the rung height of the selected range.
Select "Edit (E)"
"Rung setup (N)"
"Height (H)" from the menu.
The "Rung height" dialog box is displayed.
Other procedure
Select "Rung setup (N)"
"Height (H)" from the right-clicking menu.
Input the value.

The rung height is adjusted to the specified width.
Auto-adjust
"Edit (E)"
"Rung setup (N)"
Auto-adjust (D)
Automatically adjust the width and height of the selected range.
Select "Edit (E)"
"Rung setup (N)"
"Auto-adjust (D)" from the menu.
The width and height are automatically adjusted to the optimum values.
Other procedure
Select "Rung setting (N)"
"D" from the right-clicking menu.
Select the range, and double-click the boundary rung between cells.
5-21
Bookmark
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
When setting bookmark in rung comment, rung comment will be displayed in workspace.
When double-clicking the bookmark displayed in workspace, rung comment with set bookmark is
displayed.
Note
Bookmark cannot be set in script rung comment.
5
EDIT
Insert
Edit (E)
Bookmark(H)
Insert (I)
Ctrl + Shift + Ins
Insert "With bookmark rung comment" into ladder.

When programing rung comment, bookmark will be automatically registered in workspace.
Move the cursor to the rung where the rung comment is to be inserted.
"Bookmark (H) "
"Insert (I)".
A new rung is added and is displayed on the ladder.

Other procedure
Select "Bookmark (H)"
"Insert(I)" from right-click menu.
Input the comment on the keyboard.

Press the Ctrl +
keys to confirm.
The comment can also be confirmed by pressing the Esc key

After confirmed, bookmark is automatically registered to workspace.
5-22
Setting
Edit (E)
Bookmark (H)
Set (S)
Ctrl + Shift +
Set bookmark in rung comment on Ladder.
Select the rung comment to which the bookmark will be set.
Select "Edit (E)"
"Bookmark ( H ) "
"setting(S)" from the menu.
Other procedure
EDIT
The bookmark is registered in workspace.

"Setting (S)" from right-click menu.
Remove
Edit (E)
Bookmark (H)
Remove (D)
Ctrl + Shift + Delete
Release rung comment bookmark.
Select the rung comment with bookmark.
"Bookmark (H) "
"Remove (D)".
Bookmark is removed.
Other procedure
"Remove (D)" from right-click menu.
Select [Remove the selected bookmark (D)] from right-click menu in work area
5-23
Edit Mode
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Switch between expansion Ladder mode and connecting rung edit mode.
Expanded Ladder Mode

"Edit (E)"
"Edit mode (B)"
"Expanded ladder mode (G)"
In regular programming of ladders, only one OUT, TMR or other output instruction can be written to a
EDIT
single rung of the ladder program. However, the number of rungs in the program can be reduced and
the processing sequence made clearer by using the expander ladder mode.
For example, ON delay timers become as follows:
R000
#30
T0
T0
R500
R000
Regular ladder
#30
T0
T0
R500
Expanded ladder
When the expanded ladder mode is selected and the output instructions is inputted, the cursor is not
automatically moved to the right edge, and instructions can be continuously inputted. In the regular
ladder programming mode, the cursor is automatically moved to the right edge when an output
instruction is inputted.
For example, the ladder program is as follows when the OUT instruction is inputted.
When the expanded ladder mode is not selected
When the OUT instruction is inputted, the cursor is moved the right edge of the ladder.
7,3
The expanded ladder mode setting is automatically saved on KV STUDIO, and is enabled
when KV STUDIO is next started up.
Select "Edit (E)"
"Edit mode (B)"
"Expanded ladder mode (G)" from the menu. The expanded
ladder mode is enabled.

To disable the expanded ladder mode, repeat the above procedure.
Note
Box-type instructions (
MOV
) etc. are connected to the right power rail even in
the expanded ladder mode.
5-24
Connection line Edit Mode

"Edit (E)"
"Edit mode (B)"
"Connection line edit mode (B)"
In this mode, connection rungs can be drawn or deleted using the mouse and arrow keys.
Perform the same to return to the normal edit mode from the connection rung edit mode.
Select "Edit (E)"
"Edit mode (B)"
"Connection line edit mode (B)" in that order from the
menu.
TIP
Select "Edit connection line (F)"
"Connection line edit mode (B)" from right-click menu.
When the connection rung edit mode is enabled, "Connection rung edit mode (B)" in the Edit
menu is preceded by a tick mark.
When inducing connecting rung, move the mouse cursor to the start location where connecting
rung will be induced.
Click the mouse, the cursor becomes a " pencil holding hand ", and drag the mouse from the
initial position of connecting rung to the final position of connecting rung.
To delete a connection rung using the arrow Shift keys, move the cursor with the arrow key for the
direction that you want to delete the connection rung with the Shift key pressed.
Other procedure
To draw a connection rung using the arrow keys, move the cursor with the arrow key for
the direction that you want to draw the connection rung with the Alt key pressed.
To draw a connection rung using the arrow keys, move the cursor with the arrow key for the
direction that you want to draw the connection rung with the Alt key pressed.
5-25
EDIT
Other procedure
Edit Connection Line

Right-click menu
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Edit connection line (F)"
"Enter vert. connection line (V)" F8
"Enter horiz. connection line (H)"
F9
"Horizontal connection rung to end of line (-)"
Alt +
"Delete vert. connection line (X)"
Shift + F8
"Delete horiz. connection line (Y)"
Shift + F9
, Ctrl + Tab
EDIT
Input connection lines

There are three ways to input connection lines.
Press keys
F8
:Draw a vertical connection line downwards from the cursor position.
F9
:Draw a horizontal connection line rightwards from the cursor position.
Alt + <Alt +
->
, Ctrl + Tab
:Draw a connection line to the top/bottom/left/right according to the arrow key you press.
:Draw a connection line from the cursor position to the end of the rung.
Click icons
:Draws a vertical connection line downwards from the cursor position.
:Draws a horizontal connection line rightwards from the cursor position.
Use the mouse and arrow keys in the connection line edit mode
"Connection line Edit Mode", (Page 5-25)
Delete connection lines

There are three ways of deleting connection rungs.
Press keys
Shift + F8
:Delete the connection line to the left of the cursor position.
Delete
Alt + <-
:Delete the horizontal connection line at the cursor position.

->
:Delete a connection rung to the top/bottom/left/right according to the arrow key you press.
Click icons
:Delete the connection line to the left of the cursor position.
:Delete the horizontal connection line at the cursor position.
Use the mouse and arrow keys in the connection line edit mode
"Connection line Edit Mode", (Page 5-25)
5-26
Ladder Arrangement
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Edit (E)"
"Clean up ladder (V)" Ctrl + Shift + F
In order to make the ladder more understandable, please arrange the symbol position of the adder
following the procedures below.
Select "Edit (E)"
" Clean up ladder(V)" from the menu.
Ladder before arrangement
EDIT
Ladder after arrangement
Except conversion error position, whole project Ladder is arranged in good order.
Edit List
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Edit (E)"
"Edit list (L)" Ctrl + D
Display and edit mnemonics list

Display mnemomics lists for specified blocks and edit mnemonics lists to input instructions by the
following procedures.
Move the cursor to the block whose mnemonics list is to be

displayed or to the cell insert or replace edited details in the
mnemonics list.
5-27
Select "Edit (E)"
"Edit list (L)" from the menu.
The "List edit" window appears.
5
EDIT
Edit the mnemonics language in the "List edit" window.
Mnemonics list format

The format of mnemomics list are as follows.
Mnemonics
Operand
Blank
Edit this part
Note
Comment cannot be edited in mnemonics list.

The programs thereafter (before rung feed) are not read.
When rung leading character is ; , read as rung comment.
The ladder program cannot be converted if the mnemonics list is in a different
format.
5-28
Change Operands
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Edit (E)
1
2
Change operand (O)
Select the cell containing the instruction whose operand/comment is to be changed.

Select "Edit (E)"
"Change operand (0)" from the menu.
"Operand" dialog box pops up.
When selecting a cell to which an instruction is not inputted, and press the
key, the
"Instruction/macro /pack pallet" window is opened.

Select the cell without instruction inputted, input value using number key, and the device
No. can be directly changed using same device type.
Specify operand.
Item
Operand
Explanation
Value
Comment Input the device comment.
Type list
Explanation of operand
7,3
Input device No.

Types of devices that can be set to the currently
selected operand are displayed.
Display an explanation of the currently selected
operand.
When clicking the "OK" button without specifying an operand, unspecified operands are
indicated by "???." It is handy if you want to make only a ladder network beforehand when
relay assignments, etc. are not fixed.
5-29
EDIT
7,3
Edit Device Comment
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Edit device comments.
Change device comment

"Edit (E)"
5
EDIT
1
2
"Edit device cmnts (F)"
"Change device cmnt (F)" Ctrl + M
Select the cell containing the instruction whose device comment is to be changed.
Select "Edit (E)"
"Change device cmnts (F)" from the menu.
"Operand" dialog box pops up.

Other procedure
Select "Change device comment (G)" from right-click menu.

For detail of operand edit dialog box, please see
"Change Operands", (Page 5-29)
Delete all device comments

"Edit (E)"
Select "Edit (E)"
"Delete all device comments (A)" from the menu, all
device comments under edition is deleted.
5-30
"Delete all device cmnts (A)"
6
DISPLAY
method.
6-1
About View Functions 6-2
6-2
Entering and Deleting Instructions 6-35
6-3
CPU System Setting 6-45
6-1
DISPLAY
The chapter introduces various functions, commands input and deletion
6-1 About View Functions
This section describes each of the functions contained in the "View(V)" menu. .
Toolbar/Status Bar
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
View(V)
Toolbar(T)
"Status bar(S)"
Select View(V)
Toolbar(T) or Status bar(S) From the menu, toggle display/hide of Toolbar/Status bar.
When the tool bar is marked by a tick : The tool bar is displayed.
When the tool bar is not marked by a tick: The tool bar is hidden.
6
DISPLAY
Toolbar
Status bar
TIP
Clicking "Tool bar(T)" displays a sub-menu that displays the types of available tool bars.
Each time clicking of this option toggles between display/hide.
6-2
Workspace
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
View(V)
Select View(V)
Workspace K Alt + 1
Workspace(K) From the menu, toggle display/hide of workspace.
Switch shortcut column

The workspace includes "workspace" short-cut column displaying project setting and "related software"
short-cut column displaying related software list.
6
DISPLAY
Workspace
Related sofware list
Switch the display by tab

During editor mode
When edit mode of KV STUDIO is "editor", can select the "project" tab of display unit composition
content and Ladder module composition and display the "macro" tab of macro used and registered * .
"Oroject" tab selected
"macro" tab
*Macro tab can be selected only when the models "KV-5000" "KV-3000" "KV-1000" are selected.
6-3
Monitor / online editor / simulator mode

In the mode of "Monitor", "Online Editor", or "Simulator", you can select the "Project" tab in which the
units and ladder modules are displayed and the "Monitor" tab in which macro/module status is
displayed.
6
DISPLAY
"Project" tab selected
"Monitor" tab selected
*Monitor tab can be selected only when the models "KV-5000" "KV-3000" "KV-1000" are selected.
6-4
"Project" tab.
The display status of " Item" tab selected in workspace is introduced below.
Unit configuration
Units set on Unit Editor and assigned relays/DMs are displayed.
The Custom Monitor and Unit Monitor also can be displayed.
TIP
Unit configuration , is displayed only when the model is "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000", "KV700", "KV-700+M".
6
DISPLAY
Right-click menu for unit setup

The following menu is displayed by right-clicking on "Unit settings" or each of the currently set units.
Item
Unit Editor
Edit CPU positioning parameters*3
CPU High-speed counter
setup wizard
Setup logging *3
Display options*1
Custom Monitor*3
Unit Monitor *2
Explanation
Start unit editor.
"Part 3 Unit Editor" (Page 3-1)
Pop up "Edit CPU positioning Parameters" dialog box.
"KV-5000/3000 Series User's Manual", "2-12 Motor(positioning)Control"
ForKV-5000 / 3000 /1000,start high-speed counter setting wizard.
KV-5000/3000 Series PLC User's Manual, "2-8 High-speed count"
It pops up "Logging settings list" dialog box.
"KV-5000 / 3000 series PLC User's Manual" logging/tracing
It displays "Setup display option of workspace" dialog box.
Display custom monitor.
Please see
"9-5 Custom Monitor", (Pafe 9-49).
Display Unit Monitor.

Please see
"9-8 Unit Monitor", (Pafe 9-81).
Positioning Unit/simple settings
This is displayed when KV-H20/H20S/H40S/H20G are connected.
MOTION BUILDER
This is displayed when KV-H20/H20S/H40S/H20G are connected.
PROTOCOL STUDIO
This is displayed when KV-L20V/R is connected.
Setup mail
This is displayed when KV-5000, KV-LE20V is connected.
Mail command Maker

KV-DN20 setup
KV-CL20 setup
MV LINK STUDIO
KV-ML/MC setup
(KV MOTION+)
Error monitor window
Scan time monitor
KV-LE20V User's Manual

This is displayed when KV-DN20 is connected.
KV-DN20 User's Manual
This is displayed when KV-CL20 is connected.
"KV-CL20 User's Manual"
Start MV LINK STUDIO.
MV LINK STUDIO User's Manual
This is displayed when KV-ML16V/MC40V/MC20V is connected.
This is displayed when KV-5000/3000 is connected.
"Error Monitor Window", (Page 10-12)
This is displayed when KV-5000/3000 is connected.
"Scan Time Monitor", (Page 10-14)
6-5
*1
Checkbox items that are marked in the "Workspace display

option settings" dialog box are displayed on the workspace.
*2
This is displayed when a unit other than the KV-5000 CPU

Unit is right-clicked.
*3
This is displayed when the CPU Unit is right-clicked.
Unit configuration switching

The "Unit configuration switching" dialog box is displayed when "Unit configuration switching" is doubleclicked.
"Unit Configuration Switching", (Page 11-2)
6
DISPLAY
TIP Unit configuration switching is applied only for equipments with different unit configuration.
Using the function, can conduct centralized managementon the project managed via device unit.
Device comment
Double click on "Device Comment", display "Device Comment Edit" window.
"Displaying the Device Comment Edit Window", (Page6-17)
Label
Double-clicking on "Edit labels", the "Edit labels" window pops up.
"Displaying the Label Edit Window", (Page6-20)
CPU system setting

Set various parameters related to the program and system.
TIP
CPU system setting. It is valid only when the models "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" are
selected.
Program settings
Set up execute sequence of module
Execute sequence of modules
"Execution sequence of modules setting", (Page 6-42)
Fixed period execute and user interrupt
Fixed cycle module cycle setting and break priority setting.
"Fixed period execute and user interrupt setting", (Page6-43)
Scantime related
Set fixed scanning time operation and END processing time.
"Scan time related setting", (Page6-45)
Protection setting
Set related settings of CPU protection.
"Protection setting", (Page6-46)
6-6
System setting
Entire assigment setting of local device
For the assignment setup of global/local devices and local labels/script devices.
"Entire assignment of local device", (Page6-47)
Set module /macro type device
According to different modules / macros, set the number of Local Devices used.
"Setup module/macro device", (Page6-51)
CPU unit buffer
Set buffer capacity of logging / tracing of CPU unit.

"CPU unit buffer capacity setting", (Page6-52)
DISPLAY
Power failure holding

Complete power-off holding setting of every device.
The devices that can set power off holding includes, R (relay), B (link relay), DM (Data Memory), EM
(expansion Data Memory), ZF (File Register consecutive number method), W (link register), C
(counter).
"Power-off hold setting" (Page 6-53)
Action when error occurs
For the setup of CPU unit action and erorr history in case of error.
"Action when error occurs", (Page6-54)
Upper limit of digital trimmer
Upper value setting of digital trimmer
"Upper limit of digital trimmer", (Page6-55)
6-7
Ladder program
Manage module creation and deletion, etc.
And classify programmed modules.
For more information, please refer to the
KV-5000/3000 Series User Manual.
Right click on the menu in Ladder

Right-click on "Ladder program" or a registered module, the following menu is displayed.
Item
Copy
Description
Copy the selected unit.
DISPLAY
Paste*1
Paste the copied module.
Rename
Rename the selected module.
New module*1
New a module.*3
Open modules/macro
Open the module selected.
Delete
module/macro:*1
Delete the selected module.
*3
*3
Set/cancel module/macro
Disable selected module. Valid after operation again. The disabled module
disable *1
cannot be transmitted to CPU.
Setup module/macro local
Set up the maximum number of devices that can be used by each module.
device *1
Setup module execute
seguence*1
Fixed peried execute and user
interrupt setting*1
Import modules/macro*1
Change display*1
*3
"Local Devices Settings by Module/macro", (Page8-6)

Display "module operate sequence" of "CPU system setting" dialog box.
Display "fixed cycle operation and user interrupt setting" of " CPU system
setting" dialog box.
*3
"Fixed period execute and user interrupt setting", (Page6-43)

Import module from other project.
"Import Module/macros", (Page4-7)
Via "display according to module category" / " display according to module
(madeexecute sequence) operation sequence", switch tree structure of Ladder as follows.

Set the stop module (standby) to start (operation status). *3
Start module*2
Stop module*2
Stop the module that is in operation.*3
Module/macro property
Display module attribute.
Project property
6-8
*3
*3
Display project attribute.

"Project Property", (Page4-5)
*1
It is displayed only when the models "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" are selected.
*2
It is displayed only when the models "KV-5000", "KV-3000" are selected.
*3
For more information, please refer to
"About Module/Macro", (Page7-2)
Macro
Display the macro registered to the project being edited according to different categories, and conduct
macro related managements such as create and delete, etc.
For macro details, please see
"KV-5000 / 3000 series User's Manual".
Right-click menu in macro.

Right-click on every macro registered, and the following menu will be displayed.
Item
Explanation
Copy
Copy the selected macro.
Paste
Pastes the copied macro.
Rename
Rename the selected macro.
New macro
New a macro.*1
Open module/macro
Open module/macro block.
Delete module/macro
Set/cancel module/macro
Disables the currently selected macro. Valid after operation again.
disable
Disabled modules or macros are not transferred to the CPU Unit *1
device
DISPLAY
*1
*1
Sets the upper limit to the number of local devices that are used for each
module/macro.
"Local Devices by Module/macro Setting", (Page8-6)
*1
Setup macro argument
Reset the selected argument.
Import module/macro
Import macro from other project.

"Import Module/macros", (Page4-7)
Import user macro of other

mode
Project property
Import user macro created using tools other than current CPU unit.
Display macro attribute.
*1
*1 For macro details, please see
"About Module/Macro", (Page7-2).
Device default value

This is used for setup of device initial values read when the CPU unit is powered.
The device that can set initial value includes, R (relay), MR (internal auxiliary relay), B (link relay), DM (Data
Memory), EM (expansion data storage), W (link register), ZF (File Register consecutive number method).
"Device Defaults Setting", (Page 11-4).
File register setting

Register the message written into FM (File Register), when transferring data, save it to memory card of
CPU unit.
Up to 1,000 records can be read out. To read them from the memory card, use a file register-specific
instruction.
"Add/modify file register settings", (Page 11-5).
6-9
"Macro" tab
Introduce the display status after the "macro" tab is selected in workspace.
TIP "macro" tab is only displayed when "the edit mode of KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" is
"editor".
Project
Display the macro registered to the project being edited according to different categories, and conduct
macro related managements such as create and delete, etc.
DISPLAY
For macro details, please see "KV-5000 / 3000 series User's Manual".
"Right-click menu in macro.", (Page6-9)
Program library
Display the macro registered to the computer and being used.
The library has " system " of
management system macro and "user" of management user registration macro.
TIP It is displayed only when the models "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" are selected.
Right-click the menu in system
Right-click on t"system" or every system macro, the following menu will appear.
Item
Explanation
Copy
Copy the selected macro.
Open macro
Open module system macro module.
Users
Right-click on "Users" or user registration macro, the following menu will appear.
Item
6-10
Explanation
Copy
Copy user registration macro selected.
Paste
Paste the copied user register macro.
Open macro
Open module user register macro module.
Delete Macro
Delete the user registration macro selected.
Rename
Rename macro registered by the selected user.
"Monitor" tab
Introduce display status of the "monitor" tab selected in workspace.
TIP The "Monitor" tab is displayed when the mode of "KV-5000", "KV-3000", and "KV-1000" is
"Monitor". "Online Editor", or "Simulator".
Ladder program
Manage the operation/ stop of every module and macro created during monitor/ online editor/ simulator.
DISPLAY
For macro details, please see "KV-5000 / 3000 series User's Manual".
Right click on menu in Ladder

Right-click on every module / macro to be registered, the following menu is displayed.
Item
Description
Open module/macro
Open module/macro block.
Display "different module / macro device settings" of " CPU system setting".
device
Setup module execute
sequence
"Setup module/macro device", (Page6-51)

Display "module operation sequence setting" of " CPU system setting".
"Execution sequence of modules setting", (Page6-42)
Start module*1
Start the selected module.
Stop module*1
Stop the selected module.
Project property
Display attribute of the selected macro.

*1 It is displayed only when the model "KV-5000", "KV-3000" are selected.
6-11
Output Window
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"View (V)"
From the menu, select "Display (V)"
"Output window (O)" Press + 2
"Output window (O)", switch display/hide of output window.
Switch the displayed image via the tab on the lower part of output window.
6
DISPLAY
Project (tab)
Explanation
Display converted result of ladder program.
Convert
"Conversion", (Page 8-2)

After searching in search / replacement dialog box, click "display list" button, display
Search
retrieval result, which can be used in cross reference.

"Cross Reference", (Page 5-14)
Display project verification result.
Verify
"Verify Project", (Page 4-4)
Communicate
Local assignment
BREAK log
7,3
6-12
Display log of PLC communication status.

In ladder conversion, the number of local devices of individual modules and list of local
device assignment destinations are displayed.
Display BREAK occurrence log.
In output window, right-click, selecting "Save in text format (K)", the content displayed in
output window can be saved in text format.
Module Library
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
View(V)
From the menu, select "View (V)"
Module library(M)
"Module library (M)", switch between display/hide of module
library.
6
DISPLAY
Right-click menu in module library

Right-click on module library to display following menu.
Item
Copy
Description
Paste
Paste the copied module.
New folder
In current folder, create a folder.
Open module/macro
Rename
Delete
Open the module / macro of the selected module.

"Open Module/macro", (Page7-3)
Rename the selected module.
"Module/macro Property", (Page7-4)
"Delete Module/macro", (Page7-3)
Import library
Import the module library exported.
Export library
Output module library.
Module/macro
Display property of module / macro selected.
property
"Module/macro Property", (Page7-4)
Switch the display by tab

When the model (CPU unit used) is KV-5000 / 3000, display "KV-5000 / 3000" tab and "KV-1000" tab.
you can also read a registered mdoule from either tab. To register a module, however, you can only
drag and drop it in the "KV-5000 / 3000" tab.
When support model (CPU unit used) is KV-1000, only display "KV-1000" tab.
6-13
Module registering and calling

Drag module between module library and workspace, can register and call module.
Recalling universal module after registration, can improve compiled program efficiency.
Workspace
Call
DISPLAY
Register
Module library
TIP
Macro used in module is automatically registered.

Drag folder in module library to Ladder icon in workspace, can register all module, macros
in folder to the project.
Enter Instruction
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
View(V)
From the menu, select "view (V)"
instruction / macro /pack pallet Ctrl + Shift + P
"instruction / macro / pack pallet (I)", and the instruction / macro
/ pack pallet is displayed.

Click "instruction" tab / "macro" tab / "pack" tab of instruction / macro / pack pallet, switch the displayed
image.
Other procedure
Select the cell to which the instruction is not entered in Ladder, press
Move cursor to the cell to which not entered in Ladder and double click.
Instruction pallet
For instruction pallet details, please see
6-14
"Entering Instructions", (Page 6-32).
key.
Macro pallet
TIP
Macro pallet is displayed only when the models "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" are
selected.
Macro list
6
DISPLAY
Item
Description
Macro name/type Display the name and type of the macro selected.
Comment
Display the entered content in displayed comment field in macro property.

Display the operand attribute of the selected macro.
Operand
Enter operand value.
Explanation of
operand
ID No.
("in excution")
(Help)
Displays an explanation of the currently selected operand.

After selected, ID No. of macro can be set freely, so, execution bit can be used in Ladder.
Display help information of macro and macro instruction.
(Overwrite)
Save macro instruction to editor.
(Close)
Exit instruction / macro / pack pallet.
7,3
For macro details, please see
"KV-5000 / 3000 series User's Manual" 3-9 macro "".
6-15
Pack pallet
pack pallet is displayed only when the models "KV-700", "KV-700+M" are selected.
TIP
6
DISPLAY
Item
Select unit
Select pack
instruction
Setup axis
Setup parameter
(Help)
6-16
Description
Select from positioning module (KV-H20S / H40S / H40G) set using module editor.
Select PACK instruction.
For details of PACK instruction, please see
"KV-700 User's Manual" 9-3 positioning
module PACK instruction ".

Select operation axis.
Set parameters.
Parameters vary with the PACK instruction selected.
HTML help of PACK instruction starts.
(Overwrite)
Save the PACK instruction to editor.
(Close)
Exit PACK instruction pallet.
Displaying the Device Comment Edit Window
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
View(V)
Device cmnt edit window(C)
Ctrl + F7
"Device cmnt edit window(C)", and the device comment edit window
pop up.
The display screen can be switched by clicking the "Global" tab or the "Local" tab on the comment edit
window. ("local" tab is displayed only when the model selected is "KV-5000" "KV-3000" " KV-1000 ").
When the "Details" button is clicked, the display screen changes, and devices are displayed in detail.
Other procedure
Double click device comment in work area
Select "Device cmnt edit window(K)" from the menu that appears by right-clicking the workspace.
For comment display, please see
DISPLAY
TIP
"Displaying Comments", (Page 6-29).
Item
Description
Select device
Select unit
Select module/macro*1
"Register special devices"
"Register unit devices"*2
"Detail"
"Closes detail"
All devices
Display
Used
mode
Unused
(Update)
Comments/label register
Label display
Select edition comment device.

Select edition comment unit.
Select module/macro for editing comment.
Comments has been defined for specific device registered.
Select unit, register defined comment of the unit
Switches to a detailed display.
Closes the detailed display
When this radio button is marked, all devices are displayed.
When this radio button is marked, only devices currently used in the ladder program are displayed.
When this radio button is marked, only devices currently unused in the ladder program are displayed.
Updates the information to the latest information.
When this checkbox is marked, only devices currently registered with comments or label are displayed.
When this checkbox is marked, only device list currently registered with labels are displayed.
When this checkbox is marked, a list of the use status of global and local devices is displayed.
When a module is selected from the list, the device use status of the selected module is displayed.
When "----" is selected from the list, the device use status of the entire project is displayed.
The cursor moves to the specified device No.
Displays a list of devices selected at [Select device], etc.
Display and enter comments here.
Using status
Jump
Device No.
comment1, comment2
Local device comment 1
Local device comment 2
Display and enter local device comments here.
*1
It is valid only when the models "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" are selected.
*2
It is valid only when the models "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" "KV-700+M", "KV-700" are selected.
TIP
For prohibited comment characters, please see
the "Appendix 2 List of prohibited Characters"
6-17
Right-click menu for comment1/2 and local comment1/ 2

The following menu is displayed when you right-click on "comment1", "comment2", "local comment1" or
"local comment2".
Item
Description
Undo
Cancel the previous operation.
Redo
[restore ] (cancel) operation.
Cut
Cuts the selected range.
Copy
Paste
Pastes cut or copied data to the cursor position.
DISPLAY
Delete
Delete the selected range.
Seach
Searches for a text string in the comment edit window.
Replace
Replaces a text string in the comment edit window.
Cross reference
Create cross reference.
TIP
Comments can be copied and pasted between KV STUDIO and Microsoft Excel.
(Press Ctrl + C Keys\ Ctrl + V Keys)
Searching for text strings

Search for a text string in the comment edit window.
Right-click on "comment 1", "comment 2", "local comment 1" or "local comment 2", select "search" (or
press
key +
key), the "device comment edit window search" dialog box pops up.
Search character string entered.
Item
Explanation
Enter the text string to search. When the
button is clicked, a
Search strings
pulldown menu is displayed, and a list of the last ten selected text strings
Case sensitive
When this checkbox is marked, a case sensitive search is performed
is displayed.
Search 100% match
entered text string are searched.
Search
Entire project
The entire project is set as the search range.
range
Selected device
The selected device is set as the search range.
Search
direction
6-18
When this checkbox is marked, only items that completely match the
Up
Down
Moves the cursor upwards, and displays the next instruction or operand
that matches the search conditions.
Moves the cursor downwards, and displays the next instruction or
operand that matches the search conditions.
Replacing text strings

Replace a text string in the comment edit window.
Right-click on "comment 1", "comment 2" , "local comment 1" or "local comment 2", select
"replace" (or press
key +
key).
The [Comment edit window(replace)] dialog box is displayed.
6
DISPLAY
Item
Explanation
Enter the text string before the replace is executed. When the
Search strg
button
is clicked, a pulldown menu is displayed, and a list of the last ten selected
text strings is displayed.
button
Replace string
is clicked, a pulldown menu is displayed, and a list of the last ten selected
Case sensitive
text strings is displayed.
Search 100% match

Replace
range
Entire project
When this checkbox is marked, only items that completely match the
entered text string are searched.
The entire project is set as the replace range.
Selected device
The selected device is set as the replace range.
Selected range
The selected range is set as the replace range.
To replace individual text strings, click the "Execute" button. To batch-replace text strings, click
the "Replace all" button.
6-19
Displaying the Label Edit Window
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
View(V)
Select "View(V)"
Label edit window(L)
"Label edit window(L)" from the menu. Different dialog boxes will be displayed for
different models (CPU unit used).
When the model is KV-5000 / 3000

When the model is KV-5000 / 3000, can register global label and local label, switch between "global"
tab and "local" tab, separately register.
DISPLAY
"Global" tab
Set global label registration.
Item
Label name
Data format
Bit (BOOL)
1-word unsigned
integerUINT
2-word unsigned
integerUDINT
1-word signed
integer(INT)
2-word signed
integer(DINT)
Float real number
REAL
Explanation
Enter the label name here (within 32 1-byte characters/16 2-byte characters)
Specify device data format assigned to global label.
The postfix is processed as bit type data.
Process as 16 bits unsigned data (default postfix is U).
Process as 32 bits unsigned data (default postfix is D).
Process as 16 bits signed data (default postfix is S).
Process as 32 bits signed data (default postfix is L).
Process as floating real number (default postfix is F).
*1
Text stringSTRING The postfix is processed as text string data.
Timer
Use timer.The devices other than timer device are not assigned.
Counter
Use counter.The devices other than counter device are not assigned.
Array
Process as "Global label arrangement " during use of script program. *2
Device/constant
Label comment
(Up)
(Down)
Specify device/constant assigned to global label.*3

Set comment of global label. Comments different from those of assigned
devices can be specified. (within 32 1-byte characters/16 2-byte characters)
Move up the selected line. This button cannot be used when Assort is enabled.
Move down the selected line. This button cannot be used when Assort is
enabled.
(sequencing function valid) Set the sequencing function under "label edit window" to valid.
(Import device comment)
6-20
Current device or unit comments are imported into the label comments.
*1
When character string is specified by Data Format, the " the

number of characters" dialog box appears, so, use byte unit to
set the number of characters entered.
*2
Process as "Global label arrangement " during programming script

program.Arrangement can not be used in creating ladder program.
KV-5000/3000 Series Script Programming Manual
*3
The constant can be assigned to global label.Please specify constant in the specified range of data format.
TIP
The
devi Range assigned to label is displayed on the
status bar of "label edit" window.
"Local" tab
DISPLAY
Set local label registration.
Item
Select module/macro
Explanation
Select module/ macro registered to local label.
Capture
Capture unregistered label used by module / macro, then register.
Label name*1
Enter the label name here (within 32 1-byte characters/16 2-byte characters)
Data format
Specify device data format assigned to local label.
Bit(BOOL)
1-word unsigned
integerUINT
2-word unsigned
integerUDINT
1-word signed integer
(INT)
(DINT)
Float real number
REAL
The postfix is processed as bit type data.

Process as 16 bits unsigned data (default postfix is U).
Process as 32 bits unsigned data (default postfix is D).
Process as 16 bits signed data (default postfix is S).
Process as 32 bits signed data (default postfix is L).
Process as floating real number (default postfix is F).
*2
Text stringSTRING The postfix is processed as text string data.
Timer
Use timer.The devices other than timer device are not assigned.
Counter
Use counter.The devices other than counter device are not assigned.
Array
Process as "Local label arrangement" during use of script program. *3
Constant
Label comment
Specify constant assigned to local label. *4

Set comment of local label.
(within 32 1-byte characters/16 2-byte characters)
(Up)
Move up the selected line. This button cannot be used when Assort is enabled.
(Down)
Move down the selected line. This button cannot be used when Assort is enabled.
(sequencing function valid) Set the sequencing function under "label edit window" to valid.
6-21
*1
The same label name can be used in different modules/macros. When the name is the same as
the global label, the priority will be given to the local label.
*2
When character string is specified by Data Format, the "the

number of characters" dialog box appears, so, use byte unit to
set the number of characters entered.
*3
Process as "Local label arrangement " during programming script program.Arrangement can not
be used in creating ladder program.
KV-5000/3000 Series Script Programming Manual
*4
The constant can be assigned to local label. Please specify constant in the specified range of data format.
DISPLAY
When KV-1000/700 / 700+M / P16 / 10 / 16 / 24 / 40

When the model is other than KV-5000 / 3000, global label can be only registered.
Item
Description
Label name
Enter label name (max. 16 half-width characters / 8 full-width characters).
Device
Input device
Device Comment
Display device comment.
TIP
Right click on the menu in label edit window

Right-click on "Label Edit window", display following menu.
Item
Cut
Description
Cut the selected label.
Copy
Copy the selected label.
Paste
Paste the cut / copied label.
Batch-insert*1
Batch-insert label.
Row insert
An empty rung is inserted at the selected rung.
Delete row
INC insert
Delete the selected row.

Register (Incremental register) the device obtained by executing "+1" offset
of the above registered device additionally.
Batch-change data format*1
Batch-change data format.
No assort*1
Restore the sequenced label.

Rearrange label name as per ascending sequence. Arrange as per
Sort by label name
ascending sequence, then arrange as per sequence of label name, and it

will be rearranged as per descending sequence.
Sort by data format*1
6-22
Sort by data format*2Rearrange as per ascending sequence, then sequence

as per data format and it will be arranged in descending sequence.
Item
Description
Arrange device as per ascending sequence. Rearrange as per ascending
Sort by device order
sequence, arrange as per device sequence, and then arrange in descending

sequence.
Rearrange comment as per ascending sequence. Rearrange as per
Sort by comment
ascending sequence, then arrange as per comment sequence and it will be
Search
Find text string in label edit window.
Replace
Replace text string in label edit window.
Corss reference
Create cross reference.
arranged as per descending sequence.
*1
It is displayed only when the support model "KV-5000/3000" are selected.
*2
Data format shall be sequenced as follows.

Bit
DISPLAY
PRI: high
1-word unsigned integer

2-word unsigned integer
Floating real number
Text string
Timer
PRI: low
Counter
For label display, please see
TIP
"Display the Label Comments", (Page 6-29).
Copy and paste can be made to Microsoft Excel.

( Pres + C Keys\ Ctrl + V Keys)
Searching for text strings

Find text string in label edit window.
Right-click on "Label Edit window" and select "Find".
"Label edit window(search)" pops up.
Other procedure
Press
key+
key
6-23
Item
Explanation
Enter the text string to search. When the
Search string
Case sensitive

When this checkbox is marked, only items that completely match the entered
Search 100% match

Search
Label
target
Device
Search
direction
button is clicked, a pulldown menu
is displayed, and a list of the last ten selected text strings is displayed.
text string are searched.

Sets labels as the search range.
Sets devices as the search range.
Moves the cursor upwards, and displays the next instruction or operand that
Up
matches the search conditions.

Moves the cursor downwards, and displays the next instruction or operand
Down
that matches the search conditions.
DISPLAY
Replacing text strings

Replaces a text string in the label edit window.
Right-click on "Label Edit window" and select "Replace".

"Label edit window(search)" pops up.
Other procedure
Press
key+
key
Item
Explanation
Search string
button is
clicked, a pulldown menu is displayed, and a list of the last ten selected text
strings is displayed.
button is
Replace string
clicked, a pulldown menu is displayed, and a list of the last ten selected text
Case sensitive
Displace Entire project
The entire project is set as the replace range.
strings is displayed.
range
Select range
The selected range is set as the replace range.
To replace individual text strings, click the "Execute" button. To batch-replace text strings, click
the "Replace all" button.
6-24
Device Use List
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
View(V)
From the menu, select "display (Z)"
Device use list(Z) Ctrl + E
"Device use list (Z)", display application status list of every
device.
6
DISPLAY
Item
Global (tab)
Explanation
Display use list of global device.
Local (tab) *1
Display use list of global device.
Select device
Select a device.
Select this option when the device use list is displayed for a PLC exented/
Select unit
special module.
When "----" is displayed, use list of all modules will be displayed.
"Register special devices"
Register special device comment.
"Register unit devices"
Register module device comment.
All devices
Display mode Used
Unused
Reg comments
Using status
Unrelated to use / unuse, display the specified device list.

Display the device list being used in Ladder.
Display the unused device list in Ladder.
After checking, display the device whose comment has been registered in list
form.
Cancel the check, display only Device No. and comment in list form.
Specify module / macro displaying the list used.
Select module/macro*1
When "----" is displayed, application list of all modules/ macros will be displayed
in list form.
"Update"
Update device application list.
Jump
Jump to display the specified device No..

Set detailed setting (specific device registration / module device registration /
"Close details" *2
display modes / comment registration / application status / module / macro

selection / update) to non-display.
*1
*2
It is displayed only when the models "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" are selected.
After closing detail, hide " close detail " button, and " detail " button is displayed.
Click "detail"
button, display detailed setting.

6-25
7,3
Ladder is editable while the device table is displayed.

The meaning of the device list as follows.
Item
Device No.
Explanation
Device No. is displayed.
Indicates contact instruction. When 1 above contacts are used,
is
displayed.
Indicates output instruction. When 1 above outputs are used,
is
displayed.
Cnt
The counting of output instruction programmed in the ladder.

The device is displayed only when applied on any one of source side or
Error
target side. It is not displayed for input relay, CR, unit input relay, specific
unit relay
. For unusable characters in comment, please refer to
DISPLAY
"appendix 2 unusable character list".

Comment12
Display Use Status
Display device comments.Also editable.
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
View(V)
Select "VIew(V)"
"Display use status(U)" from the menu. The "Use status display" window is displayed.
Item
Description
Select device
Select the device whose use status to be displayed.
Select module/macro
When selecting "global", service status of all modules / macros is displayed.
Up
direction
Down
Operate search downwards from current device position.
Used
Search against the device unused in Ladder.
(Excute search)
Operate search upwards from current device position.
Unused Search against the device unused in Ladder.

Conflict
ion
6-26
Specify module / macro displaying application status.
Search
Search device
Display use status(U)
Search against the device using race contention in Ladder.

Searching is performed based on searing direction or device searching criteria. Clicking on
this button, the cursor moves to the next search result.
"Update"
Display device update information according to current step.
(Option)
Display "Setup device usage option" dialog box * .

Item
Jump
Description
Jump to display the specified device No..
* Can set " ignore ZRES instruction " in the "device service status option setting" dialog box.
TIP
Ladder can be edited while the " application status display " dialog box is displayed.
The devices programmed in script are not counted (the ladder devices in a unfolded script
are countered)
Device No. are as follows.
When MR000 to MR015
6
DISPLAY
The values in the table represents countings of ladder use (including contact/output).
"*" is showed when the use countings are over 100.
The format for compiling file is as follows.
Bluedevices used by Ladder (race contention unused)
Whitedevices unused by the ladder
Redrace contention devices used in the ladder
Display CPU System Setting
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
View (V)
CPU system setting (P)
" CPU system setting (P)", display the " CPU system setting" dialog
box.
For details of CPU system setting, please see
"6-3 CPU System Setting", (Pafe 6-42).
6-27
Mnemonics List
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
View(V)
Mnemonic list(N)
Open Ladder in current window, display in mnemonic list.

Note
The "Mnemonic symbol list" window can be selected from the menu only in Monitor or Simulator.
Other procedure
"Mnemonic list (N)", display mnemonic symbol list window.
Double click rung No..
DISPLAY
TIP
Click line number of Ladder edit window, move the cursor in mnemonic list to corresponding
line numbered position.
Rung break setting

Double click every line in mnemonic list window, can set "Line
break" (can be set in multiple rungs).
The set line will display
, as shown in right figure.
When the program execution proceeds to "Rung break", the

window on the right side is popped up and the program is paused.
"Rung breaks", (Page10-10)
Zoom in/Zoom out
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
View(V)
Zoom in (E)
Ctrl + PageUp
View(V)
Zoom out (R)
Ctrl + PageDown
Ladder diagrams can be displayed in five sizes. The default is "100%" when KV STUDIO is started up.
7,3
"Zoom in (E)" or "Zoom out (R)" to enlarge display.
From the menu, select "Tool (T)"
" Option (O)", open "Setup option" dialog box. Display
ratio can be also set in "Set display mode" label.
6-28
Auto Zoom
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"View" (V)
"auto zoom" (A)
Automaticity zoom Ladder display to proper window size.

From the menu, select "display" (V)
"Auto zoom" (A).
When "Auto zoom" is selected, "Zoom in (E) " and "Zoom out (R) " become grey.
Displaying Labels
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
View(V)
Displaying Labels(G) Ctrl + Backspace
"Display label (G)", and the device name is hidden and the label is displayed.
For Label Edit, please refer to
"Displaying the Label Edit Window", (Page 6-20).
Display the Label Comments

View(V)
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Display the label device(D) Ctrl + Backspace
To tile the device name with the symbol name.

Select "View (V)"
"Display label and device(D)" from the menu to tile the device name and the
label.
For label edit, please see
"Displaying the Label Edit Window", (Page 6-20).
Displaying Comments
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
View(V)
Display cmnts(F) Ctrl +
Press
Toggle display/hide of device comments by the following procedure.

Select "View(V)"
TIP
"Display cmnts(F)". Each click toggles display/hide.
" Option (O)", open "Setup option" dialog box. The "Setup
option" dialog box is displayed. Display/hide can be set also on the "Set display mode" tab.
Comments to display can also be selected from "comment1/comment2".
For comment edit, please see
"Displaying the Device Comment Edit Window", (Page
6-17).
6-29
DISPLAY
Device name symbol is replaced with label.
Displaying Unit Devices
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
View(V)
Display unit device (Y) Shift + Space
Display device names of symbols in the ladder program in device annotation for the unit.
With device annotation for units, relays/DMs assigned on Unit Editor can be expressed in the
annotation "nth relay/DM from the start of the unit connected to nth".
For example, the relay No. of the 5th input on the Input Unit next to the CPU becomes "R01_005". Also,
the 31st relay No. of 3rd Output Unit from the CPU becomes "R03_00115".
Unit No.
DISPLAY
Unit No.
Unit relay No.
: Connection No. of the unit assigned as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and so forth starting from the
CPU.
Unit relay No.
: Relay No. assigned the number of relay points to be occupied from 00000
Unit No.
KV-U7
KV-DR1
Unit relay No.
KV-5000
KVB16X
KVC32X
KVB16T
KVC32T
KVH20S
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
01915
00015
00115
00015
00115
01215
3rd relay No. of KV-5000 (R30002) R00_002

5th relay No. of KV-B16X* (R32004) R01_004
17th relay No. of KV-C32T*(R32500) R04_100
603rd relay No. of KV-H20S
Note
R05_603
CPU device other than KV-5000 cannot be indicated using unit device mark.
"Display unit device(Y)", use module device mark to represent
device name on editor.
TIP
" Option (O)", open "Setup option" dialog box. Unit device
display can be also set in "Setup display mode" (display mode setting) label.
6-30
Local Assignment Disfination Display During Monitor
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
View (V)
From the menu, select "display (V)"
local assignment disfination (W)
"local assignment disfination (W)", Local Device, local label
and macro argument device are displayed with global device mark of destination assignment only in
monitor mode or simulator mode (only limited to KV-1000).
When KV-5000/3000 is used, the macro argument device (P/V/UM/UM/UV) is displayed as assignment
destination memory (VM)/relay (VR).
TIP
"Setup option (O)", open "Setup option" dialog box. Unit
Display Ladder Monitor Value in Hex
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
View (V)
DISPLAY
device display can be also set in "Display mode" (display mode setting) label.
Display Ladder monitor value in Hex (X)
"Display ladder monitor value in Hex(X)", current value on
Ladder is displayed as HEX only in monitor mode, online editor mode or simulator mode.
TIP
"Option (O)", open "option settings" dialog box. Unit device
display can be also set in "Setup display mode" (display mode setting) label.
Clear Changed Background Color
KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
View(V)
Clear changed background color(H)
Cells that have been edited by online edit are displayed with a light blue background. This indicates that
the program has been changed. Clear this display indication.
Select "View(V)"
"Clear changed background color(H)" from the menu. The background color
indicating a change to the program is cleared.
TIP
Set automatic clear by either of following procedures:

Select "Monitor/Simulator(N)"
"Start online edit(J)" from the menu.
"Setup Online Edit", (Page9-95)

Select "Tool(T)"
"Option(O)" From the menu, and set on the "Online edit setting" tab
in the "Setup option" dialog box.
6-31
6-2 Entering and Deleting Instructions
This section describes how to enter and delete instructions in ladder diagrams.
Entering Instructions
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Ladder symbols are automatically entered when an instruction is specified.

There are three ways of entering instructions.
Select and enter instruction symbol, type and code from the "Instruction/macro/pack/palette".
"Entering from the Instruction/Macro/Pack/Palette", (Page6-33)
6
DISPLAY
Enter the leading character of the instruction, and directly enter the instruction using a
mnemonic from the dialog box that is displayed.
"Directly Entering Instructions Using Mnemonics", (Page6-35)
Directly enter from the tool bar (some instructions only)

"Enter instruction from tool bar (editing symbol 1)", (Page6-36)
6-32
Entering from the Instruction/Macro/Pack/Palette

Entering from the Instruction/Macro/Palette
You can enter instructions on the ladder edit window by dragging-and-dropping symbols that are
actually displayed from the [Instruction/Macro Palette] window, which means that you can enter
instructions as if you are writing or drawing a ladder diagram.
Move the mouse cursor to the cell on the ladder diagram to enter the instruction to and doubleclick.
Other procedure
Select "View(V)"
Click
"Instruction/macro palette(I)" from the menu.
button.
Select a cell on the ladder edit window not containing an instruction, and press the
DISPLAY
key.
TIP
Ctrl + Shift + P
This way, ladder programs can be made with the instruction/macro/pack/palette displayed at all
times.
When you select a cell containing an instruction and press the
key, the [Operand edit]
dialog box is displayed.
"Changing operands", (Page6-34)
If you are still not familiar with making ladder programs or entering instructions, you can
enter instructions reliably and without any mistakes by entering from the "Instruction/
macro palette" window.
Specify the instruction.
Item
Explanation
Displays the symbols to enter as a list together with a brief description of its
operation.
Displays the symbols to input in the form of a tree.
Displays the symbols to input in the form of a list.
Search instruction
Suffix/differential
Instructions to be displayed in the form of a symbol display list can be selected by individual
groups. Select from "All insts/Basic insts/Application insts/Operation insts/ Expanded insts".
Enter the instruction in the right column and click the "Search (B)" button to search.
This item can be set when an instruction that can be set is selected. When an
instruction that cannot be set is currently selected, this item is displayed in gray and
cannot be selected. The default suffix is "U".
6-33
Item
Explanation of
instructions
Operand
Type list
Explanation of
operands
Explanation
Displays an explanation of operation of the currently selected symbol.
Enter values and comments here.
Displays a list of devices that can be set to the currently selected operand.
Displays an explanation of the currently selected operand.
Specify the operand.

Enter a valid operand to the instruction you specified.
Drag-and-drop the symbol selected in step 2 to place it the location to enter the instruction.
The symbol is entered.
DISPLAY
Other procedure
Click the "Overwrite" button.
Changing operands
When you select a cell containing an instruction and press the
key, the [Operand] dialog box is
displayed.
Other procedure
From the menu, select "Edit"
"operand ( O )"
Item
Operand
Explanation
Value
Enter the device No.
Comment Enter the device comment.
Type list
Explanation of operands
The types of devices that can be set to the currently

Displays an explanation of the currently selected
operand.
When you change the value or comment, and click the "OK" button, the value or comment is changed.
TIP
the "Appendix 2 List of prohibited
Characters"
When entering value on command symbol, Device No. can be only changed.
6-34
Directly Entering Instructions Using Mnemonics

Directly Entering Instructions Using Mnemonics
When an instruction is entered in the dialog box that is displayed, a symbol appears on the ladder
program.
TIP
Instructions can be entered more quickly than when you use the "Instruction/macro/pack/
palette" window.
Select the cell to which the command will be entered in Ladder edit window, enter the starting
character of the command to be entered and the direct entry dialog box pops up.
Press the Esc or
key
DISPLAY
Other procedure
Enter the instruction on the keyboard.

Note
Enter instructions in mnemonic format with a 1-byte space between the instruction
and the device name (operand).
Input contact LD R1 input counter C 0 #3 R0
TIP
input timer T 0 #10

Blank Blank
Blank
Blank
Some instructions can be abbreviated in the entry format. For details, see
KV-5000/
3000/1000 Series Instruction Reference Manual

When inputting command in direct input dialog, the command can aslo be input via
function keys. For commands assigned to each function key, see
"Shortcut keys valid
in the Editor mode", Page A-14.
Complete command and operand entry, click "save" button or "insert" button.
Click "overwrite" button, overwrite at the cursor position, click the "insert" button, insert at the cursor
position.
TIP
If you click the "Overwrite" or "Insert" button without specifying an operand, unspecified
operands are indicated by "???"
The instruction can also be entered by function keys in direct input dialog box. For
instructions assigned to various function keys, see
"Shortcut Keys Valid on Unit Editor",
Page A-13.
Correcting/changing an entered instruction
Move the cursor to the instruction to change and press the Esc or Key or
key, display
when, display direct entry dialog box, correct command.
Click the "Overwrite" or "Insert" button.
6-35
Enter instruction from tool bar (editing symbol 1)

Entry N.O. contact
F5
Entry N.C. contact
Shift + F5
OR Enter of NO contact F4
OR Enter of NC contact Shift + F4
Enter coils
F7
Enter NC contact coil
Shift + F7
Enter NO contacts, NC contacts, NO contact ORs, NC contact ORs, and coils/NC contact coils.
DISPLAY
Select the cell to enter the instruction to, Select the type of contact to enter from the tool bar (edit
symbol 1).
It pops up "Operand" dialog box.

Item
Operand
Explanation
Value

Type list
TIP

operand.
Characters".
If you click the "OK" button without specifying an operand, unspecified operands are
indicated by "???."
???
When 1st operand is unspecified in LD command

???
When the 1st operand is unspecified in OUT command
6-36
Enter instruction from tool bar (edit symbol 2).

SET
Alt + F1
SET
RES
Alt + F2
RES
TMR
Alt + F3
TMS
Alt + F5
T
S
Alt + 0
C 0
DIFU
Alt + F8
DIFD
Alt + F9
MOV
Alt + F10
LDA
Alt + F11
LDA
STA
Alt + F12
STA
DIFU
DIFD
MOV
DISPLAY
Entering set, reset, timers, counters, differential contacts, differential output, and data transfer
instructions
TIP
Different PLC categories are selected for some models, some icons are hidden. The entry of
shortcut keys supporting command not displayed is invalid.
Select the cell to which the command will be entered, select the command to be entered from
tool bar (edit symbol 2).

Item
Operand
Explanation
Value
Type list
TIP

operand.
Characters"
indicated by "???."
???
SET
When the 1st operand is unspecified in SET command
MOV
DM0
???
When the 2nd operand is unspecified in MOV command
6-37
Enter instruction from tool bar (edit symbol 3).

MEP
Alt + Shift + F5
MEF
Alt + Ctrl + F5
LDP
Alt + F7
LDF
Alt + Shift + F7
ORP
Alt + Shift + F8
ORF
Alt + Shift + F9
INV
Alt + Ctrl + F10
6
DISPLAY
Entering differential contact command.
TIP
When selecting KV-P16, KV-10 (16), KV-24 (40), edit symbol 3 cannot be displayed.
Different PLC categories are selected for some models, some icons are hidden.
The
entry of shortcut keys supporting command not displayed is invalid.
tool bar (edit symbol 3).

Item
Operand
Explanation
Value
Type list
TIP

The types of devices that can be set to the
currently selected operand are displayed.
operand.
Characters"
indicated by "???."
???
When 1st operand is unspecified in LDP command
6-38
Enter instruction from tool bar symbol for (CPU positioning)

PLSX
PLSX
PLSY
PLSY
JOGX
JOGX
JOGY
CW
CCW
HIGH
ORGX
ORGX
ORGY
ORGY
TCHX
TCHX
TCHY
TCHY
JOGY
CW
CCW
HIGH
Note
It is valid only when the models "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" "KV-700/700+M"

are selected.
Positioning parameters must be set separately in addition to entering positioning
instructions in order to use the CPU's integrated positioning function.
"Edit CPU Positioning Parameter", (Page11-7)
tool bar (CPU positioning symbol ).
TIP
The "Operand" dialog box is not displayed for each of the JOGX, JOGY, ORGX, ORGY,
TCHX, and TCHY instructions as they do not have operands. These instructions are
displayed as symbols.
Item
Operand
Explanation
Value
Type list
7,3

operand.
Characters"
indicated by "???."
???
PLSX
When the 1st operand is unspecified in PLSX command
6-39
DISPLAY
Enter instructions for the CPU positioning function
Enter instruction from the device comment edit window, etc.

From device comment edit window and "device use list" dialog box, enter command by dragging
(contact/ coil).
7,3
The devices that can be entered from device comment edit window or "device use list" dialog
box are only limited to R, MR, LR, B, CR.
Left-click, dragdrop, enter

Right-click on Device No. to be entered in the device comment edit window and "device use list " dialog
6
DISPLAY
box, and dragdrop to any cell of Ladder edit window.

LD instruction is entered to the cell.
Left-click drag
Right-click, dragdrop, enter

Enter LD instruction using left-clickdrop, drag.Can select instruction using right-click, dragdrop.
Right-click on Device No. entered using device comment edit window and " device use list "
dialog box, dragdrop to any cell of Ladder edit window.
Right-click drag
6-40
Select command from the poping up menu.

Enter the selected command.
6
The cell magnified, the command that cannot be entered, the menu changes to grey, cannot
be used.
Deleting Instructions
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Select the cell on the ladder edit window containing the instruction to delete, and press the Delete
key.
Specifying the Default Suffix
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
When entering instructions, entry of the suffix can be omitted by specifying the default suffix
beforehand. The default suffix is set to "U (no suffix)".
For postfix details, please see
"KV-5000 / 3000 series PLC User's Manual".
Specify the suffix to set as the default from the "Suffix" pulldown list. This sets the
default suffix.
TIP
Even if a default suffix has been set, it can be ignored and the desired suffix can be entered
by specifying the suffix during direct entry.
6-41
DISPLAY
7,3
6-3 CPU System Setting
Set various parameters of CPU unit.

For display method of "CPU system settings" dialog box, please see
"Display CPU System
Setting", (Page 6-27)

Note
CPU system setting. It is valid only when the models "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV1000" are selected.
Program Settings
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Here, the global program setting operations such as module execution sequence and scanning time
DISPLAY
will be introduced.
Execution sequence of modules setting

To set up module execution sequence, select " Execution sequence of modules" on the left side of the"
CPU system settings ".
For display method from menu, please see
"Module Execution Sequence Setting", (Page 7-6).
Operation serial No. can be set in case of multiple modules. The module operates in turn according to the
No. sequence preset.
Item
No.
Explanation
Module execution sequence.
Module name
The name of every module registered to the project. (hide fixed cycle module)
Type
Display module type.
Disable
Select checkbox, disable the module.

The disabled module can not be executed.
Up
Move up module execution serial number.
Down
Move down module execution serial number.
Note
Initialize module cannot be moved to below every scanning module and standby module.
Fixed cycle module is displayed on the uppermost part.
6-42
Fixed period execute and user interrupt setting

During fixed cycle operation and user interrupt setting, select " fixed period execute and user interrupt
setting " in left side window of "CPU system setting" dialog box.
Note
"Fixed period execute and user interrupt settings" can be selected, only when the
models are "KV-5000", "KV-3000".
6
DISPLAY
Settings of fixed period module

Set fixed period module.
For details of fixed period module,
please see "KV-5000 / 3000 series user manual" 3-8 module "".
Item
Period
Explanation
Set cycle time of fixed period module.
After selecting checkbox, during operation of CPU unit, fixed cycle
When operation begins set to
module will be set to operation status.
executing state
Cancel checkbox, fixed cycle module operates via MDSTRT

command.
6-43
Set interruption priority

Set priority when multiple interrupts occur.
For interrupt function details, please see
"KV-5000 / 3000 series user manual" 3-5 Interrupt "".
Item
Item
Explanation
Items that can be interrupt processed.
Set priority in all interrupted projects.
Priority
Priority can be divided into three levels, " high " means the highest priority and
"low" means the lowerest priority.
*If the priority is the same, the interrupt priority is as follows:
Priority: high
DISPLAY
Priority: low
Fixed period module

Input 0
INT R000
Input 1
INT R001
Input 2
INT R002
Input 3
INT R003
Input 4
INT R004
Input 5
INT R005
Input 6
INT R006
Input 7
INT R007
Input 8
INT R008
Input 9
INT R009
High-speed counter comparer * 0
INT CTC0
INT CTC1
INT CTC2
INT CTC3
Positioning Xaxis
INT CR3013
Positioning Yaxis
INT CR3113
Whole setting of fixed period module and interrupt priority

Item
After selecting checkbox, even if commands of other modules are operated,
instruction excution
break processing will also occur, operate fixed cycle module.
Save and restore Z1 to
When the check box is selected, the index register Z1~Z10 is automatically
Z10 when interrupt starts
stored in the memory upon interrupt initiation. After break program ends, the
and ends
value of index registers saved in working memory will be restored to Z1 to Z10 .
Initialize
6-44
Explanation
Enable interrupt in
Click "initialize" button, restore all projects in "fixed period operation and user
interrupt setting" image to initial (default) status.
Scan time related setting

To set related scan time, select" scan time related settings" in left window of the "CPU system setting"
dialog box.
For scan time details, please see
"KV-5000 / 3000 series user manual" 3-4 program configuration
and operation "".
6
DISPLAY
Item
Explanation
After selecting checkbox, operate fixed scanning time. Please set the
Fixed scan time operation
setting value of scan time as per 100us .

After checking "enable END processing time setting", changes to grey
display, cannot be set.
Set fixed scanning time.
Scan time setting
Setting value shall be set to a value greater than actual scanning time.
If less than actual scanning time, it cannot be operated within fixed
scanning time.
After selecting checkbox, END processing time setting changes to enabled.
Enable END processing time
Please set the setting value of END processing time using 100s.
After checking "enable END processing time setting", changes to grey
display, cannot be set.
END processing time

setting
Set END processing time to any time.

It is set in case of larger change in scanning time due to the factors other
than Ladder record processing and communication processing.
For details of END processing time, please see
"KV-5000 / 3000 series user manual "3- program
composition and action "".
TIP
When the model is KV-1000, conduct combination setting of MEMSW command and CM
(control memory). For details, please see
" KV-5000 / 3000 / 1000 series command
reference manual".
6-45
Protection setting
For protection setting, select "protection setting" in the window on left side of "CPU system setting" dialog box.
6
DISPLAY
Item
Explanation
Add write protection for
After selecting checkbox, write protection is adopted for Ladder stored in
programs in CPU
CPU (fail to be written).
Add read protection for
After selecting checkbox, read protection is adopted for Ladder stored in
programs in CPU
CPU (fail to be read).
TIP
When the model is KV-1000, set using MEMSW instruction.

6-46
" KV-5000 / 3000 / 1000 series instruction reference manual".
System Setting
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Here, the global program setting operations such as local device assignment and power-off hold will be
introduced.
Entire assignment of local device

During entire assignment of local device, select " entire assignment of local device" in the window on
the left side of "CPU system setting" dialog box.
"Entire Assignments of Local Devices Setting", (Page
For detail of Local Device, please see
"KV-5000 / 3000 series user manual" 3-10 Local Device "".
When support model is KV-5000 / 3000

6
6-47
DISPLAY
8-6)
Setup local device assignment

No.
Item
Explanation
Indicates the number of Local Devices preset of every device.
It can also be
Local device
set.
reserved quantity
The number of Local Device reserved refers to the number of all Local
Devices.
Global device range
Indicates the range that global device can be used, which is adjusted
according to the reserved number of local devices.
Assignment status of every device is displayed via diagram. The number of
Display configration
devices specified with Local device
ratio
reserved quantity is displayed as "used local devices" + "unused local

devices".
DISPLAY
Indicates total number of devices.

4
Total
Total number= the number of global devices + the number of Local Device
preset + the number of preset system devices
Initialize
"Setup workarea"
Click "initialize" button, restore the number of Local Devices retained to initial
value (default).
Display "Workspace setting" dialog box.
"Workspace setting", (Page 6-49)
Display local assignment

No.
Item
Explanation
Indicates the number of Local Device assignable in project.
Assignable quantity
This is set up from the "Local device
Quantity used
Indicates total number of modules / macros.
reserved quantity" option.
Residual quantity
6-48
Display module/
macro type device
Indicates the number of surplus Local Devices that can be used.

" the number of residual"=" the number of usable-" the number of used "
Display assignment status of Local Device of every module / macro.
"Setup module/macro device", (Page 6-51)When dechecking " automatic "
checkbox, can execute assignment setting.
Workspace setting
6
DISPLAY
No.
Item
Number of work
area for script text

string
Possible quantity
used
Quantity used
Residual quantity
Explanation
Set number of workspace for script processing character string function.
Display local work used for words of local workspace.
Display available number of local workspace in the project.
Display total used number of local work for each module/macro.
Display residual available number in local work.
Display module/
Display local work distribution condition of each module/macro.
macro type device
After remove automatic check box, set the number of local work to be used.
6-49
When support model is KV-1000

4
6
DISPLAY
7
Setup global/local/script assignment

No.
1
2
4
5
6
Item
Explanation
Local reserved
Indicates the number of Local Devices preset of every device.
quantity
The number of local preset refers to the number of Local Devices of whole project.
Global device range

Display configration
ratio
Indicates the range that global device can be used, which is adjusted according to the
reserved number of local devices.
Assignment status of every device is displayed via diagram. The number of
devices specified with Local device
reserved quantity is displayed as "used local devices" + "unused local devices".
Indicates total number of devices.
Total
Total numbers= the number of global devices + the number of Local Device preset + the number of preset system devices
Script reserved
quantity
Initialize
Indicates the number of script work devices preset.
It can also be set.
Click "initialize" button, restore the number of Local Devices retained to initial value (default).

No.
Item
Explanation
Indicates the number of Local Device assignable in project.
Assignable quantity
This is set up from the "Local device
Quantity used
Indicates total number of modules / macros.
reserved quantity" option.
Residual quantity
6-50
Display module/
macro typt device
Indicates the number of surplus Local Devices that can be used.

Display assignment status of Local Device of every module / macro.
"Setup module/macro device", (Page 6-51)When dechecking " automatic "
checkbox, can execute assignment setting.
Setup module/macro device

To set up a different module/macro device, select the "Set module/macro type device" option from the left
side in the "CPU system setting" dialog box.
"Local Devices by Module/macro Setting", (Page 8-6).
6
DISPLAY
Item
Select module/macro
Explanation
Select module/macro
After selecting checkbox, the selected device will be automatically assigned.
Automatic
The number of valid devices automatically assigned fails to be set. After

clicking "auto", testing of all devices can be ON/ OFF.
Quantity
Initialize
Set the number of Local Devices used in every module / macro.

It cannot be set when checkbox is automatically changed to ON.
Clicking the "Initialize" button, the number is restored to the initial value
(default).
For detail of Local Device, please see
"KV-5000 / 3000 series user manual" 3-10 Local Device "".
6-51
CPU unit buffer capacity setting

When setting buffer capacity of CPU unit, select "CPU unit buffer capacity" in the window on left side of
the "CPU system setting" dialog box.
For details of CPU unit buffer, please see
"KV-5000 / 3000 series User's Manual" 2-3 logging /
tracing "".
6
DISPLAY
Item
Explanation
Total
Display total buffer capacity of CPU unit.
Free
Display residual buffer capacity in current setting.
ID
ID No. of logging / tracing.
CapacitykB
Number of sampling
According to ID No., set buffer capacity used in logging / tracing.
consumption per sampling
Display the number of logging / tracing samples.

Display module buffer capacity occupied by every sample of logging /
tracing in byte.
For logging / tracing details, please see
"KV-5000 / 3000 series User's Manual" 2-3 logging /
tracing "".
TIP
6-52
When selecting KV-1000, CPU unit buffer capacity cannot be set.
Power OFF hold setting

To set power off holding, select" power off holding setting" in left window of the "CPU system setting"
dialog box.
For power off holding details, please see
KV-5000 / 3000 series user manual, "3-6 device and constant".
6
DISPLAY
Item
Explanation
setting power off holding * 1 .
Select device
Select device
Range
Display possible range setting.

Select hold or clear.
Setting
Holdduring power OFF, hold current value of the device within the range (status).
Clear: during power OFF, clear current value of the device within the range (status).
*1The devices for which power off holding can be set are as follows.
Device name
Range
R(Relay)
R1000 to R99915
BLink relay
DM (data memory)
DM0 to DM65534
B00 to B3FFF
EM0 to EM65534
EMExtended data memory
ZF (File Register: consecutive number ZF0 to ZF32766
method)
WLink register
C (counter)/
W0 to W3FFF
C0 to C3999/
CTC (high-speed counter comparator) CTC0 to CTC3
Warning
Please set power off holding against the relay assigned to IO module and
specific module. So, the program cannot normally work sometimes.
TIP
When the model is KV-1000, set using MEMSW command.

" KV-5000 / 3000 / 1000 series command reference manual".
6-53
Action when error occurs

To set up the action taken in case of error, select the "Action when error occurs" option from the left
6
DISPLAY
side in the "CPU system setting" dialog box.
Item
Error
Explanation
Display CPU unit registration error.
Select CPU action during CPU unit occur.
Stop (alarm): process as alarm, stop CPU operation.
CPU operation
Continue (warning): process as warning, do not stop CPU operation,

continue working.
* the project whose background becomes grey, cannot be changed.
Stored in error log

(Default setting)
After selecting checkbox, error status will be written into error record.
* the project whose background becomes grey, cannot be changed.
Click "initial setting" button, restore the project set to initial value (default).
Eliminate CPU error when power After selecting checkbox, when power is turned on or CPU operation
ON or PROG->RUN
TIP
mode is switched from PROG to RUN, CPU error will be removed.
reference manual".
6-54
Upper limit of digital trimmer

To set upper limit value of digital trimmer, select " upper limit setting of digital trimmer" in the left window
of the " CPU system setting " dialog box.
For details of digital trimmer, please see
"KV-5000 / 3000 series user manual" 2-1 Access
Window.
6
DISPLAY
Item
Explanation
After selecting checkbox, upper limit value setting of digital trimmer is
Enable upper limit of digital
enabled.
timer
Cancel checkbox, upper limit value setting of digital trimmer becomes grey,
Trimmer No.
Trimmer condenser No. with upper limit value setting.
cannot be set.
Upper limit value setting
TIP
Set upper limit value of digital trimmer of trimmer condenser No.

Setting range 0 to 4294967295
reference manual".
6-55
MEMO
6
DISPLAY
6-56
7
MODULE/MACRO
The chapter describes function and operation of module / macro.
MODULE/MACRO
7-1
About Module/Macro 7-2
7-1
7-1 About Module/Macro

This chapter describes how to use the Module/Macro menu on KV STUDIO.
For more information about the module/macro concept, please refer to the
KV-5000/3000Series
Programming Manual.
Create New Module
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Modules/macros(M)
Select "Modules/macros(M)"
New module(G)
"New module(G)" from the menu.
The [New module] dialog box is displayed.
Other procedure
MODULE/MACRO
Select New module (M) from the menu that appears by right-clicking the workspace.
Enter the name of the new module you are about to make, select the type of module and click the
"OK" button.
A new module of the type that you set is displayed on the currently open workspace.
Item
Module name
Module type
Explanation
Enter the name of the new module that you are about to
make using up to 24 1-byte or 12 2-byte characters.
Select the module type from "Every-scan module/
Initialization module/Standby module/fixed cycle module*".
Auto-assign local
If selecting the checkbox, the Local Device of the
devices
module created newly will be automatically assigned.
* when the model is KV- 1000, cannot select.
TIP
Create New Macro
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Modules/macros(M)
New macro(M)
"New macro(M)" from the menu.
The "New macro" dialog box is displayed.

Other procedure
Select "Edit macro(M)"
"New macro(N)" from the menu that appears by right-clicking
the workspace.
Select"New macro(R)" from the menu that appears by right-clicking the workspace.
7-2
Enter the name of the new macro you are about to make, select the type of macro and click the
"OK" button.
This makes the new macro.
Item
Explanation
Enter the name of the new macro that you are
Macro name
about to make using up to 12 1-byte or six 2-byte

characters.
From "Sub-routine Type macro / Self-hold type
Macro type
TIP
macro", select macro type.
Auto-assign local
After selected, Local Device of new macro is
devices
automatically assigned.
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Modules/macros(M)
Open module/macro(E)
Select the module/macro to open or close on the workspace. Select "Modules/macros(M)"
"Open
module/macro(E)"/"Close module/macro(L)" from the menu.

Select "Open module/macro (O)" from the menu that appears by right-clicking the workspace.
Other procedure
Double-click the module/macro to open on the workspace.
Close Module/macro
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Module/macro(M)
Close module/macro(L) Ctrl + F4
In workspace, select the module / macro to be closed, From the menu, select "module / macro (M)"
"close module / macro (L)".
Delete Module/macro
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Modules/macros(M)
Delete module/macro(D)
Select the module/macro to delete on the workspace. Select "Modules/macros(M)"
"Delete
module/macro(D)" from the menu.

Other procedure
Select Delete module/macro (D) from the menu that appears by right-clicking the workspace.
Select the module/macro to delete on the workspace and press the Delete key.
7-3
MODULE/MACRO
Open Module/macro
Module/macro Property
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Modules/macros(M)
Module/macro property(H)
Select the module/macro whose property are to be displayed on the workspace. Select "Modules/
macros(M)"
"Module/macro property(H)" from the menu.
The "Module/macro properties" dialog box is displayed.

Macro
Module
7
MODULE/MACRO
Item
Module/macro name
Module/macro type
Explanation
Display module/macro name.The name of the module or macro can be
changed in this field.
Display module/macro type.The type of the module or macro can be changed
in this field.
Date created
Displays the date when the module/macro was created.
Date updated
Displays the date that the module/macro was last updated.
Date transfered
Displays the date that the module/macro was last transferred to the CPU.
Date registered
Displays that date that the module/macro was registered to the project.
Comment
Enter the comment here.
Set password
Sets a password to the macro.
Disable module/macro
TIP
When this checkbox is marked, the currently selected module or macro is

disabled. Disabled modules or macros are not transferred to the CPU.
Macro property is only displayed when "KV-5000", "KV-3000" or "KV-1000" is selected.
Setting a password to a macro

Passwords can be set to macros. Limit the number of characters to six 1-byte characters.
TIP
Note
It is valid only when the models "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" are selected.
Once you have set a password, make a note of it and keep it in a safe place. If you
lose a password, you can no longer open the macro to which the password is set.
7-4
Macro Argument Settings
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Modules/macros(M)
From the menu, select "module / macro (M)"
Macro argument settings(Z)
"macro argument setting (Z)", set operand No. etc.,
supporting macro operating instruction in "macro argument setting" dialog box.
7
MODULE/MACRO
Item
Explanation
Specify argument setting macro. The macro registered to the currently editd
Macro name
project will be displayed on the dropdown menu.

Read argument message of the specified macro from Ladder.
Move up the selected argument display sequance number by 1.
Move down the selected argument display sequance number by 1.
Delete the selected argument.
Delete all unused arguments.
Create cross reference to the argument selected.
No.
Display macro argument No..
Argument
Display argument device used in macro.
Macro template
display
Title
Setting range: maximal 12 half-width characters
Operand
Enter an explanation of the operand in the macro palette.
description
Setting range: maximal 24 half-width characters
Display format/Unit type

Use status in Ladder
TIP
Enter title of argument
In the case of UR/UM, enter the type of unit, and in the case of P/V, enter the
view mode on Editor.
Use "used / unused" form to display application status of every variable in
Ladder.
Ladder can be edited when "macro argument setting" dialog box is displayed.
Content feedback to "Instruction/macro pack pallet" setting. For macro pallet details,
please see
Note
"Macro pallet", (Page 6-15).
2 arguments are used when argument unit specified.

2 arguments can also be used when unit device relay or DM is separately used as
argument device.
7-5
Convert Unit Devices
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Modules/macros(M)
Convert unit device(Q)
"Convert unit device(Q)" from the menu. Arguments currently used in
macros are converted to unit devices.

Arguments currently used in macros are converted to unit devices.
Other procedure
Select "Edit macro(M)"
"Convert unit devices(Q)" from the menu that appears by right-
clicking the workspace.
For a detailed explanation on arguments and unit devices,
KV-5000/3000 Series Programming
Manual "3-2 Before You Start Using Macros" - "Argument Devices."
MODULE/MACRO
Module Execution Sequence Setting
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Module / macro (M)

From the menu, select "module / macro (M)"
Setup module execution sequence(V)
"Setup module execution sequence(V)" to set up
operation sequence of module in setting project.

For more information, please see
7-6
"Execution sequence of modules setting", (Page 6-42).
8
CONVERT
The chapter describes various conversion functions and application methods.
CONVERT
8-1
About Conversion Functions 8-2
8-1
8-1 About Conversion Functions

This section describes each of the functions contained in the {Convert(A)} menu.
Conversion
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Convert(A)
Convert(C). Ctrl + F9
Programs made using Editor cannot be transferred as they are to the PLC.
To transfer a ladder program to PLC, the program must be converted to machine code.
TIP
When you select, "Monitor/Simulator(N)"
"Convert Transfer
Monitor(C)", the ladder
program is converted to machine code and transferred to PLC without having to instruct
conversion.
Select "Convert(A)"
"Convert(C)" from the menu.
The ladder program is converted, and the confirmation message is displayed.
CONVERT
KV-5000/3000
When conversion ends successfully, the amount of memory that the converted ladder program will take
up on PLC memory is displayed.
Program size Amount of memory used when the entire program including rung
comments is transferred to the unit
Object size. Amount of memory used when the ladder program excluding
rung comments is converted to a format that can be executed on
the unit.
TIP
When an error occurs during conversion, the message "Conversion failed." is displayed. The
details of the error can be confirmed on the output window.
"Output Window", (Page6-12)
8-2
Converting Individual Modules and Macros

Convert(A)
Select "Convert(A)"
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Convert individual modules/macros(M) Ctrl + F10
"Convert individual modules/macros(M)" from the menu. The ladder program is
converted, and the confirmation message is displayed.

Only active modules/macros are converted.
TIP
When an error occurs during conversion, the message "Specified module/macros convertion
fails" is displayed. The details of the error can be confirmed on the output window.
"Output Window", (Page6-12)
CONVERT
Check Device Confliction
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Covert (A)
On the menu, select "convert (A)"
Check device confliction(B)
"Check device confliction(B)", switch race contention of testing
device checking Ladder conversion.

With check mark: when: uncheck device confliction
With check mark: when: check device confliction
Device confliction
The race contention condition refers to the possibility for an instrution to use a device when same
devcie is used (rewritten) by multiple instructions.
Example
When next ladder program is written, DM3102/DM3103 will use race contention.
8-3
MR1000
FMOV
DM1000
MR1001
DM3000
#1000
(1)
MOV.D
#12345678
DM3102
(2)
Transfer target
(1) FMOV Operation
: DM3000
123
: DM3001
123
: DM3101
123
: DM3102
123
: DM3103
123
: DM3104
123
: DM3998
123
: DM3999
123
Transfer source
DM1000:
Store #123
123
16-bit
(1 word)
16-bit
(1 word)
Conflict
8
CONVERT
2MOV.D Operation
Transfer source
High bit
Transfer target
Low bit
12345678
DM3103
DM3102
12345678
123
32-bit
(2 word)
Note
Checking device confliction cannot be made for the device modified by index
registers and the command of the number of device cannot be specialized.
Clear Invalid Operands
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Convert(A)
Clear invalid operands(I)
Invalid operands are sometimes generated when a unit setup is changed after the ladder program is made.
Select "Convert(A)"
TIP
"Clear invalid operands(I)" from the menu. The confirmation message is displayed.
Invalid operands
When the Expansion Unit is in used, relays/DM are assigned from Unit Editor. The unit setup is
linked with the ladder program, and relays/DM Nos. on the ladder program are changed in an
interlocked manner with changes to the unit setup information. However, when a unit that is
assigned relays/DMs is deleted, the relays/DMs that were assigned to that unit will exist on the
ladder program even though that unit no longer exists.Relays/DMs whose association with a
unit has been discontinued in this way are called "invalid operands."
Ladder programs are not converted successfully when they contain invalid operands. To
delete invalid operands, either delete the invalid operands by the "invalid operand clear
function," or check and re-input each individual invalid operand.
Can search invalid operand using search function.
"Search Device", (Page5-6)
8-4
Duplicate Coil Check
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Convert(A)
Select "Convert(A)"
Duplicate coil check(D)
"Duplicate coil check(D)" from the menu. test the Duplicate coil position in
Ladder.
TIP
The position where two-way coil exists, error prompt will not occur during conversion.
When multiple OUT, OUB, DIFU, and DIFD instructions are used on the same output
relay, the last programmed instruction is given priority and output. (In both of the following
examples, output R00500 does not turn ON even if input relay R00000 turns ON.)
Ladder checked by the duplicate coil check
Ladder not checked by the duplicate coil check
R500
R000
R500
SET
R001
R500
R001
R500
8
CONVERT
R000
Duplicate coil locations are checked, and the results of the check are displayed on the
output window.
Note
The duplicate coil check is judged by four instructions: OUT, OUB, DIFU, and DIFD.
Even if an error is not discovered by the duplicate coil check, some ladder
programs function as if a duplicate coil has been programmed.
After global device is used by output relay in macro, when macro is called for many
times, two-way coil error will appear.
8-5
Local Devices by Module/macro Setting

"Convert(A)"
On the menu, select "convert (A)"
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Set local devices by module/macro(S)"
"Set local device by module / macro(s)", set the number of Local
Devices applied to every module / macro.

For detailed setting of different modules/ macros, please see
"Setup module/macro device",
(Page6-51).
For details of Local Device, please see
KV-5000/3000 series User's Manual "3-10 Local device".
Entire Assignments of Local Devices Setting
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
8
Convert(A)
CONVERT
On the menu, select "conversion (A)"
Set entire assignments of local devices(A)
"Set entire assignments of local devices(A)", set the number
of Local Device used in whole projects.

For detailed assignment setting of whole Local Device, please see
"Entire assignment of local
device", (Page6-47).
For details of Local Device, please see
8-6
KV-5000/3000 series User's Manual "3-10 Local device".
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
The chapter describes function and application method of monitor/ simulator.
About Monitor/Simulator Functions 9-2
9-2
Monitoring Function 9-34
9-3
Registration Monitor 9-41
9-4
Batch Monitor 9-46
9-5
Customize Monitoring 9-49
9-6
9-7
High-speed Time Chart Monitor 9-73
9-8
UNIT MONITOR 9-81
9-9
Batch Change 9-83
MONITOR AND SIMULATOR
9-1
9-10 Online Edit Function 9-92

9-11 Simulator Functions 9-96
9-1
9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

This section describes the functions in the "Monitor/Simulator(N)" menu.
Preparation Before Monitoring

Please prepare the following items in advance.
USB port
USB cable specification: OP-35331
KV-5000/3000/1000/700
OP-35331
(Cable length 3m)
To USB connector
PC
KV STUDIO Ver.5
To USB connector
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Note
The special cables (OP-35331) must be used.Otherwise, it will not function correctly.
KV STUDIO must be installed before KV-5000/3000/1000/700 connected to PC USB port.
"1-4 Software Installation", Page 1-9
When the KV-5000/3000/1000/700 PLC is connected to the PC for the first time, the
USB driver of KV-5000/3000/1000/700must be installed on the PC.
"1-5 USB Driver Installation", Page 1-11
Connecting Ethernet port

PC
KV STUDIO Ver.5
KV-5000/3000/1000/700
HUB
STP/UTP direct cable
Note
STP/UTP direct cable
When connecting Ethernet using 10BASE-T, please use CAT3 above STP/UTP cables.
When connecting Ethernet using 100BASE-TX, please use CAT5 above STP/UTP cables.
Ethernet connection of PLC can be set using the access window.
Please use STP/UTP cross cable when connecting the PLC to a PC directly.
9-2
Connection with D-Sub 9-pin serial port

Connection cable specification: OP-26487
D-sub 9-pin style conversion connector specification OP-26486
KV-5000/3000/1000/700/10(16)/24(40)/P16
OP-26486
To D-SUB 9-pin
serial port
RD
SD
3
5
SG
PC Side
3 SD
2 RD
4 DR
6 ER
7 RS
8 CS
5 SG
Dedicated connector
9-pin D-SUB connector
Wrong connection to printer port of PC may damage PC or PLC. Special

attention should be paid.
Note
Please use the specified cables (OP-26487, OP-26486).Otherwise, it will not function
correctly.
Returning to Editor
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Monitor/Simulator(N)"
"Return to Editor(X)" Ctrl + F1
"Return to Editor(X)" from the menu.
The current state (Editor, Monitor, Simulator, online editor) is displayed on the
KV STUDIO title bar.
You can also return to Editor directly from mode bar.
9-3
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
KV side pin No.
Caution
PC
KV STUDIO Ver.4
OP-26487
(cable length: 2.5m)
KV side
To modular connector
Communication Setting
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
To perform CPU unit and PLC communication setting.
Communication setting
"Setup communication(T)"
"Setup communication(C)"
Various communication methods can be set.

"Setup communication(C)"
Communication
detailed setting
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Item
PC communication port
USB*1
Serial
*2
Description
To select the communication port on PLC used in PLC communication.
Selected by default when USB connection is used.
Selected when RS-232C connection is used.
Selected when the connection destination is KV-3000/1000/700 or KV-L20V, etc.
Selected when Ethernet connection is used.
Ethernet*1
Selected when the connection destination is the built-in Ethernet port of KV-5000
Modem
Selected during communication with remote KV-5000/3000/1000/700 via modem.
and KV-LE20V.
(Communication
detailed setting)
Routing setting
(Detailed setting)
Destination
Add to destinations
list
9-4
The displayed contents vary with different communication ports selected.

Selected when connecting through the VT3/VT2 series connected to PLC and FLnet instead of directly connecting PLC to PC.
Enabled when the "Routing setting" checkbox is selected.
"Routing detailed setting" dialog box is displayed.
A pull-down menu pops up when this button is clicked.
To add the connection destination to the connection destination list file.
Open destinations
To open the connection destination list file. When the file does not exist, a
list
connection destination file can be created.
*1
It cannot be connected in the case of KV-P16 and KV-10/16/24/40.
*2
Connected using KV-L20V in the case of KV-5000.
USB connection
USB is used to connect PLC to PC.
Select "USB" radio button in "PLC side communication port".No detailed setup is required.
Note
USB hub cannot be used.

USB connection cannot be used for KV-10(16), 0KV-24(40) and KV-P16.
Serial connection
RS-232C is used to connect PLC to PC.
Select "Serial" radio button in "PLC side communication port".
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Item
Description
To select the COM port for the connection cable. The default value is "COM1". COM
COM port
interface is serial interface, can RS-232C interface can be adopted for communication;
The COM port No. that will be displayed according to the PC model used.
To select baud rate. The selection items and default values of baud rate are shown as
follows.
Model
Baud rate
Unit No.
KV-5000*,
KV-3000, KV-1000
KV-700, KV-24 (40)
KV-10 (16), KV-P16
Selection range
9600, 19200, 38400, 57600,
115200
9600, 19200, 38400,
57600
Default
115200
57600
Unit No. setting dialog box will be displayed when unit No. setting button is clicked.
*Serial communication unit KV- L20V is required when KV-5000 connected by serial connection.
Note
If the selected COM port is not displayed in the "Serial

port (COM) setting" dialog box, or the number of COM
ports displayed is less than the number of actual COM
ports, then Windows cannot correctly identify COM
port. Please set up correctly so as to be able to COM
port. Please refer to the User's Manual of PC or contact PC dealer.
9-5
Unit No. setting

Using KV STUDIO, you can specify multiple KV-L20V/R station Nos in multi-station configuration, and
using 1 PC, you can transfer a ladder program to multiple KV-5000/3000/1000/700 PLCs and to
monitor.
Note
Not displayed then the supported models KV-10 (16), KV-24 (40) and KV-P16 are selected.
Unit No. can be set when monitor is stopped (communication not in progress).
Station No.
F (when use port 1)

O (when use port 2)
KV STUDIO
KV-U7
CC
24V OUT
24VDC
1.8A
0V
N
INPUT
100-240VAC
50/60Hz
0.98A
Port 2: RS-422A
RC-232C/RS-422A converter
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Item
Set unit No.
TIP
Description
Sets the unit No. of communication destination KV-L20V.
Unit No. refers to the No. set in KV-L20 V unit setup window in Unit Editor.
"KV-L20V User's Manual"
"Chapter 3 Overview"
Note
In "Unit No." setting, the unit No. can be specified to O-F. In Unit Editor, however, only
0 to 9 can be set.
If an unit is used in direct-connect mode, then the unit No. will be set to A.
9-6
Ethernet connection
Ethernet is used to connect PLC to PC.
Select "Ethernet" radio button in "PLC side communication port".
Item
Description
Enters the IP address for connecting KV-5000/3000/1000/700 PLC.
(Search
Searches for the KV-5000/3000/1000/700 connected to Ethernet.
destination)
Port No.
Enters the port No. for connecting KV-5000/3000/1000/700 PLC.
(Connection
Sends a Ping instruction to the port No. to which an IP address has been entered, and tests the
test)
connection status.
TIP
Through connection destination editing, you can select the registered connection
destination from the menu.
When KV-3000/1000/700 is connected using Ethernet, KV-LE20V is required addionally.
Note
It can be set when monitor is stopped (communication not in progress). Ethernet

detailed setup cannot be performed when monitoring is in progress (in
communication).
Ethernet connection is not possible for KV-10(16), KV-24(40) and KV-P16.
9-7
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
IP Address
Searching connection destination

Connection destination of Ethernet communication will be searched.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Item
Ethernet adapter list
Adapter
Displays Ethernet port. When multiple ports exist, please select the Ethernet port
to be used from the pull-down menu.
IP Address
Displays IP address setting of PLC.
Subnet Mask
Displays subnet mask setting of PLC.
Port No.
Specifies port No. of KV-5000/3000/1000/700 PLC.
(Execute)
Searches KV-5000/3000 connected by Ethernet.
(Stop)
Clicked when search is to be stopped.
Result
Displays search result in a list, and the PLC that is connected can be confirmed.
IP Address
Connected unit
type
Project name
(Select)
9-8
Description
Searches the setting related to PLC Ethernet port.
Displays IP address of KV-5000/3000/1000/700 PLC.

Displays PLC's model name (anyone of KV-5000/3000/1000/700).
Displays the project name stored in PLC.
Clicked when the PLC to communicate with from the search result is selected.
The "Communication setting" dialog box will display IP address and port No.
Connection test
For the KV-5000/3000/1000/700 whose IP address and port No. have been specified, ing" and"
Tracert" can be used to test whether the connection destination is in normal operation.
The functions of the Ping and Tracert instructions executed via "Communication test" dialog box are the
same as that of the Ping and Tracert instructions executed in MS-DOS program.
Ping:
It means that IP data packet is sent to the specified IP address, and is returned by the
connected party normally. In addition, since time is required for response of Ping
instruction, and loss factor of data packet is also displayed, so connection speed can be
predicted from the result.
Tracert:
Displays the routing between hosts. The routing status from host to connected router will
be verified, and routing bottleneck can be found according to the response time of each
router.
Execute Ping instruction for connection.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Display the execution result of Ping or Tracert.
Execute Tracert instruction for connection.
Modem communication
In modem mode, remote KV-5000/3000/1000/700 can be monitored.
Serial Communication Unit KV-L20V User's Manual
Note
Modem communication can not be used for KV-10(16), KV-24(40) and KV-P16.
Modem transmission mode overview

In modem mode, PLC can be monitored through telephone lines using a modem.
To use modem communication, the modem should be connected to the PC installed with KV STUDIO;
PLC should also be connected to serial communication unit KV-L20V and modem.
Serial Communication Unit KV-L20V User's Manual
CPU unit
PC
KV STUDIO
KV-U7
Telephone line
CC
24V OUT
24VDC
1.8A
0V
Modem
N
INPUT
Modem
100-240VAC
50/60Hz
0.98A
KV-U7 KV-5000/3000/
1000/700
KV-L20V
9-9
Modem Initialization
To communicate, you should first set the initialization instruction of modem and type of the telephone
line.
The should be set in "PC modem setting" and "KV-L20V/R modem setting" separately.
PC modem setting
Click the "PC modem setting button in the "Communication setting" dialog box.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Item
Description
Select modem model.
When registering a new initialization instruction, enter the initialization
Model
Modem
instruction, and click the "Register" button.

If a modem is already registered, please select the modem that is connected.
To delete a registered modem, select the modem to be deleted, and click
setting
the "Delete" button.

Initialization
Enters the modem initialization instruction. The initialization instruction
command
varies with the type of modem.
Register
Registers the input model and initialization instruction.
Delete
Deletes the selected model and initialization instruction.

"Pulse/Dial (pulse/tone)" can be selected for telephone line type.
Telephone line
Pulse: To select pulse mode and ignore tone mode.

Tone: To select dial line and ignore pulse.
Outside
line dial
Outside line
Select outside line dialing through "Yes/No".
Number for
When outside line is used, a number should be appended to the number for
external dialing
outside line dialing.
Modem
connection Dial wait time
setting
COM port
Baud rate
Note
When dial connection is used, a wait time (0 to 120 seconds) should be set.
Default is 60 seconds.
Sets communication interface No.
Sets the communication speed for communicating with the modem. 9600, 38400,
57600 and 115200 can be selected. The default is "38400".
If the response time of the other party's modem is too long, but the dial wait time set
is too short, then wire-break will occur sometimes. Long wait time must be set
according to the response time of modem.
9-10
TIP
About initialization command

The AT command can be used to control operation of the modem. All AT command are
entered with a prefix "AT".
KV STUDID and the KV-L20V use AT command to control a modem.
When using a modem, you can set it to correctly communicate with the other party's
modem using the AT command. This setting is called an "initialization command". The
initialization command varies with the modem settings.
About the initialization command setting
Initialization command have been pre-registered for the following models. To set the
initialization command, you can simply select the model name from the "Models" pulldown menu.
Type
Box PLC
Card PLC
Vendor
Model
KV-L20V side
PC side
AIWA
PV-BW5610
I/O Data Devices
DFML-560E(MR)
OMRON
ME5614D(2)
Melco
IGM-B56KH
AIWA
PV-JF56E6
OMRON
ME5614C/W
registered through the following procedure.

Enter the "AT&F" command for returning the modem to its defaults, then check the details that
are different from the factory defaults, and enter the initialization command. Several initialization
command can be specified through entering desired command continuously.
Default settings "Echoback OFF", "CD normal ON", "Dial tone detection ON" are used in the
following example.
AT&FE0&C1X3
Busy tone
Turn on CD only when the carrier is detected.
Echoback OFF
Restore default setting
General AT command
AT command vary with types of modem sometimes. Be sure to check the AT command
listed in the User's Manual of the modem you are using.
AT command
E0
Description
Echoback OFF
Q0
Returns result code.
V1
Returns result code in English words.
&C1
Turns CD ON only when the carrier is detected.
&S0
DR normal ON.
&D2
Disconnect the line when ER changes ON -> OFF.
Q3
N3
Sets to the auto-search mode.
X3
Detects busy tone (not dial detection)
Performs flow control through RC-CS
J0
Sets to fixed terminal speed.
S0=2
Automatic message receiving after 2 calls
%C3
Automatically selects MNP Class 5, V.42bis.
9-11
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Initialization command should be registered for the models that not registered. It can be
To set up KV-L20V/R modem setting

Note
Please confirm the state when monitor is stopped (non-communication state).
Click "KV-L20V/R modem setting" button in the "Communication setting" dialog box.
Item
Description
Select modem model.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
When registering a new initialization command, enter the initialization

Model
Modem
command, and click the "Register" button.

If a modem is already registered, please select the modem that is connected.
To delete a registered modem, select the modem to be deleted, and click
setting
the "Delete" button.

Initialization
Enters the modem initialization command. The initialization command varies
command
with the type of modem.
(Register)
Registers the input model and initialization command.
(Delete)
Deletes the selected model and initialization command.

"Pulse/Dial (pulse/tone)" can be selected for telephone line type.
Telephone line
Pulse: To select pulse mode and ignore tone mode.

Tone: To select dial line and ignore pulse.
Outside
line dial
Outside line
Number for outside When outside line is used, a number should be appended to the number for
line dialing
Modem
connection Dial wait time
setting
COM port
outside dialing.
When dial connection is used, a wait time (0 to 120 seconds) should be set.
Default is 60 seconds.
Sets communication interface No.
(Transfer to KV-L20V/R)
Note
Select outside line dialing through "Yes/No".
Transfers the settings to KV-L20V/R.

After setup, you must transfer the setting to KV- L20V/R.
The setting of serial communication unit KV-L20V is actually stored in KV-5000/3000/

1000/700 PLC. If the preset combination of KV-L20V/R and KV-5000/3000/1000/700
PLC has been changed, then the modem on KV-L20V/R side must be set again.
9-12
Communication with modem mode

If the PLC is to be monitored remotely via telephone line, then modem mode should be set, and the
modem connected with the other party should be in telephone communication state.
Be sure to select the "modem" radio button on the "PLC side communication port" tab in the
"Communication setting" dialog box.
Note
If modem communication mode is used, then the modem is connected to the serial communication
unit KV-L20V on the monitor PLC when the modem is connected to PC. In addtion, modem
initialization command and telephone line type, etc., must be also set in advance.
"Serial connection", Page 9-5
"Modem Initialization", Page 9-10
When communication is finished,

select "Monitor/simulator(N)"
"Stop monitor(E)" or "Return to Editor(X)", from the menu, then
disconnect the telephone line and end communication.

Other procedure
Stop monitor.
(Red) button
Return to Editor
Click
button.
Press Ctrl key+ F1 key
TIP
When communication starts again, open the "Tel. No. setting" dialog box in the "Monitor/
Simulator(N)"
"Monitor model(B)", and click the "Connect" button.
When other party's address is to be registered

The "Phone number setting" dialog box is displayed for the first time, there will be no dial destination in
the "Dial destination" pull-down list. The other party's address should be registered according to the
following procedure.
Enter other party's address in the "Destination" in "Tel No. setting" dialogue box, and enter
other party's phone number in "Telephone number".
Enter the name of the

connection partner.
Enter the phone number
of the connection partner.
Item
call to
Telephone
number
Description
Enter the name of the connection partner. One phone number can be registered for 1 direction.
Enter the phone number of the connection partner.
When outside line dialing mode is used, only the telephone number of other party needs to be
entered without entering the outside line number.
9-13
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Press Shift key+ F4 key
Click the "Register" button.

The other party's address entered can be registered.
Routing setting
Set when connecting through the VT3/VT2 series connected to PLC and FL-net instead of directly
connecting PLC to PC.
Note
Routing connection mode cannot be used for KV-10(16), KV-24(40) and KV-P16.
In the "Communication setting" dialog box, select "Routing setting" checkbox, and click the "Detail"
button.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Item
Description
Communication destination
Selects the PLC model to be connected to PC.
Via VT/DT (2-port function)
Selected when VT/DT routing (2-port function) is used.
VT/DT model
Selects the model to be routed.
Connection to KV
Selects the model to be routed and PLC connection method.
FL-net via
Checked when connected through VT/DT routing.
Routing unit select
Selects the unit to be routed.
(Update list)
Reads the unit list from the unit configuration KV-5000/3000 to be routed.
Communication destination Specifies the node No. of connection equipment (KV-5000 or KV-FL20V)
node No.
Communication route
(Communication method)
to be routed.
Displays the connection state of PLC connected to PC.
Selects the communication method for communicating with the directly
connected equipment to be routed.
Under current setting condition, state of PLC to PLC connection can be tested.
(Connection test)
If connection fails, please verify communication setting and cable

connection status.
9-14
Global device comment transfer range setting

Monitor/Simulator(N)
Setup communication(T)
Setup transfer range of global device cmnts (T)
When supported model is KV-5000/3000, you can set transfer range of global device comment when a
project is transferred.
From the menu, select "Monitor/Simulator(N)"
"Setup transfer
range of global device cmnts(T)", the "Global device comment transfer range setting" dialog box pops
up.
9
Description
When this radio button is selected, all the global device comments will be transferred.
Selected range
When this radio button is selected, you can select a range.
Device
Specifies a device type in combination box. Types of all global devices can be specifed.
Start
Specifies the leading No. of comment transfer device.
Finish
Specifies the end No. of comment transfer device.
(Read setting
value)
(Save setting
value)
(Clear setting
value)
Reads the device range after "Save setting value".

Saves the device range specified by "Specified range".
To clear all specified devices, select "full range" radio button.
9-15
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Item
All range
Comment transfer setup

To set the comment range transferred to PLC.
Not displayed when "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" KV-700/700+M" are selected as the
supported models.
Note
When transferring program and comment to KV-10 (16), KV-24 (40), KV-P16, be sure
to set a comment transfer range.
The number of comments that can be transferred are as follows.When the set
number of comments exceeds the number of comments that can be transferred,
the number of comments that can be transferred will be transferred to host
according to the set device list sequence.
Supported model
Number of comments that can be transferred
KV-24(40)
KV-10(16)
1000
KV-P16
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Comment type is selected through "Select comment" under "Show mode setting"
in "Options", and the selected comment will be transferred to PLC.
From the menu, select "Monitor/Simulator (N)"
"Setup communicationg(T)"
"Setup cmnts
transfer(T)", the "Comment transfer range setting" dialog box pops up.
Specify the type and range of device

to be transferred.
Click to specify all comments that are

entered in the ladder program.
Display the number of comments set currently.
9-16
Monitor Mode
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Monitor model(B)" Ctrl + Shift + F3
The ladder program being edited is converted to monitor mode in stead of transferring to PLC. Before
operation, please connect PLC to PC, and set it to communication enabled mode.
For the monitor, see
"9-2 Monitor Function", Page 9-34
.
Other procedure
"Monitor mode(B)", and switch to monitor mode.
From the pull-down menu of the mode bar, select "Monitor".
When the project being edited is identical to that of PLC
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Immediately switches to monitor mode.
When the project being edited is different from that of PLC

The dialog box for confirming project transfer is
displayed.
It will switch to monitor mode when the ladder
program being edited is different from the ladder
program running on PLC after "Monitor mode" is selected.
When "PLC transfer
monitor mode" is selected, the "Program transfer" dialog box will appear.
Please select the project to be transferred, then click the "Run" button.
"Transfer to PLC -> Monitor Mode", Page 9-17
Select "Cancel" to stop switching to monitor mode.
Note
For "Positioning parameter setting", even if project is different, confirmation dialog
box will not be displayed.
Transfer to PLC -> Monitor Mode

KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Transfer to PLC -> Monitor Mode(C)" Ctrl + F8
The ladder program generated from the Editor is transferred to PLC after being converted machine
code to PLC, then the unit switches to monitor mode. Before operation, please connect PLC to PC, and
set it to communication enabled mode.
For the monitor, see
"Monitor Function", Page 9-34.
9-17
"PLC transfer -> Monitor Model(C)".
When normal conversion fails, an error prompt message will be displayed.

Check error content displayed in the output window, correct ladder program, then transfer the
program again.
"Output Window", Page 6-12
Specify the program content to be transferred

"Transfer program" dialog box appears.
When CPU unit is KV-5000/3000
Transfer project info

Display area
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Item
Description
The item selected by the checkbox is transferred to PLC.
Transfer item
In addition, the detailed information of the selected item is displayed in transfer item
information area on the right side of dialog box.
Transfer item info
Displays the detailed setting information of the selected transfer item.
display area
Only item name will be displayed for the items for which detailed setting is not needed.
(select All)
Deselect the checkbox of all transferred items.
Cancel all
Deselect the checkbox of all transferred items.
Clear module/macro in After this checkbox is selected, the module/macro written into PLC will be cleared
PLC
before transfer, then the project will be transferred.
Transfer in PROGRAM
When this radio button is selected, PLC is temporarily switched to PROGRAM
mode
mode, then the project will be transferred.

After this radio button is selected, RUN state will be kept, and a project will be
Transfer in RUN mode transferred to PLC.

When the program is transferred in RUN state, some contents of "Unit setting info"
and "CPU system setting" cannot be transferred*..
*In CPU system setting, the following items are not transferred.
Module execution sequence setting
Local/global assignment setting
CPU unit buffer info setting
Operation setting during error
"CPU System Setting", Page 6-42
9-18
Transfer item "Global device comment"
Item
All range
Selected range
When this radio button is selected, the range of the global device comments to be
transferred to PLC can be set.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Device
Description
When this radio button is selected, all global device comments will be transferred to PLC.
When the cell is double clicked, a combo box will be displayed.

Please directly enter device type or select from pull-down menu.
Start
Specifies the leading No. of range specifying.
Finish
Specifying the end No. of range specifying.
(Clear setting value) Clears all items entered through range specifying.
Transfer item "Program"
Item
(checkbox)
Description
Transfers the module/macro of the selected checkbox to PLC.
When "Clear module/ macro in PLC" is selected, then checkbox cannot be cancelled.
Module/macro name Displays all modules/macros registered to the item being edited.
Type
Displays types of the modules/macros.
(select All)
Selects checkbox of all items to be transferred.
(Cancel all)
Deselect the checkbox of all items to be transferred.
9-19
Transfer item "Logging/tracing setting info"
Item
Description
(checkbox)
Transfers the logging/tracing setting with the ID No. of the selected checkbox to PLC.
ID
Displays the ID No. of the registered logging/tracing setting.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Type
Displays the type of the registered logging/tracing setting.
File Comments
Displays file comment set via "logging/tracing setup" dialog box.
(select All)
Select the checkbox for all items to be transferred.
(Cancel all)
Deselects the checkbox for all the items to be transferred.
Transfer item "Mail setting info"
Item
9-20
Description
(checkbox)
Transfers mail settings of the unit with the checkbox selected to PLC.
Unit No.
Displays Unit No. of the unit for which mail setup is performed.
Unit name
Displays name of the unit for which mail setup is performed.
Address
Displays mail address of the mail sender for adding a mail.
(select All)
Selects the checkbox for all items to be transferred.
(Cancel all)
Transfer item "File register setting"
Item
(checkbox)
Description
Setting of the file register with the No. selected in checkbox is transferred PLC
memory card.
Displays file register setting No.
File Comments
Displays the file comment set by "File register setting" dialog box.
(select All)
Selects the checkbox for all items to be transferred.
(Cancel all)
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
No.
Transfer item "Positioning unit parameter"
Item
(Select positioning unit)
Description
Displays the "Select unit" dialog box. *
*One of KV-H20G, K-VH20S and KV-H40S is connected to CPU unit.
9-21
When CPU unit is KV-1000/700/700+M/P16/10/16/24/40

Select the checkbox for transferring an item to PLC unit. If PLC to which
a program is to be transferred is RUN mode, then you should select
whether to transfer in PROG mode, or write the program during PLC
operation.
Select "Transfer in PROGRAM mode"
PLC operation is stopped, and program is written in PROG mode.
Select "Transfer program in RUN mode"
Ladder program is written into PLC in RUN mode. Before transfer is
started, the program executed will be continued until writing is finished.
Caution
Writing in RUN will be under great risk due to connection of PLC controller. Be
careful during operation!
KV-5000/3000 series User's Manual, "About writing in RUN mode"
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
After transfer is finished normally, the unit will return to monitor mode automatically.
When there is no difference between PLC program and the program to be transferred, writing will not
be performed, and the unit will directly switch to monitor mode.
Note
The disabled macros and the macros that are not called cannot be transferred to
PLC.
9-22
Read from PLC -> Monitor mode

KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Read from PLC -> Monitor Model(M)" Ctrl + F1
Transfer ladder program in PC to PLC, then switch to monitor mode. This can be used to check
whether PLC is connected correctly. Perform the next operation from the Editor.
Once a ladder program is read, it will be read into a temporary job folder.
If exiting the Editor without saving, it will be deleted. To save a ladder program into PLC, you
should rename it, then save.
Note
When starting monitor, you should correctly set PLC communication parameters.
"Communication Setting", Page 9-4
"Read from PLC -> Monitor Model(M)" from the editing
program menu.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
The "Transfer program" dialog box appears.
Select items to be read.

The "Transfer program" dialog box is displayed. Specify the items to
be read from PLC.
Note
When "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" or "KV-700/700+m" is selected as the

supported model, be sure to select the "Unit setting info" and "Program" in the
read items.
When "KV-P16", "KV-10 (16)" or "KV-24(40)" is selected as the supported model, be
sure to select the "Program" in the read items.
After transfer is finished normally, the mode will return to monitor mode automatically.
9-23
Transfer to PLC
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Transfer to PLC(W)"
The ladder program written through the Unit Editor is transferred after being converted into mechanical
code. After transfer is finished, the unit will return to Editor. Before operation, please connect PLC to
PC, and set it to communication enabled mode.
TIP
"Transfer to PLC(W)"
If a conversion error occurs, then "Conversion error" message will be displayed. Transfer will stop
abnormally.
Check error content displayed in the output window, correct ladder program, then transfer the
program again.
"Output Window", Page 6-12
Specify the program content to be transferred
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
The "Transfer program" dialog box is displayed.

Specify the items to transfer to the PLC. If PLC to
which a program is to be transferred is RUN mode,
then you should select whether to transfer in PROG
mode, or write the program during PLC operation.
Select "Transfer in PROGRAM mode"
PLC operation is stopped, and ladder program is
written in PROG mode.
Select "Transfer program in RUN mode"
In PLC operation state, "Writing in RUN" will be performed for writing ladder program only. Before
transfer is started, the program executed will be continued until writing is finished.
Caution
Writing in RUN will be under great risk due to connection of PLC controller. Be
careful during operation!Be careful during operation!
KV-5000/3000 series User's Manual, "About writing in RUN mode"
Note
9-24
The disabled macros and the macros that are not called cannot be transferred to PLC.
Return to the Editor mode when transfer is finished normally.
Read from PLC
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Read from PLC(R)" Ctrl + F5
The ladder program transferred to PLC is read in to the Editor. Before operation, please connect PLC to
PC, and set to communication enabled state.
"Read from PLC (R)", and select the data to be read.
Verify/Synchronize PLC
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Verify with PLC/sychronize(V)"
Verify the items currently stored in PLC and the items in the Editor.
Before operation, please connect PLC to PC, and set to communication enabled state.
"Verify with PLC/synchronize(V)", and verify the
item being edited and the item stored in PLC. The verification result will be displayed in the "Verify/
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
synchronize PLC" dialog box.
Item
Description
Verifies the items checked in the "Items of current project" and the items in PLC, and
(Verify)
displays the verification result.
(Write to PLC)
Writes the items checked in "Items of current project" into PLC.
(Read from PLC)
Reads the items checked in "Current project" to PLC.
Detailed verification result will be displayed in the output window.
(Obtain latest info)

Current project's
item
Update all items displayed to the latest information. For the items with different final
updating times, verification result in the "verification" column will be cleared.
Displays every project currently edited using KV STUDIO.
After the checkbox is selected, it will change to the operation object when "verify",
"Write PLC" or "Read PLC" button is clicked.
9-25
Item
Description
Displays the final updating time of every item currently edited using KV STUDIO.
Last update date When changed according to the content transferred last time, the cell of
corresponding item will change to red.
Displays the verification result. The items displayed as OK are matched through the
Verify
project being edited in KV STUDIO and the project in PLC.
Items in PLC
Displays every item of the project stored in PLC.
Double-click on the cell to be verified to verify the project on line double-clicked.

Displays the final updating time of every item of the project transferred to PLC.
Last update date When the content does not match the content last transferred, cell of corresponding item will change
to red. (When several persons join in the design work, changes from different PCs will exist.)
(select All)
Select all checkboxes in "Items of current project".
(Cancel all)
Deselect all checkboxes in "Items of current project".
Hide verification OK
After the checkbox is selected, the items whose verification column changes to OK is
rung
not displayed.
(Check program
memory capacity)
Displays the space of PLC program memory area.

Click the "Verify space of program memory area" button, the "Check program memory
capacity" dialog box will pop up.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
To edit using right-click menu

Through right-clicking the list in "PLC Verification/synchronization " dialog box, you can edit the
following items.
Item
Description
Delite modules without execution
Deletes operation sequence unassigned modules in PLC. (unassigned
sequence assigned*
macros)
Captures and displays the final updating person of the data in the selected PLC.
Display the last user changed data Please set the final updating person in the sequence of "Options" of PLC
"System setting" - "Set the sender of the transmission data when

sending to PLC".
A right-clicked item, only displayed in the case of operation sequence unassigned module.
"Operation sequence unassigned module", Page 9-27
Check program memory capacity

Click the "Check program memory capacity" button in the "PLC Verification/synchronization " dialog
box. The "Verify program capacity" dialog box will appear.
9-26
Item
Program memory capacity
(Clear all program memory)
(Close)
Description
Before operation, please connect PLC to PC, and set to communication
enabled state.
Clears all contents stored in PLC connected (global device comments,
global labels, CPU system settings, ladder programs). *
Closes the "Verify program memory space" dialog box.
*After all contents of the program memory are cleared, a "no ladder program error occurs in PLC.
Operation sequence unassigned module

When transferring different items to PLC with transferred items, if "Clear modules/macros in PLC" is not
checked in "Transfer program" dialog box, then original modules in PLC will be reserved in PLC as
"Operation sequence unassigned modules".
9
Before transfer:
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Befor e
Project 1
Project 1
Project 2
Project 3
Project A
Project A
Project B
After transfer:
Project 1
Project 1
Project 2
Project 3
Project A
Project B
Operation sequence
unassigned modules in PLC
Deleting execution sequence unassigned module

"Operate sequence unassigned module" can be deleted only using one of the following methods.
Check "Clear modules/macros in PLC" in the "Transfer program" dialog box, then transfer the items again.
From the right-click menu on the list of "PLC Verification/synchronization" dialog box, select "Delite
modules without execution sequence assigned".
Reading operation sequence unassigned module

The operation sequence unassigned module can be read only through the "PLC Verification/
synchronization" dialog box.
Select the checkbox for the operation sequence unassigned module to be read through the "PLC
Verification/synchronization" dialog box, then click then "Read from PLC" button.
The operation sequence unassigned module is read as a standby module.
9-27
Verifying PLC
KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Verify with PLC(V)"
The ladder program currently stored in PLC and the program contents in the Editor are verified.
Before operation, please connect PLC to PC, and set to communication enabled state.
"Verify with PLC(V)" and select the items to verified
from the "Transfer program" dialog box.

The verification result will be displayed in the "Verify" dialog box.
In addition, the verification result of each item will be output to the
output window.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Start Monitor
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
(green)"Monitor/Simulator(N)"
"Start Monitor(S)" F4
"Start monitor(S)" to start communication with PLC.
The operation conditions will be displayed in various windows.

Other procedure
Note
From the pull-down menu of the mode bar, select "Monitor".
In Monitor running process, PLC cable should not be disconnected. If communication

error occurs, PC operation may be unstable.
Stop Monitor
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
(red) "Monitor/Simulator(N)"
Online Edit
*For details about online edit, see
9-28
"Stop Monitor(E)" Shift + F4
"Stop monitor (E)' to stop PLC communication.
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"9-10 Online Edit", Page 9-92.
Simulator
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
For details about simulator, see
"Simulator(L)" Ctrl + F2
"9-11 Simulator", Page 9-96.
Set up Simulator
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Set up simulator(A)"
"Simulator setting" can be selected only in simulator operation mode.

Scan time and waiting time of setting simulator operation are set.
Description
Simulator scan time can be freely set.
A scan period of Ladder can be simulated via pre-set scan time. Using the function,
actual device scan time, simulate execution or Ladder can be simulated with actual
device scan time.
Excute scan
Please check "Set to fixed scanning" and specify scanning time in the 0- 5000 range.
Note
If the above checkbox is not selected, the value set in "Execute

scan" will become actual scanning execution time.
Scan time of Simulator execution will vary with ladder program length and PC performance.
wait time
If scanning time is too short, it is difficult to debug. This needs use of waiting time
setting to extend scanning time.
Using watchdog timer, you can monitor arithmetic operation blocking or program
WDT time
execution time overtime due to PLC or program abnormity. Using monitor timer,
you can test infinite loop in the program. The default value is 3000s.
9-29
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Item
Real-time Chart Monitor
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Monitor/simulator(N)"
"Real-time chart monitor(H)"
Real-time Chart Monitor can be started when KV STUDIO is in Editor mode/Monitor mode/Online editor
mode.
Besides, even if KV STUDIO is not started, real-time Chart Monitor can be also separately started.
Start from KV STUDIO

"Real-time Chart Monitor (H)", and the real-time
Chart Monitor will be started.

Other procedure
In Register Monitor window and monitor window, from the right-click menu, click "Real-time
Chart Monitor (H)", the device registered to Register Monitor window and monitor window is
started in the status of registering to real-time Chart Monitor.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
In the case of separate start

Install KV STUDIO (Ver.4.00 above).
Double click the shortcut icon of real-time Time Chart Monitor.
For details, see
9-30
"9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor", Page 9-51
High-speed Time Chart Monitor
KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"High-speed Time Chart Monitor(H)"
When starting high speed Time Chart Monitor program, the "Register Monitor" window will be
displayed.So, the device monitored via high speed Time Chart Monitor program should be registered to
Register Monitor program in advance.
Display Register Monitor and register the device to be displayed.

"9-3 Register Monitor", Page 9-41
"High-speed Time Chart Monitor(H)" from the menu.
The devices registered to Register Monitor are automatically displayed according to register sequence
from list top, maximal 16 devices will be displayed.
9
For High-speed Time Chart Monitor, see
"9-7 High-speed Time Chart Monitor", Page 9-
73.
Register monitor window
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Registration monitor window (G)
Multiple devices can be registered in register monitor window, and current value and time curve of the
registered device can be displayed or its current value can be changed.
For device register methods and register monitor details, please see
"9-3 Register
Monitor", Page 9-41.

Note
Register monitor window can be selected from the menu only in monitor, simulator or
online Editor.
"Register monitor window (G)" to display register
monitor window.
9-31
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
TIP
Batch Monitor Window
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Monitor/simulator(N)
For batch monitor operation details, see
Note
Batch monitor window (K)
"9-4 Batch Monitoring", Page 9-46.
Batch monitor window can be selected on the menu only in monitor, simulator or
online Editor.
When selecting "Monitor/Simulator(N)"
"Batch monitor window (K)" from the menu, batch monitor
window will appear.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
TIP
Batch Change Window
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Monitor/simulator(N)
Batch change window (D)
You can specify a range, read in batch the current values of the devices registered to window from
PLC, make change and then write into PLC. You can also store the setting of the device read or read
the setting of the device stored.
For details, see
"9-9 Batch Change", Page 9-83.
When selecting "Monitor/Simulator(N)"
"Batch change window (D)" from the menu, batch change
window appears.
"Batch change" window only displays 1 screen.
9-32
Display/hide Watch Window
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Display/hide monitor window(N)
Alt + 3
Display current value of all devices contained in ladder program block of the selected cell selected via
editor.
When selecting other ladder program blocks, the device in monitor window will also be changed
accordingly, and the display will be updated.
Note
Watch window can be selected from the menu only in monitor, simulator or online
editor status.
When selecting multiple ladder program blocks, the current value of all devices will be also
displayed.
"Display /hide watch window (N)", to switch between
Display/Hide of the watch window.

: displayed
When ID is not selected
: not displayed
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
When ID is selected
WatchWindow
Unit Monitor
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Unlike the register monitor and batch monitor, Unit Editor will display the units that meet the values of
the relays and DMs to be monitored.
"9-8 Unit Monitor", Page 9-81
Custom Monitor
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
This facilitates the user to freely display device Register Monitor window.
"9-5 Custom Monitor", Page 9-49
9-33
9-2 Monitor Function

This section describes the monitor functions and how to use these functions.
Function Overview
Monitor function allows to compile ladder programs made by Editor, transfer to PLC and check its
operation status.Ladder programs in PLC can be also transferred to PC to verify their operation status
by reserved compilation
Monitor function allows to execute the following operations.
Real time verification of operation status of ladder programs via ladder or high speed Time Chart.
Switching of PLC operation mode.
Forced set/ reset of I/O contacts via Monitor.
Easy to modify setting value and current value of device data and timer/counter.
To save/read current value and range of the specified device to floppy disk or memory card.
To restore part of devices to default value.
Restrictions ON Monitor
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
After stopping Monitor, PLCs and PLCs displayed in other Monitor windows can not be connected.
Normal operation fails due to mismatched contents between ladder program monitor on PC and
ladder program on PLC side.
If devices to be monitored are too many, operation will be slow.
According to PLC scanning time, Time Chart in Register Monitor is not operated.
During execution of high speed Time Chart Monitor, other windows cannot perform monitor function.
Communication with PLC

To communicate with PLC, COM interface and baud rate of PC to connect PLC must be set.
TIP
The setting content is stored in KV STUDIO, and can be reflected during the next start of KV
STUDIO.
For communication with PLC, see
"Communication Setting", Page 9-4.
Precautions when Using Serial Ports

Before starting Monitor, you must connect PLC and PC with connection cables and then confirm whether
or not monitor port is set correctly. If incorrectly, error will be displayed during Monitor start, Monitor
function cannot be executed.
During Monitor execution, PLC cables can not be disconnected. Otherwise, communication error will
occur and PC operation is not stable.
Communicate is not allowed in a place exposed to severe noise.Otherwise communication error will
occur.
When writing program, pulling out connecting line will lead to communication abort.PLC program will
be destroyed. Keep in mind!
When communication errors occur frequency, baud rate must be adjusted finely.
9-34
Precautions when Using USB Ports

KV-5000/3000/1000/700 PLC should be turned on when USB cable is connected.
When using KV- 1000 PLC with USB interface, PLC can be inserted directly into USB port on PC.
Do not use USB HUB.
For communication break caused by communication instability due to noise, you can pull out PLC
USB cable from PC and then insert again. For communication instability, freguent noise, ferrite core
should be wound on USB cables. Winding one circle of ferrite core on USB cable will bring a better
effect.
Various Monitor Functions

Register Monitor
Applied to register various devices, display current value and Time Chart of the device registered. This
Monitor can enable batch verification of various devices.

For Register Monitor, see
"9-3 Register Monitor", Page 9-41.
Batch Monitor, can enable the batch display of current value, contact ON/ OFF status and comments
registered of all devices.
For Batch Monitor, see
"9-4 Batch Monitoring", Page 9-46.
Batch Change
Batch Change can enable batch change of PLC device value, and to save them in a file.
For Batch Change, see
"9-9 Batch Change", Page 9-83.
Watch Window
Watch window only displays current value of the device contained in the current selected ladder
program block. You can simply select a cell on Editor, switch the ladder program block to be displayed,
to only monitor current value.
Custom Monitor
This facilitates the user to freely display Register Monitor window for devices.
For Custom Monitor, see
"9-5 Custom Monitor", Page 9-49.
High-speed Time Chart Monitor

When the connected CPU unit is KV-1000/700, High-speed Time Chart Monitor can be used to monitor
external input/ output and device status according to scanning unit.
For High-speed Time Chart Monitor, see
"9-7 High-speed Time Chart Monitor", Page 9-73.
9-35
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Batch Monitor
Real-time Chart Monitor

When the connected CPU unit is KV-5000/3000, to display Real-time Chart Monitor can be used, the
change of word devices that cannot be displayed in waveform mode by High-speed Time Chart
Monitor, enabling real-time monitoring.
For online edit function, see
Unit Monitor
Different from Register Monitor and Batch Monitor Unit Monitor,, can display relay and DM value
matching the unit to be monitored.
For Unit Monitor, see
"9-8 Unit Monitor", Page 9-81.
Online Edit Function

Using online edit function, PLC ladder program being monitored can be changed.
*For online edit function, see
"9-10 Online Edit", Page 9-92.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Start and Exit Monitor

Transfer and monitor program
Programs made via Editor can be transferred to PLC for monitoring.For devices, see
PLC -> Monitor Mode", Page 9-17.
Read and monitor program

Ladder programs in PLC can be transferred to PC for monitoring.
For details, see
9-36
"Read from PLC -> Monitor mode", Page 9-23.
"Transfer to
Names and Functions of Monitor Screen

The following window can be displayed in Monitor mode. If opening Batch Monitor or Register Monitor
after exiting Monitor, these two windows are also automatically displayed.
Ladder program monitor
Batch monitor window
Batch change window
Watch Window
Every window function is described as follows.

"Ladder Program Monitor", Page 9-37
"Register Monitor", Page 9-41
"Batch Monitoring", Page 9-46
"Batch Change", Page 9-83
"Unit Monitor", Page 9-81
"Change device value" window, Page 9-39
" Watch Window", Page 9-33
Ladder Program Monitor
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
How to start and stop ladder program Monitor and the screens displayed when executing of ladder
program Monitor are described as below.
Ladder Monitor overview

The functions of ladder program Monitor are as follows.
To control bit device ON/OFF
To modify current value via "Change device values" window, .
To set up scan time
9-37
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
"Change device value"

window
About screen display

Basic operations (device selection and display/hide of comment label, etc.) of ladder program Monitor
screen are identical to Editor.
The following describes specific screen of Ladder Monitor.
The display of title bar is switched to"KV STUDIO" - "Monitor: KV-****"-**.
"Monitor" will be
Monitor can be
displayed on mode
converted active button
column.
via tool bar button.
To display status
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
bar.
Communication indicator
Rotating indicates in communication in progress. It will
rotate faster as soon as communication speed is faster.
Scan time
To display scan
time, in "0.1ms".
PLC mode
To display PLC operation mode.
Baudrate
Communication
speed is displayed.
Communication port
To display communication
port name.
ON/OFF state of bit device

To control bit device ON/OFFvia mouse or key.
Note
Timer contact and external input relay cannot be ON/ OFF.

ON/ OFF operation of external input relay can be disabled by disabling input refresh.
Double click device
OFF status
ON status
To move mouse cursor to the device to be ON/ OFF and

double click.
Changed contact color indicates changed ON/ OFF status of device.
Move cursor to device and press / key.

When the cursor is in green status, move the arrow key to device to be ON/ OFF and press. /
Changed contact color indicates changed ON/ OFF status of device.
9-38
key.
Change current value/setting value

Using "correct device values" window, you can change current value and setting value.
Two display methods for "Change device values" window are available.
Select the cell of device containing current value / setting value to be changed, display "Correct value
change" window as follows.
Press
key.
From right-click menu, select "Change device value (D)"
Double click on the item to be changed, enter the value. Click left key to display "Display format", select
from the display menu.
Item
Reference
destination
Displays the device monitored currently.

By double clicking on the item, you can change from keyboard. If module / macro is not
registered, Local Device cannot be registered.
If the registered device is indirect specified or index-modified reference destination
device will be displayed.
Current value
Displays the current value.

By double clicking on the item, can change from keyboard.
For bit device, double-click allows to switch between ON/ OFF status.
Display format
Displays the display format of the current monitor value.

By selecting the item, you can change from the menu, and click
Set value
Displays setting value.

By double clicking on the item, you can change from keyboard.
Contact
Displays contact status of timer/counter.
Jump and search

Using instruction or operand as keyword, you can jump to the rung NO. or step specified in ladder
program, or search instruction and device. Besides, rung comment can be also searched.
For jump, see
For search, see
"Jump", Page 5-15.

"Search Device", Page 5-6.
Start and stop monitor

To start/stop PLC communication.
For starting Monitor, see
For stopping Monitor, see
"Start Monitor", Page 9-28.

"Stop Monitor", Page 9-28.
Verify PLC error

In monitor process, error verification should be made frequently. When PLC error occurs, error
message is displayed.
"Error Message Lists", Page A-2
9-39
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Device
Description
PLC Setting and Operation

Set up operation mode of PLC
To set PLC operation mode.
During initial start of Monitor, it is PLC operation mode when Monitor start.
To change operation mode, select from the "Dedug (D)" menu or click operation mode button.
For operation (RUN mode) / stop (PROG mode), see
"Execute RUN/continuous Scan" please see
"PROGRAM/stop", Page 10-2.
Forced set/reset register

Unrelated to the program status, imperatively set/ reset the bit device registered.
For details of forced set/reset register, please see
"Forced Set/reset Register", Page 10-11
Input refresh disable / output disable setting

Input refresh disable function and output disable function are available in PLC.
For input disable refresh and output disable, see
"Inhibit Input Refreshing", Page 10-13, "Inhibit
Output", Page 10-14.

MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Scan time monitor

Display various messages such as the message related to scanning time of CPU monitored and the
number of interrupts, etc. For scan time Monitor, see
"Scan Time Monitor", Page 10-14.
Set up calendar timer

Internal calendar timer is built in KV-5000/3000/1000/700 PLC CPU.
For calendar timer setting, see
"Calendar Timer Setting", Page 10-15.
Clear all PLC devices

Clearing all devices means initializing data memory (DM, EM, FM, W, ZF) the setting relay (RO1000R59915), link relay (B), latch relay (LR) and counter (C) set via Data Memory (DM, EM, FM, W, ZF),
power off hold function MEMSW instruction.
During monitor, if all devices are cleared, PLC device will be initialized.
For clearing all PLC devices, see
"Clear All PLC Devices", Page 10-16.
Clear KV-D30 control memory (CM)

Control memory (CM) area used in operation panel KV-D30 will be initialized.
For clearing KV-D30 control memory(CM), see
"Clear CMs For KV-D30", Page 10-17.
BREAK setting
A "break" is a function for stopping a ladder program at specified conditions during program operation.
For BREAK setting, see
9-40
"Device Break Setting", Page 10-7.
9-3 Register Monitor

Via Register Monitor, you can register any device, display current value and Time Chart of the device
registered. By using this Monitor, batch verification of various devices can be enabled. This section
describes Register Monitor method and operating method.
Register Monitor overview

The Register Monitor has the following functions:
Display the current value, setting value and contact (timer / counter contact status) and comment of
the device registered.
Change current value and setting value of the device registered.
Change the position of the device registered.
Change display format.
Display Time Chart of device registered (the bit device and word device)
Note
According to PLC scanning time, Time Chart in Register Monitor is not operated.
When displaying Time Chart Monitor with higher precision, please use Real-time
Time Chart Monitor or High-Speed Time Chart Monitor.

MONITOR & SIMULATOR
"9-7 High-speed Time Chart Monitor", Page 9-73
Display Register Monitor Window

For how to display Register Monitor, see
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Register monitor window", Page 9-31 .
9-41
Device Registration
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
If using Register Monitor device, the device must be firstly registered with the following methods.
Drag & register from ladder program Monitor window
From ladder program Monitor window, click right-click register
Right-click in Monitor window, then register
Register the device in Register Monitor window
Drag, register from ladder program monitor window

To drag and register from ladder program Monitor window by the following procedures.
In Ladder Monitor window, select the cell including the

device to be registered.
Move mouse cursor on the range selection boundary. When

cursor changes to
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
, click mouse (hold and freeze mouse).
Drag the device in register monitor window.

The mouse cursor will become
when dragging.
Register the device in register monitor window
From ladder monitor window, click right-click register
In Ladder Monitor window, select the cell including the device to be registered.
From right-click menu, select "Register Monitor Window (R)".
Right-click in monitor window, then register

From right-click menu of monitor window, select "Register Monitor Window (G)".
Specify device and register

In Register Monitor window, you can directly enter the device from keyboard.
For how to operate and change, see
"Change Current Value", Page 9-43
After device registration, move the cursor to the next rung in Register Monitor window. You
can continuously register device by pressing Ctrl + I
function in macro is disabled.
9-42
keys.
In which, argument device
Change Current Value
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Select the device in Register Monitor window, change ON/ OFF status and current value of the device.
By double clicking on the changed item, enter the value. The item that cannot be changed is displayed
in grey.
Click left key on ("Mod/mac (module / macro)" and "Display format (display format)" item, and select
from the popup menu).
Item
Description
Module/macro*1
The device being monitored is global device or currently opened module or global
device displaying macro.
Global device of macro is displayed.
Select display project, click
key, on the menu, select (change) value.
Device
Displays the device monitored currently.

By double clicking on the item, you can change from keyboard. If module / macro is
not registered, Local Device cannot be registered.
Reference destination
If the registered device is indirectly specified or index-modified, reference

destination device will be displayed.
Current value

Double click on the project, you can change from keyboard.
For bit device, double-click allows to switch between ON/ OFF status.
Display format
Displays the display format of the current monitor value.

Select project, on the menu, change, click
Set value
Setting value display.

By double clicking on the item, change from keyboard.
Displays contact status of timer/counter.
Comments
Displays comments.
Time chart display

area
Displays time chart.
It is displayed only when the models KV-5000, KV-3000 or KV-1000 are selected.
If many devices registered, they can be displayed via multiple windows opened.
During execution of Register Monitor program, current value and Time Chart gradually change
at same operating speed.
Note
A scale of Time Chart, is not a scanning period. It refers to a monitor communication

time sequence.
To ensure correct time chart in every scanning, please use Real-time Time Chart
Monitor or High-speed Time Chart Monitor.
9-43
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Contact
Sort device
The device should be sorted according to type and No.
From the right-click menu in Register Monitor window, select Sort registered device".
Change display sequence of device by required

Drag the device selected at the current cursor position to other position, to change the device
sequence.
Move mouse cursor to mobile source
device, drag it into the device to be placed.
The mouse cursor where the device is
inserted.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Current value is restored to the default value

Right click device and select "Reset".
Delete the device from Register Monitor program

Select the cell to be deleted. Press Delete key.
Delete the device from register monitor window.
Switch comment display

In register monitor window, right-click, and select : "Display comment".
There are following 3 methods to display content.
Display comments OFF
Display comments 1
Display comments 2
The project selected is enabled.
Display/hide the setting value and contact of timer / counter (status of

timer / counter contact)
In Register Monitor window, right-click and select "Display / hide timer counter setting value / contact".
The item selected is displayed, the item not selected is hidden.
9-44
Switch time chart display

In register monitor window, right-click, and select "Display Time Chart".
Select "Display chart". Content can be displayed using following 4methods.
None
Small scale
Medium scale
High scale
The item selected is enabled.
Display/hide device reference destination

In register monitor window, right-click, and select "Display / hide device reference destination".
The item selected is displayed, the item not selected is hidden.
Save as Custom Monitor

To set the window as Custom window, and register the window to non-default window.
"9-5 Custom Monitor", Page 9-49
Real-time Chart Monitor or High speed Time Chart Monitor can enable monitoring the status of external
I/O and device in every scanning period.
9-45
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Real-time Chart Monitor/High-speed Time Chart Monitor
9-4 Batch Monitoring

With the batch monitoring program, you can achieve the batch display of current values, contact ON/
OFF status and comments of all registered devices. This section describes the batch monitoring
operation.
Overview
Batch Monitoring can do the following:
The current value, setting value, contact (contact status of timer / counter) and comment of the device
are batch displayed according to device type.
Change the current/setting value of device.
For details, see
"Batch Monitor Window", Page 9-32
Change Displayed Devices
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Can change the devices displayed in the Batch Monitoring window.
There are two device changing methods.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Drag & change from ladder program monitor window

Ladder Monitor allows to select the device to be displayed (mouse pointer shape changed.} Drag the
device in batch monitor window.
The selected device and equivalent device list can be displayed in "Batch Monitoring" window.
Select "Batch Monitoring" from the right-click menu on Ladder Monitor window, and start multiple Batch
Monitoring windows.
Change specified device

In "Batch Monitoring" window, directly enter the device using keyboard.
For how to operate, see
9-46
"Change Current Value"
Change Current Value
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
In "Batch Monitoring" window, you can select the device, and change the ON/OFF status and current
value of the device.
Double click on the changed item, enter the value. The item that cannot be changed is displayed in
gray.
Item
Device(D)*1
Device
During batch monitor of global device, select "global".
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Module/macro*2
Description
After selecting radio button, display batch monitor of global device / Local Device.
During batch monitor of Local Device, select the module/ macro to be monitored.
Display the device monitored currently. The device can be changed in cell on
starting line.
When selecting radio button, display batch monitor of buffer memory in
Unit
expansion unit.
buffer memory (G)*1
When the unit that can be monitored is not connected to buffer memory in
expansion unit, the project changes to grey display.
Unit *1
Display the unit monitored. Can change the unit to be batch monitored via initial cell.
Display the offset to initial address of buffer memory in expansion unit.
Offset*1
Can change the initial address of the expansion unit buffer memory to be
displayed via initial cell.
Current value
Double click on the project, can change current value from keyboard.
For bit device, double click on it to switch between ON/ OFF status.
Display format
Can display the display format of the current batch monitor value.
Can change display format via initial cell.
Set value
Setting value display.Can change setting value via value display cell.
Contact
Display contact status of timer/counter.
Comments
Display comments.
*1
It is displayed only when the models "KV-5000" "KV-3000" are selected.
*2
It is not displayed when the models "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" are selected
Making reference
Select "Cross reference" from the right-click menu in the "Batch Monitoring" window.
Right-click on the device to generate cross reference.
When selecting "Expansion unit buffer memory", cross reference cannot be generated.
9-47
Switch comment display

Select "Display comment" in right-click menu in the "Batch Monitoring" window, select the comment to
be displayed.
Display comments OFF
Display comments 1
Display comments 2
The item with testing mark is valid.
When selecting "Expansion unit buffer memory", "Display comment 2" cannot be generated.
Current value is restored to the default value

Select "reset" from the right-click menu in the " batch monitor" window.
Right-click on current value of device and restore to initial value.
"Set Device Default Value", Page 11-4
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Forced set/reset register

Select "Forcedly set/reset register" from the right-click menu of "Batch Monitoring" window, select set/
reset.
Right-click on the device to Force set/reset registration and remove.
"Forced Set/reset Register", Page 10-11
9-48
9-5 Custom Monitor

This facilitates the user to freely display Register Monitor window for devices. This section describes
Custom monitor.
Features of Custom Monitor

If the directory of "Register Monitor" window is set in Custom Monitor registration folder, the window
can be easily called out from all ladder programs.
Specific function monitor window is supplied in CPU unit by default, enabling simply monitor CPU.
Note
Custom Monitor can be selected only from Monitor, Simulator or online edit.
Display Custom Monitor
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Custom Monitor (P)
Select "KV-5000/3000/1000/700" in "Unit Configuration" of workspace, from right-click menu, select

"Custom Monitor", open "Select Custom Monitor" dialog box.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Select the required window, click "Display".
Display the window

registered in "Monitor ".
The following window is registered as "Custom Monitor" window by default.

Some windows are not displayed when the model "KV-700" is selected.
Window name
ACCESS WINDOW
Function
Access window alarm function and User Message monitor, etc.
CPU built-in I/O
CPU built-in I/O monitor.
CPU Frequency counter
CPU Frequency counter monitor
CPU High-speed counter 0
CPU High-speed counter 0monitor
CPUHigh-speed counter 1
CPU High-speed counter 1 monitor.
CPU Interrupt
CPU interrupt monitor.
CPU Positioning X axis monitor CPU has internal X axis monitor with simple locating function.
CPU Positioning Y axis monitor CPU has internal Y axis monitor with simple locating function.
CPU Specify frequency
pulse output
CPU Specify frequency pulse output monitor
Logging ID 0 to 9
Log ID monitor.
(under KV-700 Custom Monitor status, ID is not displayed)
Memory card
To monitor Memory Card
9-49
9-5 Custom Monitor
Registering Custom Monitors
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Via register "Custom Monitor" window, the window as default window can be registered.
"Registration Monitor Window (G)" from the menu.
Display "Register Monitor" window.
Register device.
"Device Registration", Page 9-42
Select the window that will be registered as "Custom Monitor" and click on right key.
A menu appears.
Select "Save as custom monitor" from the menu.

It displays "Save as" box.
Specify file name to be saved and save.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Specify the file name.

File type should be
specified
as
"KVS
monitor message file

(*.Kem)
Note
KVS Monitor information files (*.kem) in the "CpuMon" folder in the "Settings" folder
in the folder pre-installed with KV STUDIO are registered as Custom Monitor files.
These files cannot be registered as Custom Monitor files when "File name" and "File
type" are changed.
9-50
9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

Real-time Chart Monitor can monitor the status of bit device and word device according to scanning unit and
various collecting cycles, etc. Here, we will describe the monitoring function of Real-time Chart Monitor.
Note
Real-time Chart Monitor, can be used only when "KV-5000/KV-3000" models are selected.
The Features of Real-time Chart Monitor

Bit data/word data can be captured real time according to scanning time unit.
Trigger conditions and simple debug traps can be set up.
Read the traced data using the CPU tracing function, which is displayed in real time curve.
When KV STUDIO is in editor/monitor/Online Editor mode, can be started.
In addition, it can also
separately start under the status of KV STUDIO not started.
Display the Real-time Chart Monitor
9
"Real-time Chart Monitor", Page 9-30
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
For how to start Real-time Chart Monitor, please see
The Composition of Real-time Chart Monitor
Device List/Trigger Setting Area
Time Chart Display Area
9-51
Device List/Trigger Setting Area

Register the device to be monitored and set up triggers.
"Device List" tab.

Register the device to be monitored and set up waveform display.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Item
(checkbox)
Description
Display the waveform of the device whose checkbox is selected.
No.
Display the registration number of the currently monitored device.
Device
Display the number of the currently monitored device.

The current values of all the traced devices are displayed in the column titled "Current Value".
Selected value/
current value
These are displayed according to the display format set up in the "Device Setting"
dialog box. "" is displayed when the bit device is ON, "O" when OFF.
When tracing is stopped, "Selected Value" is displayed in the column title and the
cursor position value is displayed.
A/B
Display differential value between Cursor A and Cursor B.

"---" is displayed for bit device.
Device registration/modification
Select the cell to be registered/ edited, then enter the device number.
The "Device Setup" dialog box is displayed.
Other procedure
Double click on the cell to be registered/ edited

After this, press the
Enter key
From right-click menu, select "Register/Edit(R)"
9-52
Item
No.
Description
Display the registration number of the current device.
Display the code number of the current device.
Device
To access the editing window, double click the cell or select the cell, and press the Enter key.
Select the display format of a registered device.
When the registered device is bit device(R, B, MR, LR, CR, T, C, CTC), only the
Display format
"BIN 1BIT" option can be selected.

When the registered device is bit device (DM, W, EM, FM, ZF, TC, CC, Z, CM,
CTH, TM, TRM)the "BIN 1BIT" option cannot be selected.
Display the color of the waveform.
Color
To edit a color, click the color cell.
Display in logic format
When the display format is not" BIN 1BIT", you can select this checkbox.
After selecting this checkbox, the waveform is displayed in the logic format.
Register from KV STUDIO

Drag the compiled device to Ladder Editor of KV STUDIO for registration.
When the programmed cell is selected by the device registered to Real-time Chart Monitor via
Ladder, start Real-time Chart Monitor.

The device registered to registration monitor window and monitor window after started from right-click
Real-time Chart Monitor.

Note
During device registration/modification, all the waveforms displayed will be cleared.
Delete device
Select the cell to be deleted, press Delete key.
Other procedure
From right-click menu, select the cell to be deleted, select "Selete (C)"
Increment registration of the device

Add (+1 or +2) Device Number of the device registered, then, add registration.
After selecting the next cell, press Ctrl + I key.
Other procedure
From right-click menu of the device to be registered, select "Increment registration (I)"
When the display format of the device to be added is "BIN 1BIT" or "DEC 16BIT", "HEX 16BIT", add
1 to Device Number
When the display format of the device to be added is "DEC 32BIT" or "HEX 32BIT", add 2 to Device Number
Display device comments

Display the registered device in the comment form
From the right-click menu of the device whose device comment to be displayed, select "Display device
comments (C)".
9-53
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
menu of registration monitor window and monitor window is started under the status of registered to
Other procedure
Note
"Display device comments (C)"
This can be used when Real-time Chart Monitor is started by KV STUDIO .

During separate start, it cannot be selected.
"Trigger setting" tab.

Setup trigger.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Item
Description
Set the data size to be collected after trigger occurs.
Trigger
After trigger
Position
data size
Data size can be changed via left/right sliding bar.

Move leftwards to increase data size, move rightwards to reduce data size.
Besides, the proportion of data size that can be directly input (%).
Sampling period
Select collecting cycle.
Trigger condition
To set up triggering conditions.
(checkbox)
(Device Number)
Bit
Device
To specify a device, please select the checkbox.

Specify the trigger based on bit device.
This is only limited to the device registered in "List of Devices" tab.
Specify property of bit device.
(trigger attribute)
ON
: When bit device is ON, trigger is enabled.
OFF : When bit device is OFF, trigger is enabled.

Specify trigger condition of bit device.
(Trigger condition)
AND : When all conditions of bit device are matched, trigger occurs
OR
: Trigger occurs when any one of conditions is TRUE.
Specify the trigger condition of bit device and word device.

(Trigger condition)
9-54
AND
: When all conditions of bit device/word device are matched, trigger occurs.
OR
: Trigger occurs when any one of conditions is TRUE.
Item
(checkbox)
(Device Number)
Description
To specify a device, please select the checkbox.
Specify the trigger based on word device.
This is only limited to the device registered in "List of Devices" tab.
Specify trigger condition of bit device.
>=
Word
Device
(Trigger condition)
(threshold)
: When the device value exceeds threshold, trigger occurs.
>
<=
<

Enter the threshold which is used as the condition of comparison with word
device.
Set trigger type

Select the trace triggering mode.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Trigger type "SINGLE"

Tracing is automatically stopped after the specified data size is traced.
Trigger type "NORMAL"

Tracing is automatically stopped after the specified data size is traced.
In pause mode, Real-time Chart Monitor continues monitoring PLC, waiting for the next trigger.
After triggered again, the specified data size is traced and enter pause mode.
The status will last until tracing stop.
"Stop tracing", Page 9-71
9-55
Time chart display area

Display the waveform and various information of the device to be monitored.
Cursor A
Cursor B
Trigger point
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Collected
information display
Cursor A, Cursor B
Can use the cursor to confirm the value of the selected position or use 2 cursors to confirm timing and
response delay, etc.
To move the cursor, move the pointer to the cursor position and then drag.
Use the cursor key on keyboard to trim cursor position.
Trigger point
Trigger point must be displayed during trigger collection.
Absolute position and application time of trigger point can be checked in "collection information display".
Collected information display

Can display message related to the Time Chart displayed.
Display the position*1 and time of trigger.
A
: Represent the position*1 and time of Cursor A.
: Represent the position*2 and time of Cursor A.
A-B
: Represent distance and time between Cursor A and Cursor B.

: Display the current X frame unit *2 (the number of samples/Div) and average time
100pts/Div
(ms/Div).
*1 Position 1, set leading data to 0.
*2 Unit, change will occur when zooming timer axis. (Default: 100pts/Div)
9-56
"File (F)" Menu
Open file
Open real time curve file (*.rtc).
To select a real time curve file, click "File (F)"
"Open file (O)" from the menu to display the "Open
file" dialog box.

Other procedure
Ctrl + O
Save
Save the timing curve monitor data.
"Save". In case of first time save, specify the file name in the
"Save as" dialog box before the file is saved.
Ctrl + S
Save as
Save the timing curve monitor data as
Click "File (F)"
"Save as (A)" from the menu, and specify the file name in the "Save as" dialog box.
Save CSV file

Save the timing curve monitor data in CSV format.
Click "File(F)"
"Save as CSV file(C)" from the menu, and specify the file name in the "Save as"
dialog box.
Print setting
Timing curve monitor data print setup.
Click "File (F)"
"Print setup (R)" from the menu, and set up the printer in the "Pinter setup" dialog
box.
For more information, please refer to respective printer user manuals.
9-57
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Other procedure
Print
Print Real-time Chart Monitor data.
Click "File (F)"
Other procedure
"Print (P)" from the menu, and set up print in the "Print" dialog box.
Ctrl + P
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Item
Print object
Waveform print range
Number of layers of
Print the project selected in checkbox.

Select the waveform range to be printed.
Print within the range of radio button selected.
Specify the number of waveforms printed to 1 page.
wavegraphs
The setting range is 1 to 8 segment/page.
(Printer setup)
For printer setup.
Waveform print color

Highlight
Size of lines for waveform
9-58
Description
Select print object.
Select the waveform color to be printed.

This can be selected by selecting respective radio button.
After selecting checkbox, color is reversal printed.
Displayed only when "Color (no background color)" is selected.
Select the thickness of waveform line to be printed.
printing
This can be set up by selecting respective radio button.
Print title
Add the title on the printed article
Print comments
Add comment on the thing to be printed.
(Print)
Print.
"Cancel"
When print is stopped, close "print" dialog box.
(Preview)
Display print preview.
Print preview
Display print preview of Real-time Chart Monitoring data.
Select "File(F)"
Other procedure
"Print Preview(V)" from the menu. "Print Preview" window appears.
Exit Real-time Chart Monitor

Exit Real-time Chart Monitor.
After selecting "File (F)"
"Exit (X)" from the menu, "Real-time Chart Monitor"dialog box will exit.
"Edit(E)" Menu
Search
Search single wave form data after collecting.

"Fearch (F)", the
"Search" dialog box is opened.

Change wave form data to be enabled, switch the searched destination.
Other procedure
Ctrl + F
Cursor A will automatically move to the searched position.
When search destination is bit device
Item
Description
Select search mode from drop-down menu.
Search mode
Up edge
: search change point of OFF -> ON.
Down edge
: search change point of ON -> OFF.
"Search Previous<-"
Search Previous (left side) from Cursor A.
"Search Next->"
Search Next (right side) from Cursor A.
9-59
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
To enable the wave pattern to be searched, from the menu, select "Edit (E)"
When search destination is word device
Item
Description
Select search mode from drop-down menu.
Maximum value : maximum value of device to be searched.
Search mode
Minimum value : minimum value of device to be searched.

Maximum value : maximum value of device to be searched.
Minimum value : minimum value of device to be searched.
Assigned value : selected when specified value is searched.
Specified values
Can be entered only when "Specified values" is selected as search mode.

Enter search value.
"search Previous <-"
Search Previous (left side) from Cursor A.
"search Next ->"
Search Next (right side) from Cursor A.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Combination search
Multiple wave form data after combination search and sample according to multiple conditions.
"Combine search (C)", open "Combination search" dialog box.
Cursor A will automatically move to the searched position.
Bit device
Combination condition
Bit device
search condition
Bit device and

word device
word device
search condition
9-60
Item
Description
search condition, select specified bit device Combination condition.
Bit device
Bit device
Search condition
AND
: Search keyword meeting all search condition of bit device.
OR
: Search the keyword meeting one of bit device search condition.
Select
The device selected in checkbox becomes the searched destination.
Device
Display the bit device registered by device.
ON/OFF
Specify status of bit device to be searched.

search condition, select specified bit device and word device combination condition.
Bit device and
AND
word device
: Search keyword meeting all search condition of bit device

and word device.
OR
: Search the keyword meeting any one of bit device search

condition and word device search condition.
Select
Device
The device selected in checkbox becomes the searched destination.

From drop-down list, select word device whose device has been
registered.
Specify searching condition of word device.
=
: Search the position where device value is identical to

comparative value.
Cond
>
: Search the position of device value size comparative value.
Search condition
(condition)
<
: Search the position where device value is less than
<>
: Search the position where device value is different from
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
word device
comparative value.
comparative value.
Value
Specify word device to be searched and the value to be compared.
Display
Display the display format of device registered to Real-time Chart
format
Monitor.
"search previous "
Search previous (left side) from Cursor A.
->"search next"
(Close)
Close "combination search" dialog box.
Search next (right side) from Cursor A.
Search the next point.

Search downwards (right side) from Cursor A in active oscillogram.
Search according to the condition set in dialog box when "Search" dialog box is displayed.
Other procedure
"Search Next (N)", start search.
F3
Search previous
Search upwards (left side) from Cursor A in active oscillogram.
Search according to the condition set in dialog box when " Search" dialog box is displayed.
Other procedure
"Search previous (F)", start search.
Shift + F3
9-61
Jumping to Cursor A
Other procedure
"Jump (J)"
"Cursor A (A)", will jump to Cursor A.
"Jump (J)"
"Cursor B (B)", will jump to Cursor B.
"Jump (J)"
"Trigger position (T)", will jump to trigger.
Ctrl + A
Jumping to Cursor B
Other procedure
Ctrl + B
Jump to triggered position
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Other procedure
Ctrl + T
Jump to the specified data number

"Jump (J)"
"Specify data No. (N)", will jump to the specified
data number.
Specify data number via "data No." box on right side of toolbar.
Other procedure
Ctrl + N
9-62
"View(V)" Menu
Device list display

"Device list(E)", and "Device list" tab will be displayed in device
register/trigger setting field. Besides, checkbox is also displayed on the menu.

Select "Device list (E)" under "Device list" tab, the "Device list" tab is hidden and the menu is
dechecked.
Trigger setting display

"Trigger setting (G)", and "trigger setting" tab will be displayed in
device register/trigger setting field. Besides, checkbox is also displayed on the menu.
Select "Trigger settings (G)" under "trigger settings" tab, the "trigger settings" tab is hidden and the
menu is dechecked.
"Device display comment (C)", Device Number registered to List
of Devices will be displayed in comment form. Besides, checkbox is also displayed on the menu.
When displaying using device comment method, select "Device display comment (C)", and Device
Number will be displayed, menu is unchecked.
Comments are read from the KV STUDIO project
for which Real-time Chart Monitor is started up.
When only Real-time Chart Monitor is started, "Device display comment (C)" cannot be
selected.
Set up View
"Display setting (S)", and the dialog box is popped up.
Complete setting related to monitor display of real-time Time Chart.

Other procedure
From right-click menu of timing curve field, select "Display setting (S)"
Right-click on Device Number displayed on the right side of timing curve field.
Setting dialog box consists of three tabs: "Display range", "Scale" and "Common" tabs.
9-63
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Display device comments
"Display range" tab.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Item
Device List
"All devices ON/ OFF"
Word (double word) device
Description
Display the list of device registered. Display device waveform of checkbox
selected.
Switch all device checkboxes between ON/ OFF.
To display in Logic format, select the checkbox.
display set to logic mode
This cannot be selected in case of bit device.
Display setting
Set display position of waveform in timing curve field.

Clicking and set up waveform display area in the range of 0 to 100Div.
About display color of explanatory notes :
White : the waveform area of the selected device is not displayed
"Visible area "
Light blue : the part that is not displayed on the waveform image of the
selected device
Blue : the part that is displayed on the waveform image of the selected device
Grey : the part of selected is not displayed in the part displayed on image
Click and set the range on "Y () Div" setting of "share" tab to waveform
display area.
About display color of explanatory notes :
<Display range>
"Screen display area"
White : waveform range is not described

Grey : waveform range
< display position >
White : the waveform range of the selected device is not displayed
Light blue : the waveform range of the selected device is displayed
Red : partition line
9-64
Display range
Set the upper and lower ends of the range to be displayed in collected data.
The number (of
Set the number of partitions, and draw a red partition line. Clicking the position
partitions )
to be displayed and waveform display position is automatically set up.
Item
Display position
(Display range
initialization)
Description
Via upper end and lower end entry to set the display range.
Input range is 0 to 100Div, ensure upper end > lower end.
Restore upper and lower value of display position to initial value.
"Overlap on the screen" Clicking and all waveforms are overlapped.

"Parallel layout in area"
Clicking and all waveforms are overlapped in parallel.
"Apply to all devices with The settings in the "Display range" tab are applied to all device waveforms
same data length"
with the same data size.
"OK"
Close the "Display setting" dialog box after application of the settings.
"Cancel"
Cancel the settings and close the "Display setting" dialog box.
"Update"
"Scale" tab.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Item
Scale
Description
Display/hide the scale on the left side of waveform.
Display
The scale is always displayed.
Selecting waveforms
Scale is displayed only for the selected waveform.
only
Hide
Scale is not displayed.
Y-axis scale interval
For the setup of scaling digit spacing.
"Apply to all waveforms" Clicking and the scale settings are applied to all the waveforms.
Scale within chart
For the scaling of timing chart.
Display
The scale is always displayed.
Selecting waveforms
Scale is displayed only for the selected waveform.
only
Hide
Scale is not displayed.
"apply to all waveforms" Clicking and the scale settings are applied to all the waveforms.
9-65
Item
Scale shared within chart
Overlap display of
scales
Description
For the setup of display mode and spacing for scale overlap.
A united scaling is adopted by all the waveform in the display area.
For all the waveforms, scaling is displayed at the same relative position. In case
of waveform overlap, the waveform of the device selected is displayed on the top
side (display spacing is set according to display spacing in X-direction).
Parallel display scale

X-axis display interval
All the scales are displayed at the same time.

Set display spacing on the scale in diagram.
"OK"
"Cancel"
(Update)
"Common" tab.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Item
Sixe of thickness
Description
Set the line thickness of the waveform to be displayed.
All thin lines
Use a thin line to display all waveforms.
Select only thick lines
Only set the waveform line of the selected device to thick line.
All thick lines
Display all waveforms with thick line.

The number of frames with time axis setting (horizontal) and the number of
X() Div
frame unit samples.

Set the number of frames to be displayed along time axis (horizontal) in
The number of grids
waveform display field.

Setting range: 10 to 100
pts/Div
Y() Div
The number of girds
9-66
Select the number of samples of every Div (1 frame).

Alternatively, you can click "Display" -> "Time axis zoom in"/"Time axis zoom out".
For the setup of number of frames on the vertical axis.
Set the number of frames displayed vertically in waveform display field.
Setting range: 10 to 100
Item
Description
Display/hide trigger Line of word device.
Trigger Line
This can be set up only when word device is set in trigger.
Display
Display Trigger Line.
Hide
Trigger Line is not displayed.
Color
Display color other than waveform.
Background
Set background color outside waveform display part.
Chart
Set background color of waveform display part.
Grid
Set frame color of waveform display field.
Character
Set character color in timing curve display area.
"White background
Set background of waveform display part to white, automatically set all
mode "
waveform colors.
"Black background
Set background color of waveform display part to black, automatically set all
mode "
waveform colors.
"OK"
Close the "Display setting" dialog box after application of the settings..
"Cancel"
(update)
9
"Cascade waveforms(O)" to display all device waveforms in
folding method.
Display waveform in parallel

"Tile waveforms (L)" to display all device waveforms in parallel
and vertical way.
Time scale zoom in

"Time scale zoom in (U)" to zoom in the waveform display along
time scale (horizontal).

Other procedure
Alt
+ ->
Time scale zoom out

"Time scale zoom out (D)", to zoom out the waveform display
along time scale (horizontal).

Other procedure
Alt
+ <-
9-67
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Overlap waveform display
Number of grids zoom in/out

Set the number of vertical and lateral frames in waveform display field.
Zoom in vertical grid

"Number of grids zoom in/out (V)"
"Vertical zoom in(T)" to
zoom in the waveform display (reduce the number of grids displayed).

Other procedure
Ctrl +
Zoom out vertical grid

"Vertical zoom out (B)" to
zoom out vertical waveform grids.

Other procedure
Ctrl +
Zoom in horizontal grid
"Horizontal zoom in (R)" to
"Horizontal zoom out (L)"
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
zoom in horizontal waveform grids.

Other procedure
Ctrl +
Zoom out horizontal grid

From the menu, select "View (V)
to zoom out horizontal waveform frames (increase the number of displayed grids).
Other procedure
Ctrl +
Zoom in/zoom out display range

Set display range of the waveform selected.
Zoom in display range

"Display range zoom in/out (V)"
to zoom in the waveform display range (reduce display width).

Other procedure
9-68
Alt
"Display range zoom in (T)"
Zoom out display range

"Display range zoom out
(T)" zoom out the waveform display range (increase display width).
Other procedure
Alt
Move up display range

"Display range up (U)" to
move up the display range while the waveform display width is not changed.
Other procedure
Shift +
Move down display range

"Display range down (D)" to
move down the display range while the waveform display width is not changed.
Other procedure
Shift +
"Auto adjust display range (Q)" to optimize the display range of
selected device.
Note
Word device can only be optimized.
Display date and time on the horizontal axis.

"Display date and time on scale (Y)" to display date on the
horizontal axis.
Note
Only the data read from "Read tracking data in PLC" can display date.
"Read internal traced data in LPC", Page 9-71
Display cursor
The cursor is displayed in waveform display field.
Set the cursor in waveform display field, display the value and time, distance between Cursor A - B, etc.
on sample information display field.
9-69
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Auto adjust display range
Hide cursor
Other procedure
"Cursor (R)"
"Hide cursor (N)", and the cursor will be hidden.
Show cursor
"Cursor (R)"
"Show cursor (V)", and the Cursor A. B will be
"Cursor (R)"
Select Cursor A (A)", and the Cursor A will be
"Cursor (R)"
"Select Cursor B (B)", and the Cursor B will be
"Cursor (R)"
"Select Cursor AB (C)", and the Cursor A&B will
displayed.
Other procedure
Select Cursor A
selected.
Other procedure
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Select Cursor B
selected.
Other procedure
Cursor A&B choice

be selected.
Other procedure
"Communications setting (C)" Menu
Communication setting
Monitor real-time timing curve and set PLC communication.
From the menu, select "Comm setting (C)"
"Comm setting (T)", display communication setting
dialog box.
For details of communication setting, see
9-70
Start tracing.
Start tracing the registered device.
"Start tracing (S)", start communicating with PLC, start
tracing registration device.

Other procedure
F5
Stop tracing
Other procedure
"Stop tracing (E)" to stop tracing.
Shift + F5
Pause tracing
"Pause tracing (I)" to pause tracing. To re-trace, select
"Start tracing (S)".

Other procedure
F6
Read internal traced data in LPC

Use Real-time Chart Monitor to read tracking data saved using trace function of KV-5000/3000.
"Read traced data in PLC (P)", will read tracking data
from PLC.
For details of
"KV-5000/3000 trace function, please see "2-3 Logging/Tracing" in the "KV-5000/
3000 Series User Manual".

Note
The tracing data read out cannot be traced via Real-time Chart Monitor.
9-71
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
"Help (H)" Menu
Display user manual

From the menu, select "Help (H)"
"User Manual (H)", Adobe Reader will start, display PDF manual
of Real-time Chart Monitor.

Other procedure
F1
Display version information of real-time chart monitor

From the menu, select "Help (H)"
"Version information (A)", the "Version information" dialog box of
Real-time Chart Monitor is displayed.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
9-72
9-7 High-speed Time Chart Monitor

High-speed Time Chart Monitor is a function for monitoring the states of external I/O and bit devices in
individual scans. This section describes High-speed Time Chart Monitor functions.
Note
High-speed Time Chart Monitor can be used only when the model is "KV-1000" and "KV-700".
Features of High-speed Time Chart Monitor

High-speed Time Chart Monitor display differs from the registration monitor time chart display in that
data can be collected in real time at almost the scan time of the PLC.
Trigger conditions can be set to facilitate setting of traps during debugging.
Up to 16384 data items can be collected and saved to file.
The bit pattern search function enables searching in time charts by ON/OFF conditions.
Display High Speed Time Chart Monitor

The High-speed Time Chart Monitor is started up with Registration Monitor displayed. For details, see
"High-speed Time Chart Monitor", Page 9-31.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Names and Functions of Parts in High-speed Time Chart Monitor

(14)Trigger mode selection switch
(4)Cursor A
(6)Trigger point
(13)Trigger
attribute guide
(3)Monitor
registration contact
(2)Display ratio setting
(12)Trigger
attribute setup
(5)Cursor B
(21)Monitor start
switch
(20)Recording cycle
(18)Sampling
condition setup
(22)Fixed scan time
running setup
(1)Chart diagram
(16)Trigger condition
(23)File
save/
read switch
(15)Data size
trigger cursor
(7)Sampling
information display
(17)Search trigger
condition
(19)Lost area
(10)Scroll switch
(11)Cursor jump switch
(24)Close switch
(9)Current position display
(8)Cursor setup switch
(1) Time chart

The collected time chart is displayed as white lines. The lower line indicates OFF and the upper line indicates ON.
The time on the gradation varies according to the setting of (20) "Recording cycle" set in the pulldown list.
(2) Display ratio setting

Specify the dot width of the gradation that is displayed for the time chart.
The display ratio can be set within the range x1 to x9 (default: x2). Set a large value when the device to
be monitored is to be turned ON and OFF within a short time, and small value when the device is to be
turned ON and OFF within a long time to facilitate viewing of time charts.
9-73
(3) Monitor registration contact

Indicates the contacts to be monitored on High-speed Time Chart Monitor.
Contacts to be monitored cannot be registered in the High-speed Time Chart Monitor window.
Contacts are registered in the Registration Monitor window. To change the details of
registered contacts, the High-speed Time Chart Monitor window must be closed, the contacts
to be monitored in the Registration Monitor window must be registered again, and the Highspeed Time Chart Monitor window must be opened again.
(4) Cursor A
This cursor is displayed in yellow.
By combining this cursor with Cursor B, you can check the timing between registered devices and response delay.
There are two ways of moving this cursor, by moving the mouse to the cursor position and dragging or
by turning (8) "Cursor setting switch" ON and clicking the move destination.
Set cursor setting switch to
ON, move mouse and click.
Move the mouse to the

cursor position and drag.
The cursor position and distance between cursors A and B

can be checked at (7) "Sampling information display" below.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
(5) Cursor B
This cursor is displayed in blue.
By combining this cursor with Cursor A, you can check the timing between registered devices and response delay.
There are two ways of moving this cursor, by moving the mouse to the cursor position and dragging or
by turning (8) "Cursor setting switch" ON and clicking the move destination.
Set cursor setting switch to
ON, move mouse and click.
Move the mouse to the

cursor position and drag.
The cursor position and distance between cursors A and B

can be checked at (7) "Sampling information display" below.
(6)Trigger point
This point is displayed in white.
Trigger point must be displayed during trigger collection.
The absolute position of the trigger point and the date it was applied can
be checked at (7) "Sampling information display" below.
9-74
(7) Collected information display

This displays the current time chart information.
Top :Expresses the position* at the left edge of the currently displayed time chart.*
A
: Expresses the position* of Cursor A. *
B
: Expresses the position* of Cursor B. *
|A-B|
: Expresses the distance and time between Cursor A and Cursor B.
Lost
: Displays the number of lost data from collected 32 collecting point data.
Max
: Displays the maximum number of lost data.
CycleTime : Expresses the mean value of the scan time for each 32 collecting points.
TrigPoint : Displays the position where the trigger* was applied*.
"X/XX/XX XX : XX : XX": Displays the date that the trigger was applied.
* The position is displayed taking the point where the monitor start switch was pressed as position 0.
Note
An error of several ms occurs in the time displayed by |A-B| depending on the lost
collecting data and the display performance of the PC. Also, accurate times are not
displayed for roughly the first 30 scans' worth of data.
9
(8) Cursor setting switch
ON and OFF.
Pressing switch A
: Clicking on the chart display screen moves Cursor A to

that clicked point.
Pressing switch B
: Clicking on the chart display screen moves Cursor B to

that clicked point.
Pressing switchesA+B : Clicking on the chart display moves cursors A and B

with the A-B distance intact.
No switch pressed
: Clicking on the chart display screen does not result in any

change.
(9) Current position view

Displays the position of the currently displayed data in the overall collected chart. The display position
can be changed by using the scroll bar at the bottom of the view.
Band (gray): Currently displayed area

Line (yellow): Position of Cursor A
Line (blue): Position of Cursor B
Line (white): Trigger point
(10) Scroll switch

This switch scrolls the time chart screen. Move the selected cursor when (8) "Cursor setting switch" is ON.
: Scrolls the time chart screen one half screen to the left.
: Scrolls the time chart screen one dot to the left.
: Scrolls the time chart screen one dot to the right.
: Scrolls the time chart screen one half screen to the right.
9-75
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
This switch sets display and movement of cursors A and B. Each press of this switch toggles between
(11)Cursor jump switch

This switch jumps the cursor to the Cursor A, Cursor B or cursor trigger position.
The cursor cannot be made to jump if there is no cursor.
(12)Trigger attribute setup

Set the ON/OFF attributes when the trigger for a contact registered to a Monitor is used.
: Not set (not used as trigger condition)
: ON setting (Trigger is applied when ON)
: OFF setting (Trigger is applied when OFF)
(13)Trigger attribute guide

This is a guide for the trigger attribute switches set in (12) "Trigger attribute setup".
: Not set (not used as trigger condition)
: ON setting (Trigger is applied when ON)
: OFF setting (Trigger is applied when OFF)
(14)Trigger mode selection switch
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
This switch selects whether or not to apply a trigger. When the trigger condition matches with a trigger
applied, data collecting is automatically stopped after the data size specified with the (15) "Data after
trigger" cursor is reached.
A pressed button state indicates that a trigger is applied.
: Trigger is applied
:Trigger is not applied.
(15) "Data after trigger" cursor

Set the data size to be collected after a preset trigger is applied.
When the cursor is at the right edge, collecting is automatically stopped after roughly 16000
data are collected.
When the cursor is at the left edge, collecting is automatically stopped after roughly 250
data are collected.
The default cursor position is the left edge.
Up to 16,384 data can be collected in a single trigger. The more the cursor closes to the right,
the less data collected,
(16) Trigger condition

Set the trigger conditions when (14) "Trigger mode selection switch" is set to ON.
AND
: Trigger is applied when all conditions match.
OR
: Trigger is applied when one of the condition is satisfied.
(17) Search trigger condition

Searches positions that match the conditions set at (12) "Trigger attribute setup" and (16) "Trigger conditions".
: Searches leftwards.
: Searches rightwards.
9-76
(18) Set collecting conditions
"Record failed area" button

When this button is set to ON, the range of lost data is displayed blank. When this button is set to OFF, the
time chart is displayed with lost data areas ignored.
With the High-speed Time Chart Monitor, data is sometimes lost due to the processing capabilities of the PC in
use or the scan time of the KV-1000/700. Use this button to set whether or not to display lost data on screen.
If lost areas are ignored, the number of valid data items increases as only data that could be
collected is displayed.
"Disable waveform" button

When this button is set to ON, the waveform is not displayed during collecting. As the waveform is not drawn
on screen, PC performance increases, which results in less lost data compared with normal operation.
(19) Lost area

Displays the range of lost data as a blank when the "Record failed area" button is set to ON.
(20) Recording cycle

Sets the logging cycle of the time chart.
Select from one of seven cycles: SCAN, 1ms, 2ms, 5ms, 10ms, 20ms, and 50ms.
When "SCAN" is set, data is collected at the scan time of the KV-1000/700 that is being collected.
When a logging cycle other than "SCAN" is set, data is collected at the set time if the
set collecting time is longer than the actual scan time. If the set collecting time is shorter
than the actual scan time, data is collected at the scan time.
If "1ms" is set as the logging cycle when the scan time is 2ms, data is collected every
"2ms" scan time as the logging cycle set here is shorter than the scan time.
(21) Monitor start switch

This switch starts and stops monitoring. Each time pressing this switch toggles start
and stop.
(22) Set Fixed Scan Time Run

This setting runs the KV-1000/700 at a fixed scan time.
Normally, the scan time increases and decreases according to the execution state of
instructions and I/O ON/OFF states. When a time chart is displayed with the logging cycle
set to "SCAN", the time per gradation loses uniformity. So, to perform measurement at a
uniform time, set Fixed Scan Time Run to enabled. This ensures that the ladder program
is always executed at a uniform time with a wait applied even if the ladder execution time
is set to a fast value. Measurement is possible at equidistant intervals even if the logging
cycle is set to "SCAN" by setting fixed scan time running to enabled.
Set the fixedtime scan to a value faster than the actual scan time. If a lower value is set, the ladder program is
executed at the actual scan time. Also, if the processing speed of the PC used cannot keep up with the scan
time, resulting in lost data, data loss can be suppressed by applying a wait to the scan time in the fixed scan
time running setting.
Note
This setting is cleared by turning the KV-1000/700 ON and OFF, or by switching between
the Run and the PROG modes.
Also, this setting becomes invalid if the ladder program contained the fixed scan time setting.
9-77
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Example
Enable Fixed Scan Time Run setting by the following procedure.
Click the "Fixed scan" button.

The "Set fixed scan" dialog box is displayed.
Mark the "Use fixed scan time func".

checkbox, and enter the scan time.
Select this checkbox.

Enter the scan time in
ms.
Click the "Set to PLC" button.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
This enables the fixed scan time function.

To disable the fixed scan time function, uncheck the "Use fixed scan time func" checkbox,
and click the "Set to PLC" button.
(23) File save/read switch

This switch can be used to save/read collected time charts.
For details on operation,
Note
"Saving Time Charts", "Reading time charts".
Time charts cannot be saved or read while they are being recorded. Before saving or
reading a time chart, wait for execution of High-speed Time Chart Monitor to stop.
(24) Close switch

This switch closes the High-speed Time Chart Monitor window.
9-78
Saving Time Charts

Save time charts by the following procedure.
Clicking the "Save" button.

and the "Save As" dialog box is displayed.
Specify the folder (directory) and file name.

Specify
the
folder
(directory).
Specify "KVS
time
chart file(*.tcf)" as it is
as the file type.
Item
Explanation
Specify the folder (directory) in which the time chart is saved. Normally, the project
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Save in(I)
folder to which the currently monitored ladder is to be saved opens.
File name(N)
Enter the name of the time chart to be saved.
Files of type(T)
Specify "KVS time chart file(*.tcf)".
The file is automatically appended with the extension ".tcf" when the file name is set.
Reading time charts

Read time charts by the following procedure.
Clicking the "Read" button.

and the "Open" dialog box is displayed.
Can't read in file.

Specify the file in which
the time chart is saved.
Specify "KVS
time
chart file(*.tcf)" as it is
as the file type.
Item
Explanation
Save in(I)
Specify the folder (directory) in which the time chart is to be saved. Normally, the
File name(N)
Enter the name of the time chart to be saved.
Files of type(T)
Specify "KVS time chart file(*.tcf)".
project folder to which the currently monitored ladder is to be saved opens.
9-79
Time charts can also be specified by entering the file name and by selecting the time
chart to read with the mouse from the file list.
Time charts can be read even with Monitor offline.
Registration Monitor must be opened before opening Time Chart Monitor to read a file
even if a time chart is being monitored.
Saving time charts as bitmaps

Save the currently displayed time chart in bitmap format by the following procedure.
Note
The time chart in the currently displayed range is saved in bitmap format. Time charts
outside the currently displayed range are not saved.
Click the file Save/Load "Save" button.

The "Save As" dialog box is displayed.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Specify the folder (directory) and file name to the save the time chart to.
Specify the folder (directory) to save to.
Select
"bitmap
file
(*.bmp) file" as the file

type.
Item
Explanation
Save in(I)
Specify the folder (directory) in which the bitmap file is to be saved. Normally, the
File name(N)
Enter the name of the bitmap file to be saved.
Files of type(T)
Specify "bitmap(*.bmp)".
project folder containing the ladder program being monitored opens.
9-80
9-8 Unit Monitor

Unit Monitor differs from the Registration Monitor and Batch Monitor in that it displays relay and DM
values optimally matched to the unit to monitor. This section describes how to view Unit Monitor and
how to operate Unit Monitor.
Features of Unit Monitor

The Unit Monitor has the following functions:
DMs and relays currently assigned to each unit can be displayed in the state that they were originally
registered.
Each unit has provided display formats and layout templates for convenient monitoring.
The selected unit can be monitored simply by selecting the unit to monitor without having to worry
about relay or DM assignment status.
Displaying Unit Monitor
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Monitor/Simulator (N)"
"Unit monitor (U)", select monitor unit, click
"display" button.
In the "Unit settings" workspace, select the unit to be monitored, right click, and select Unit Monitor from the
menu.
Note
Unit Monitor can only be selected from Monitor or edit menu.
About the "Unit Monitor" window
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
The following describes the Unit Monitor windows for each of the 16-, 32- and 64-point I/O Units. For
details on unit functions and how to set these functions, refer to the User's Manual for the respective
unit.
9-81
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
"Unit Monitor(U)"
9-8 Unit Monitor
16-, 32- and 64-point Unit Monitor

(3)Comment display area
(4)Unit information
(9)Channel selector tab

(8) Input time constant
(1) Start relay Number
(2) ON/OFF state display
(5) Relay Number
(7)
(6) Word display value
Name
(1) Start relay Number
"Display
format
selector" button
Function
Displays the leading relay Number assigned to the selected unit. The Number
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
reflects the content set on the Unit Editor.

The leading relay Number is displayed for each channel (16 points).
(2) ON/OFF state display Displays the ON/OFF state of the relay.
OFF: Gray
ON:Blue for an input area and green for an output unit
(3)Comment display area Displays the device comment of the relay. Only one comment is displayed as the type
of comment.
(4)Unit information
(5) Relay Number
Displays the information (unit connection Number and PLC name) of the selected unit.
Displays which relay Number (nth relay Number) the relay is starting from the
leading relay Number at "(1) Leading relay Number".
(6) Word display value
This area is for displaying the value expressed in words for relays on each channel.
(7) "Display format
This button selects one of three annotation formats for "word display value": "DEC
selector" button
(unsigned)", "DEC (signed)" and "Hex".
(8) Input time constant
This area displays the input time constant that has been set on Unit Editor.
When an output unit is being monitored, "---" is displayed for the output unit as an
input time constant does not exist.
(9)Channel selector tab
This tab switches the channel to be monitored. For "00 to 31", the lower two
channels of a 64-point unit are displayed, and for "32 to 63" the upper two
channels are displayed.
For special unit monitor, please refer to every special unit manual.
Important
The "(8) Input time constant" setting cannot be changed on Unit Monitor.
When the "(8) Input time constant" setting has been changed while monitoring the
access window, the new setting will not be reflected in the Unit Monitor display. To
reflect the new setting in the Unit Monitor display, close and open the Unit Monitor
window again.
9-82
9-9 Batch Change

Batch Change batch-rewrites device values on the PLC and saves them to file. This section describes
how to operate the Batch Change window.
About "Batch change" Window

For how to display "Batch change window", see
"Batch Change Window", Page 9-32.
Create New CSV File
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
9
New CSV File(N)
In "Batch change" window, create the CSV file to be used.

From the menu in "Batch change" window, select "File (F)"
Note
"New CSV file (N)" to create a CSV file.
Before you create a new file, please save all the currently opened files
Limits for "Batch change" window

"Batch change" window with the following limits.
Exponent and indirect reference device cannot be used.
Timer (T), counter (C), high-speed counter (CTH), high-speed counter comparer (CTC) can only use
current value (cannot use contact and setting value).
Device is the model being edited, only the existent can become destination.
For DM, EM, FM, W, ZF, C, T, CTH, CTC and CM devices, do not access using BIN 1BIT. Besides,
when display format is set to 32 bit, Device Number shall adopt even number.
When saved to memory card, T/C/CTC/CTH cannot be used.
9-83
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
File(F)
9-9 Batch Change
Open CSV File
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"File(F)"
"Open CSV File(O)"
"Open CSV file (O)" to display the
"Open file" dialog box.

Select CSV file, and click "Open".
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Save CSV File
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"File(F)"
"Save CSV file(S)"
"Save to CSV file (S)", will save the file
being edited.
Note
"Save to CSV file" cannot be selected when new file is being edited.
Save the CSV File by Another Name.
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
dialog box.
Save the file being edited as.
9-84
Save the CSV file as.(A)
"Save CSV file as(A)", open "Save as"
9-9 Batch Change
Read Memory Card
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
Read memory card(R)
"Read memory card (R)", open
"Memory card" dialog box.

Specify driver and folder of CSV file saved in "Batch change" window.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Can't read CSV file that not stored in "Batch change" window.
Write Memory Card
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File (F)
Write memory card(R)
"Write memory card (Z)", open "Memory
card" dialog box.

Specify the driver and folder where the destination memory card is saved.
When error appears in the data edited in "Batch change" window, the following dialog box appears.
When selecting "NO", will return to the edit image of "Batch change" window.
9-85
9-9 Batch Change
Close File
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File(F)
From the menu in "Batch change" window, select "File(F)"
Close file(C)
"Close file (C)", close the file being
edited.
When changing the data being edited, following dialog box appears.
Select "No", abandon current
data edited.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Exit Window
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
File(F)
Exit (X)
"Exit (C)", will exit window.
When changing the edited data, confirmation dialog box is displayed.
Cross Reference
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Edit (E)
cross reference (F)
Select the device edited in "Batch change" window, from the menu, select "Edit (E)"
reference (F)", cross reference will be generated in the output window of KV STUDIO.
For details of verification, see
9-86
"Cross Reference", Page 5-14.
"Cross
9-9 Batch Change
Undo
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Edit (E)
Restore (U)
Cancel latest operation of "Batch change" window and return to original status.
Note
"Undo", "Redo" in "Batch change" window is initial state, fails to be selected.

To enable "Undo", "Redo", from the menu of KV STUDIO, select "Tool (T)"
(O)", check the "Enable Undo/Redo in batch change dialog" checkbox
"Option
in system
setting tab.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Redo
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Edit(E)"
"Redo(R)"
Use "Redo (U)" in "Batch change" window to redo the cancelled operation.
If cancel fails, the menu becomes grey, which means unselected.
Select All
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Edit (E)
select all (A)
Select all cells in "Batch change" window.

"Select all (A)".
9-87
9-9 Batch Change
Cut/Copy/Paste Selected Range
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Edit(E)
Cut selected range(T)

Copy selected range(C)
Paste selected range(P)
"Cut" or "copy" the cell selected in "Batch change" window, execute "paste".
Delete Rung
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Edit(E)"
"Delete Rung(D)"
In "Batch change" window, delete the line containing the selected cell.
"Delete Rung (D)".
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Delete Selected Range.
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Edit(E)
Delete selected range(Y)
Delete the cell of the selected range via "Batch change" window.
"Delete selected range (Y)".
Sort by Device Sequence
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Edit (E)
Sort by devices (S)
Via "Batch change" window, sort the data being edited according to the sequence of the device.
"Sort by devices(S)".
Before
9-88
After
9-9 Batch Change
Read All Items from PLC
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
PLC (P)
reads all items from PLC (R)
Read the current value of all data edited in "Batch change" window from PLC.
From the menu, select "PLC (P)"
Note
"Read all items from PLC (R)".
Before operation, please set KV STUDIO and PLC to communication enabled status.
Read Selected Range from PLC
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
PLC (P)
Read selected range from PLC(P)
Read the current value of device containing the selected cell line in "Batch change" window from PLC.
Write All Items to PLC
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
PLC (P)
Write PLC into all items (W)
Write the current value of all data edited in "Batch change" window into PLC.
Note
"Write PLC into all items (W)".
Write Selected Range to PLC
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
PLC(P)
Write selected range to PLC(Q)
Write current device value on the line of the cell selected contained in "Batch change" window into PLC.
Note
"Write the selected range into PLC (Q)".
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Note
"Read selected range from PLC (P)".
9-89
9-9 Batch Change
Batch Insert
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Add device(D)
Batch insert (B)
Specify range and insert the device into "Batch change" window in batch.
From the menu, select "Add device(D)"
"Batch insert (B)" to open the "Batch insertion" dialog box.
Item
Explanation
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Select the device type to be entered in batch.
Click to display the drop-down
menu.
Selection of device
The type of selected devices varies with the model supported by the
project being edited.
Specify leading Number of devices entered in batch.
Leading Number
Specify bit device, when display format is " BIN 1BIT", specify using bit
unit, specify using channel unit in other cases.
Specify the number of devices to be entered in batch.
number
When the display formats "DEC 32bit" "DEC 32bit" "HEX 32bit"
and "FLOAT" are selected, the number of devices to be inserted
equal to the number of devices *2 word units.
Max. number of data

Display format
Maximal number of specified devices that can be inserted will be automatically

stored into the number.
Specify display format of devices entered in batch.
Click to display the
drop-down list.
Insert Rung
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Device add (D)

Insert a blank rung into the specified rung.
From the menu, select "Add device (D)"
9-90
"Insert rung (L)".
Insert rung (L)
9-9 Batch Change
Increment Insert
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Add devices (D)
Insert increment (L) Ctrl + I
Insert the device that adds +1 (or +2) to the previous Device Number
From the menu, select "Add devices (D)"
Item
"Insert increment (I)".

Description
Module/macro*2
Select the module/macro identical to the previous device.
Device
Insert Device Number that adds +1 *1 to the previous Device Number
Current value
Copy the value identical to the previous device.
Display format
Select the display format identical to the previous device.
*1
When display formats of the previous device are "DEC 32bit" " DEC 32bit" "HEXDEC 32bit"
"float", add +2 to Device Number and insert.
*2
It is valid only when the models "KV-5000", "KV-3000", " KV-1000 " are selected.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
9-91
9-10 Online Edit

This section describes the Online Edit feature for changing thePLC ladder program during monitoring.
Overview
Online Edits allow you to change the ladder program directly on the KV STUDIO monitor screen. These handy
functions allow you to change simple programs or perform site adjustment during final debugging during programming.
Online Edit Features

The features of line edit are as follows:
The ON/OFF states of devices and changes in values can be checked in real time in the same way
as the monitor screen even while in the Online Edit.
-> Debugging while checking the operating status of devices is possible in real time.
The background of the positions where editing is required is marked blue, allowing you to identify the
problematic cells at a glance.
-> Changes can be performed easily, for example, if devices are found not to be operating normally
as a result of a change.
All screens can be edited while in Online Edit.
-> Even when setting interlocks to two or more circuits, editing is possible as if you are in the Editor
mode without switching the edit circuit.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Cautions Upon Using the Online Edit Function
Caution
Import
9-92
As the Online Edit function changes the program while the PLC is in the Run mode,
equipment may be seriously damaged or personnel may be seriously injured if Online
Edit is used in the wrong way. Ensure the following to be checked before you start.
Before using Online Edit, ensure no injury or damage takes place even if an accident occurred.
Do not add circuits (e.g. Execution Condition B contact circuit) immediately after a
program is transferred. Otherwise, the machine may be broken.
Do not delete ON outputs. Otherwise, the output may be kept in the ON state.
If monitoring is forcibly ended due to a PC error during Online Editing or transfer of the ladder
program, the ladder programs cannot be transferred to PLC
The ON/OFF states and values of devices currently monitored in Online Edit are displayed
based on the ladder program (programs currently running on) before Online Edit is started.
Before transfer, the operation is such that program states currently being edited by Online
Editing are not reflected.
To run on a program after adding or changing by Online Editing, transfer must be performed.
Writing in the RUN mode cannot be performed when macro instructions are added or deleted
during Online Editing.
Local device assignment cannot be performed with Online Edit. Instead, you need to return to
the edited program and assign again.
9-10 Online Edit
Start Online Edit
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Start Online Edit(O)" F10
"Start Online Edit(O)" from menu.
The title bar on KV STUDIO changes to "Online Edit" from "Edit" to indicate that Online Edit is active.
Other procedure
Note
From drop-down list of mode column, select "Online edit".
When the project being edited is different from the project stored in PLC, fail to transfer
Please transfer the project being
edited or temporarily switch to monitor mode, then switch to Online Editor mode.
Continual real-time monitoring can be made on ON/ OFF status and value of every device in
Online Edit.
Creating the Ladder Program

About creating the Ladder Program, see
"EDIT", Page 5-1.
The background color of the cell added or changed is displayed in light blue, which means program
change.
"Clear Changed Background Color", Page 6-31
9-93
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
from editor mode to direct Online Editor mode.
9-10 Online Edit
Transfer Online Edit
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Transfer Online Edit(F)" F11
Transfer Online Edit Ladder to PLC.

"Online Editor transfer (F)", the Ladder will be
transmitted to PLC body.

If an error is found in the program during program conversion, the message "Conversion
error" is displayed, and transfer is aborted. Check the details of the error displayed on the
output window, correct the ladder program, and transfer the ladder program again.
Caution
Writing the ladder program while the PLC is in the Run mode may lead to a
serious hazard depending on the states of the control devices connected to
the PLC. Take sufficient care when transferring the ladder program.
"About Writing in the Run Mode" in the KV-1000 Series Programming
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Manual
9-94
9-10 Online Edit
Setup Online Edit
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Setup Online Edit(J)" F12
The background of the cell added or changed via Online Edit is displayed in light blue, indicating that a
change needs to be made. Set time and display using auto clear change specification.
Note
Online editor setting can be set only when KV STUDIO is in monitor mode or Online
Editor mode.
"Setup online edit(J)" from the menu.
It displays "Setup option" dialog box.
Select change program, display background color, clear timing.

Clear background color according to the timing indicted by the selected checkbox.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Item
Explanation
Change to monitor mode after online edit
Transfer Ladder edited using Online Editor, will automatically
transfer.
switch to monitor mode.
Auto(Monitor -> Online Edit)*
background color.
When Monitor mode is switched to Editor mode, the
Auto(Monitor -> Edit)*
background color is cleared.
Auto(Online Edit -> Monitor)*

*
When Monitor mode is switched to Online Edit mode, clear
When Online Edit mode is switched to Monitor mode, the

background color is cleared.
This cannot be selected when the model is "KV-5000" and "KV-3000".
Note
If the checkbox is not selected, the background color of program cannot be cleared.
So, background color shall be manually cleared. To manually clear setting, select
"View (V)"
"Clear background color (H)" from the menu.
"Clear Changed Background Color", Page 6-31
After setting up, click "OK".

Close "Setup option" dialog box.
9-95
9-11 Simulator
The chapter describes application method of simulation program and these functions.
Overview
"Simulator" simulates operation of ladder programs you create on Editor without actually connecting to
a PLC. Simulator allows you to perform the following operations:
Check the operating status of ladder programs in the Ladder Monitor or Registration Monitor
(time chart) or in real time in the Batch Monitor.
Simulate continuous scan/continuous step or single step/single scan by various execution
methods
Undo functions such as reverse step and reverse continuous step are available to enable
efficient debugging.
Easily change the setting values or current values of timers, counters or devices.
Simulator Restrictions
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Common restrictions
Extension Unit operations cannot be simulated.
The high-speed counter is not supported on Simulator.
The direct clock pulse function is not supported on Simulator.
The positioning control function is not supported on Simulator.
The RCOM instruction is not supported on Simulator.
After executing WTIME instruction, error is also detected. But timer of PLC don't change.
Operation of the interrupt program is subject to the following restrictions:
Item
INT CTC0, INT CTC3
INT CR3013, INT CR3113
INT R00000 to INT R00003
Explanation
Interrupt program does not run.
Interrupt is enabled, and is executed by END processing at the scan
where the interrupt was generated.
The scan time is longer than in actual operation as simulation is performed on Windows.
Attention should be paid to this when setting up Timer.
The scan time display varies depending on the type of PC even when running the same ladder
program as the same operation as the PLC is simulated internally on the PC you are using.
9-96
9-11 Simulator
Control relays and control memories supported by Simulator

The table below summarizes the control relay and control memories that run on Simulator.
Supported control relays (CR)

Device
CR2002
CR2003
CR2004
CR2005
CR2006
CR2007
CR2008
CR2009
CR2010
CR2011
CR2012
CR2600
CR2601
CR2602
Status
Normal ON
Normal OFF
10ms clock pulse (duty cycle 50%)
100ms clock pulse (duty cycle 50%)
1s clock pulse (duty cycle 50%)
A scanning cycle is cut off when running is started
A scanning cycle is initiated when running is started
ON when the operation result is negative or overflow
ON when the operation result is 0
ON when the operation result is positive
ON when operation error
Rising edge
INT0 interrupt polarity
Rising edge
CR2610
CR2613
CR2614
CR2702
CR2703
CR2814
CR2815
OFF
ON
Rising edge
INT3Interrupt polarity
Falling
Both edges
ON
ON
Falling
Both edges
ON
ON
Falling
Both edges
edge
CR2606
OFF
ON
Rising edge
ON
ON
Falling
Both edges
edge
CR2608
OFF
ON
Rising edge
ON
ON
Falling
Both edges
edge
CR2610
OFF
ON
Rising edge
ON
ON
Falling
Both edges
edge
CR2612
OFF
ON
Rising edge
ON
ON
Falling
Both edges
edge
CR2614
OFF
ON
Rising edge
CR2701
ON
edge
CR2604
CR2615
CR2700
ON
Rising edge
CR2611
CR2612
OFF
CR2609
ON
edge
CR2602
CR2607
CR2608
ON
INT1 interrupt polarity
CR2605
CR2606
OFF
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
CR2604
Both edges
edge
CR2600
CR2603
Falling
ON
ON
Falling
Both edges
edge
CR2700
OFF
ON
Rising edge
ON
ON
Falling
Both edges
edge
CR2702
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Zero suppress setting for the DASC, FASC instructions

Omission of the "+" sign in setting up the DASC, FASC instructions
* CR devices other than the above are the same as internal auxiliary relays on the Simulator.
9-97
9-11 Simulator
Supported control memories (CM)

Device
CM00700
CM00701
CM00702
CM00703
CM00704
CM00705
CM00706
Function
(year)
(month)
(day)
Reading of calendar timer (PC
(hour)
setting date/time)
(Minute)
(s)
(week)
* CM devices other than the above do not function even if used on Simulator.
Device states when Simulator is stopped

Stopping continuous scanning in Simulator means that PLC is switched over from RUN mode to PROG
mode.
Each of the devices operate as follows when Simulator is stopped.
State
Device
KV-1000/700/700+M/
KV-5000/3000
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
R (Relay)
Power-off hold setting *1
Power-off hold setting *1
P16/10/16/24/40
MEMSW instruction setting *2
-
MR
Reset
LR
State holding.
CR2002
CR
: ON
CR2003 to CR2008
: State holding.
Other
: OFF
DM/EM/FM
State holding.
ZF
State holding.
State holding.
TM
0
Contacts
T
C
: OFF
Register end
:Current value is same as setting value.
Unregistered
: The current value is 0
Hold contact and current value
CTH
State holding.
CTC
State hold
State holding
CM
State holding
*1
*2
Set up Power-off Hold via the CPU system.
For details on the MEMSW instruction, please see
KV-5000/3000/1000 Series Instruction
Reference Manual.
9-98
9-11 Simulator
Device states when reset

Resetting Simulator clears all devices.
Each of the devices operate as follows when Simulator is stopped.
Device
RRelay
B
MR
LR
State
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CR2002
: ON
Other
: OFF
0
0
0
0
Contact
: OFF
Registration end :Current value is same as setting value.
Unregistered
: Current value is 0
Contact : OFF
current value : 0
current value :0
Contacts : OFF
0
0
CR
DM/EM/FM
ZF
W
TM
T
C
Starting Up and Exiting Simulator
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Simulator(L)" Ctrl + F2
How to start Simulator
"Simulator (L)".
Display Simulator image, and display the Ladder displayed in Editor.

Other procedure
Note
From the drop-down list of mode column, select simulator.
When a conversion error occurs, Simulator cannot be started. Please correct Ladder
error and start Simulator again.
How to exit Simulator

According to following steps, exit Simulator, and return to Editor.
Due to device value cleared, return to Editor. When Simulator is started again, device default value will
be restored.
Other procedure
Click
"Return to Editor(X)" from menu.
button.
Pres key+ F1 key

From the drop-down list of mode column, select editor.
9-99
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
CTH
CTC
Z
CM
9-11 Simulator
Starting up and Stopping Simulator
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
For details on continuous scan and stopping Simulator,
"Execute RUN/continuous Scan",
"PROGRAM/stop", Page 10-2
Names and Functions of Screen Parts
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
When Simulator is started up, the screen moves to the Simulator screen of the ladder program that was
being edited on Editor.
The Batch Monitor window and Registration Monitor window are also displayed if these monitor
windows were previously displayed.
mnemonics list
Batch monitor window
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
"Change device value"

window
The function for windows are as follows.

"Mnemonics List", Page 6-28
"Batch Monitoring", Page 9-46
"Register Monitor", Page 9-41
"Change device value" window, Page 9-39
Executing Simulator
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
This section describes how to execute Simulator.
Scan Execution
This section describes scan execution.
Outline of scan execution function

"Scan execution" refers to executing a program in single scans (cycles) at a time from initialization
There are two scan execution modes, "Continuous scanning" and "1 scan execution." Of these,
"Continuous scanning" is the same operation as "RUN" on a Monitor program.
The scan time or watchdog timer can be set, and current values or setting values can be changed.
Rung breaks are not applied during scan execution. Device breaks are applied only when conditions
are established in END processing.
9-100
9-11 Simulator
Continuous scanning
Execute the program continuously.
The state is same as the RUN mode of
PLC.Continuous scanning is normally used for
debugging and troubleshooting.
Execute program
For details on the Continuous scanning procedure,

"Execute Continuous Step", Page 10-3.
Repeated
scan once
Scan once
End process
Single scanning
Only one scanning cycle is performed by the ladder
program. When a single scanning is executed in the
continuous scanning mode, operation is stopped.
Executing a single scanning enables you to check
Execute program
operation involving detailed timing operation so
Scan once
that specific relays turn ON.

For details on the single scanning execution
procedure, please refer to the
End process
"Execute 1
Scan", Page 10-3.
BREAK setting
A "BREAK" is a function for stopping a ladder program at specified conditions during program operation.
Device BREAK is used to partially verify the state of operation or to discover buggy locations. About
BREAK, see
"Device Break Setting", Page 10-7.
Setting the wait time

The scan time during execution of Simulator changes according to the length of the ladder diagram and
the performance of the PC.
A too-short scanning time makes it difficult to perform debugging, and the scan time can be lengthened
by using the set wait time feature.
Setting the scan time

The scan time during Simulator execution can be set to any time.
The ladder program is simulated for each single scan by the preset scan time. This feature allows you
to simulate execution of ladder programs at a timing close to that of actual operation as simulation is
performed using the scan time of an actual device.
Setting the watchdog timer

A "watchdog timer" is for detecting arithmetic calculation blockages caused by PLC or program
abnormalities or when long programs are executed. Watchdog timers allow you to discover infinite
loops in ladder programs.
9-101
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
that ladder functions can be checked the moment
9-11 Simulator
Watchdog timer is set via simulator setting dialog box.

"Set up Simulator", Page 9-29
Step execution
This section describes step execution.
Overview
"Step execution" is the simulation of the ladder program one instruction at a time. During step execution,
the mnemonic list is displayed, and you can check the currently executing rung of the ladder program.
You can also view the operating status of programs from a specified input through to output by
specifying break conditions or setting breakpoints together with step execution. With programs
comprising a combination of multiple arithmetic operation instructions, this is useful for finding the
cause when results are in error even though correct values have been entered.
There are four execution modes: "continuous step," "1 step," "reverse continuous step," and "reverse 1 step."
The function for windows are as follows.
"Execute Continuous Step", Page 10-3

"Execute 1 Block", Page 10-4
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
"Execute 1 Step", Page 10-4

"Execute Reverse Continuous Step", Page 10-5
"Execute Reverse 1 Block", Page 10-5
"Execute reverse 1 step", Page 10-6
About the Mnemonic List window

When step execution is performed, the current position is scrolled and displayed matched to the step
execution speed as the values and ON/OFF states of devices successively change in the Ladder
Monitor window. The Mnemonic List window is also displayed, and the currently executing mnemonic
rung is displayed reversed.
Value of internal register at cursor position
ON/OFF state of cursor position :

ON status: OFF status
Execution rung cursor (yellow)

Displays the currently executing rung
in green.
Current cursor position
Displays the currently executing rung
reversed in green.
Break point (purple)

Displays the break point.
9-102
9-11 Simulator
Pausing/stopping program execution

Pause/stop scan execution and step execution.
About Pausing/stopping, see
"Pause", Page 10-6.
Reset
Return current values to their defaults.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
9-103
9-11 Simulator
MEMO
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
9-104
10
DEBUG
This chapter describes the functions of debug and how to use.
10-1
DEBUG
10-1 About Debugging Functions 10-2
10-1 About Debugging Functions

This sectifon describes each of the functions contained in the "Debug(D)" menu.
The functions are different under different KV STUDIO modes.
Please read "KV-5000 / 3000 series user manual" 3-12 programming skill ".
Warning
Debugging during monitoring may involve a considerable amount of danger

depending on the status of the control devices that are currently connected to
the PLC. Take sufficient care when executing debugging!
Execute RUN/continuous Scan

Monitor
Simulator
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Online edit
Debug(D)
RUN/cont. scan(R)
In this mode, the program is being executed.

Select "Debug(D)"
"RUN/cont. scan(R)" from menu. The mode changes to the run/continuous scan
execution mode.
10
TIP
When a single scan is executed in the continuous scan execution mode on Simulator,
DEBUG
program execution is paused.
Note
On Monitor, the mode cannot be set to the Run mode when the RUN/PROG selector
switch on the CPU Unit is set to PROG.
"KV-5000/3000 series Users Manual"
PROGRAM/stop
Monitor
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Simulator
Online edit
Debug(D)
Program/stop(P)
In this mode, program execution is stopped.

Select "Debug(D)"
TIP
10-2
"Program/stop(P)" from menu. In this mode, program execution is stopped.
When a single scan is executed in the stop mode on Simulator, program execution is paused.
Execute 1 Scan
Monitor
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Simulator
Debug(D)
Execute 1 scan(T) F9
Executes the ladder program for one scan only. When a single scan is executed in the continuous scan
execution mode, operation is paused.
This mode is handy for confirming operation one scan at a time.
Note
Only valid in interruption status.

When 1 scan is executed during step execution, the program is executed until
"END" or "ENDH" is found programmed in the final module of the execution
sequence from the current step.
When scan execution is performed, reverse step execution is no longer possible.
(when Simulator is executed)
"Execute reverse 1 step", Page 10-6, "Execute Reverse Continuous Step",
Page 10-5
When selecting "KV-700/700+M" "KV-P16" "KV-10(16)" "KV-24(40)", one single scan
is not possible in the monitor mode.
Simulator
DEBUG
Execute Continuous Step
10
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Debug(D)
Execute continuous step(S) Shift + F8
Single instructions are

executed continuously.
Select "Debug(D)"
"Execute continuous step(S)" from menu. The Mnemonic List window is
displayed, and the currently executing rung is displayed highlighted by a background color.
In the Ladder Monitor window screen, the currently executing section is scrolled matched to the speed
of program operation.
"About the Mnemonic List window", Page 9-102
TIP
When the screen is displayed split, only the bottom half of the screen is scrolled matched to
the speed of program operation.
To confirm only the behavior of a specific section of the ladder program, use the upper half of
the screen.
10-3
Execute 1 Block
Monitor
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Simulator
Debug (D)
Execute 1 Block (J)
Every Ladder block must operate.

On the menu, select "debug (D)"
"Execute 1 Block (J)". During continuous scanning, if operating a
block, the operation will be paused.
1 Ladder block is executed when the key

is operated once.
10
DEBUG
Execute 1 Step
Monitor
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Simulator
Debug(D)
Execute 1 step(W) F8
The ladder program is executed one step at a time. When 1 step execution is performed during step
execution, program execution is stopped.
1 step = instruction
1 command is executed when

the key is operated once.
Select "Debug(D)"
"Execute continuous step(S)" from menu. The Mnemonic List window is
displayed, and the currently executing rung is displayed highlighted by a background color.
"About the Mnemonic List window", Page 9-102
Note
It is valid only in interruption status.

1 step cannot be executed in monitor, unless break is set in program.
When selecting "KV-700/700+M""KV-P16""KV-10(16)""KV-24(40)", 1 block is not
possible in monitor mode.
10-4
Execute Reverse Continuous Step

Simulator
Debug(D)
Debug(D)
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Execute reverse cont. step(Y). Shift + F7
Execute reverse cont. step
Executed steps are executed by step execution continuously in the reverse direction after 1 step
execution or continuous step execution is performed.
Single instructions are

executed continuously.
Execute Reverse 1 Block
Debug (D)
Execute Reverse 1 Block (K)
Every Ladder block, inverted running.

On the menu, select "Debug (D)"
"Execute Reverse 1 Block(K)".
1 Ladder block is executed when the key

is operated once.
10-5
DEBUG
Simulator
10
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Execute reverse 1 step
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Simulator
Select Debug(D)
Debug(D)
Execute reverse 1 step(G) F7
Execute reverse 1 step(G) from the menu.
Executed steps are executed by step execution one step at a time in the reverse direction after 1 block
execution or continuous step execution is performed.
1 command is executed when

the key is operated once.
10
DEBUG
TIP
When reverse 1 step is executed, the values of devices that changed as a result of program
execution return to their original statuss
This mode allows you to perform debugging efficiently as you can verify the action (changes
in action caused by contact ON/OFF switching or word device values) of the ladder program
you have made and restore the result of the action of each instruction.
Pause
Monitor
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Simulator
Select Debug(D)
Debug(D)
Pause(I) F6
Pause(I) from the menu.
Pause continuous scan execution or continuous step execution.

Note
Operation can be paused in Monitor when all of the following conditions are satisfied:
RUN break
A break is set
A break is not being performed.
When selecting "KV-700/700+M""KV-P16""KV-10(16)""KV-24(40)", can not be paused
in monitor mode.
10-6
Reset
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Simulator
Debug(D)
Select Debug(D)
Reset(A)
Reset(A) from the menu.
This stops operation that is currently in progress.

Operation is the same turning the PLC OFF then back ON again.
To cancel a reset, click "No".
Device Break Setting

Monitor
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Simulator
Debug(D)
Set device break(B)
A "break" is a function for stopping a ladder program at specified conditions during program operation.
There are two types of break settings described as follows:
Device break Program execution is stopped at conditions specified to devices in the
"Device break settings" dialog box.
Rung break Program operation is stopped at the rung specified in the "Mnemonic list"
Note
When selecting "KV-700/700+M""KV-P16""KV-10(16)""KV-24(40)", can not be paused

in monitor mode.
Operation according to the maximum number of break conditions setting

and debugging functions
O Program is stopped. .Program is not stopped
Device breaks
Rung breaks
Monitor
Simulator
Monitor
Simulator
Maximum number of set breaks
1*
16
16
Execute RUN/continuous scan
Execute 1 scan
Execute continuous step
Execute reverse
continuous step
* AND or OR cannot be set in combined conditions.
10-7
DEBUG
window.
10
Device Break
A "device break" is a function for stopping a ladder program at conditions specified to a device during
program operation. Device breaks are used to partially verify the status of operation or to discover
buggy locations. Also, when device breaks are used in combination with the step execution function,
operation can be verified in a shorter time, and programs can be stopped by multiple OR and AND
conditions.
Select "Debug(D)"
10
"Setup device break(B)" from the menu.
Item
Explanation
DEBUG
Module/macro*
Specifies modules/macros.
Device
Sets device type and No.
Cond (condition)
Set up Conditions
Device/value
Sets the device or constant.
Add conds (Add condition) Add condition.

Change conds
Changes the currently selected conditions.
Calculation error
CR2012 (calculation error) is registered in the setting list.

When the device to which conditions are to be set is a bit device, select "Bit", when
Compave type
the device is a word device, select "Word", and when the device is a 32-bit device,
select "Double-word".
Setup list
Combined
Displays currently registered device breaks.Only items whose checkbox is marked

are enabled.
Select "OR/AND" as the combine break condition. (when Simulator is executed)
*It is displayed only when the models "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" are selected
10-8
Specify the device and conditions. When the device is a word or a double-word device, specify the
condition in a compare operation.
When the device is a bit device
Item
Explanation
Device
Specify the device name.
Cond (condition)
ON
Sets contact ON as the condition.
OFF
Sets contact OFF as the condition.
When the device is a word device or double-word device

Item
Explanation
Device
Specify the device name.

<*1
Sets an instance where the left side is greater than the right side as the condition.
Sets an instance where the right side is equal to the left side as the condition.
*3
Compare condition
Sets an instance where the right side is different from the left side as the condition.
>*1
Sets an instance where the right side is greater than the left side as the condition.
*1
<=
Sets an instance where the left side is greater than or equal to the right side as the condition.
>=*1
Sets an instance where the right side is greater than or equal to the left side as the condition.
Device/value*2
*1
Cannot be used on Monitor.
*2
Only constants can be set on Monitor.
*3
Cannot be used on Simulator.
10
When the device to which conditions are to be set is a bit device, select "Bit", when the device
is a word device, select "Word", and when the device is a 2-word device, select "Double-word".
Click the "Add conds" button.

This adds the specified conditions, and the details are displayed in Settings.
5
6
To register to or more conditions, repeat steps 2 to 4.

When you have finished registering all conditions, click the "Apply" button and the "OK" button.
The "Device break settings" dialog box is closed.
Changing registered conditions

Select the condition to change in Settings.Set the new conditions, and click the "Chng conds" button.
This changes the conditions on the rung where the cursor is located.
TIP
If clicking "add conds" button, can register new device interrupt condition.
Deleting registered conditions

Select the condition to delete in Settings. Click the "Delete" button.
This deletes the conditions on the rung where the cursor is located.
Disabling registered conditions

Select the condition to disable in Settings. Unmark the checkbox on the left side.
10-9
DEBUG
Sets the device or constant.
Rung break
Monitor
Simulator
A "rung break" is a function for stopping program execution at a rung specified on the Mnemonic List
window. When a rung break is used, program execution is automatically stopped in the execute
continuous scan, execute 1 scan, execute continuous step, and execute 1 step modes.
For example, if a rung break is set to investigate in detail ladder operation at a particular step in the
ladder program, program execution stops at the preset step, which makes it easier to verify program
operation.
Move the cursor to the rung to specify in the Mnemonic list window and double-click.
is displayed to the left of the specified rung.
TIP
Multiple rung breaks can be set.

"Operation according to the maximum number of break conditions setting and debugging
functions", Page 10-7
10
DEBUG
To execute operation again

Operate the following function to execute operation again:
Execute continuous scan
Execute 1 scan:
Continuous scan control:
"Execute RUN/continuous Scan", Page 10-2

"Execute 1 Scan", Page 10-3
"Execute Continuous Step", Page 10-3 "Continuous scan
control" page10-2
Execute continuous reverse step:
"Execute Reverse Continuous Step", Page 10-5
To cancel a rung break setting

Move the cursor to the rung that is set with a rung break and double-click.
That indicates the rung break disappears.
10-10
Forced Set/reset Register

Monitor
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Online edit
Debug(D)
Forced set/reset register(X)
Ignore refresh status and Ladder Forced set/reset specifying device.

On the menu, select "Debug (D)"
"Forced set / reset register (X)".
Note
The bit device can be only Forced set/ reset, registered.
Can not register R000 to R915.
Input frame
10
DEBUG
Item
Explanation
(Input frame)
Input the device which is forced set/reset.
(Add device)
Force set/reset register to the device which has entered box.
(checkbox)
For the device whose checkbox is ON, its cell changes to red, which indicates forced set/ reset.
After selecting checkbox, the device registered is forced set/ reset.

After removing checkbox, forced remove set / reset.
Device
The device which is forced set/reset register shows in ascending order.

Click title cell to arrange in descending order.
Display register category (setting / reset).
Set
Double click on the cell, switch between set/rest.

You can also change by using "setting register" button, "reset register" button.
Display the status of device registered.
Current value
Comments
(Register set)
: ON status
: OFF status
Display device comments.From right-click menu, select the comment category to be
switched.
The "settings" of all selected devices are set, the checkbox changes to ON.
(Register reset)
The "settings" of all selected devices are reset, the checkbox changes to ON.
(Cancel)
All checkboxes of the selected devices are changed to OFF.
(Register)
All checkboxes of the selected devices are changed to ON.
(Delete)
Delete selected device.
Registered devices
Display the number of devices forced set / reset registered to CPU unit.
count
For the device being registered, its cell is displayed in red.
* Can also add device by dragging the compiled device to Ladder editor.
10-11
TIP
Can create cross reference of the registered device from right-click menu.
After imperative register set / reset, the cell in
"imperative set / reset" dialog box is displayed in
red, KV STUDIO tool bar will give blinking display
of "imperatively register setting/ resetting"
prompting message.
Error Monitor Window

Monitor
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Editor
Online edit
Debug(D)
Error monitor window(E)
Simulator
Monitor current status and error record of KV-5000 / 3000.
10
Select "Debug (D)"
"Error monitor window (E)" from the menu.
DEBUG
Item
PLC status
Explanation
Current PLC status is displayed.
Mode
PLC operation mode is displayed.
Switch status
Display PLC unit switch status.
Calendar timer
Current error
Display the time of acquiring action mode and on/off status message.
Display PLC error occured. Click error content, the pointer will move to the error
position on Ladder editor.
Display error category in icon form.
Type
: Warning
: Error
10-12
No.
Display error No.
Information
Display error content, error occurrence module / macro, error occurrence position (step No.).
Date/time
Display error occurrence time.
(Clear)
Clear project displayed on "current error".

Item
Explanation
Display error occurrence record. Click error content, the pointer will move to the
error position on Ladder editor and module editor.
The numbers can be recorded is different according to the wrong styles.
Error log
Alarm : PLC shutdown error occurs in record.

Warning
: the error of PLC continue RUN status appears in the record.
Power ON/ OFF : record power ON/ OFF.

Alarm relay
: record OFF/ON change of alarm relay (CR3300 to CR3415).
Display error category in icon form.

: Warning
Type
: Error
: Power ON/OFF
No.
Display error No.
Information
Display error content, error occurrence module / macro, error occurrence position (step No.).
Error occurrence time is displayed as per ascending sequence.
Date/time
(Update)
Acquire the latest error message from PLC
(Clear log)
Clear error record.
(Save to file)
Save error record in CSV formatted file.
(Close)
Close error monitor window
Click title cell to
arrange in descending order.
10
Maximal number of records as follows.

The number of logs
32 pieces
Warning
32 pieces
Power ON/OFF
Power ON: 20 pieces, power OFF: 20 pieces
Alarm relay
64 pieces
Inhibit Input Refreshing

Monitor
DEBUG
Error category
Error
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Online edit
Debug(D)
Inhibit input refresh(F)
KV series has an input refreshing inhibit function.

When input refreshing is set to inhibited, reading (input refreshing) if input relays on the PLC is stopped.
On Monitor, external input relays can be forcibly turned ON/OFF, and debugging while verifying output
on an actual device becomes possible.
Select "Debug(D)"
"Inhibit input refresh(F)" from the menu with Monitor started up.
When inhibit input refreshing is set, the checkbox is marked.

Selecting this item again cancels inhibit input refreshing, and the checkbox is unmarked.
TIP
The inhibit input refreshing setting is enabled on all external input relays.
When set, the inhibit input refreshing setting is disabled when the PLC operation mode is
changed from PROG to Run, or the PLC is turned OFF then back ON again.
10-13
Inhibit Output
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Online edit
Monitor
Debug(D)
Inhibit output(O)
When output is set to inhibited, there is not output from the external output terminals even if the ladder
program is executed.
Select "Debug(D)"
"Inhibit output(O)" from the menu in Monitor.
When inhibit input refreshing is set, the checkbox is marked.

Selecting this item again cancels inhibit input refreshing, and the checkbox is unmarked.
TIP
The inhibit output setting is enabled on all external outputs.

When set, the inhibit output setting is disabled when the PLC operation mode is changed
from PROG to Run, or the PLC is turned OFF then back ON again.
Scan Time Monitor
10
Monitor
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Online edit
Editor
Debug(D)
Scan time monitor(H)
DEBUG
Monitor the items related to KV-5000 / 3000 scanning time, the number of breaks.
Select "Debug (D)"
"Scan time monitor(H)" from the menu.
Item
Scan time
Current value
Max.
Min.
(Clear Max. min. )
Operation Fixed scan time
10-14
Explanation
Display monitor message related to scanning time.
Display current value of scanning time.
Display Max. value of scanning time from operation (PROG -> RUN switch) to
current processing time.
Display Min. value of scanning time from operation (PROG -> RUN switch) to
Max. value/min. value clear
Display monitor message related to operation of fixed scanning time.
State
Display valid / invalid of fixed scanning time operation *1 .
Setting value
Display the setting value of fixed scanning time operation.

Item
Explanation
END processing time

State
Display END processing time valid / invalid *2 .
Setting value
Display setting value of END processing time.
Fixed period module process

time
Display monitor message related to processing time of fixed cycle module.
Current value
Display current processing time of fixed cycle module.
Max.
Display Max. value from operation of fixed cycle module to current processing time.
"Clear Max."
Reset Max. value of processing time of fixed cycle module.
Number of interrupts
"Clear interrupt counts "
*1
Display monitor message related to END processing time.
Display the number of interrupts from operation (PROG -> RUN switch) to
Clear the number of all interrupts.
When " operate in fixed scanning time" checkbox in "scanning time related settings" of "CPU
system settings" is selected, the display is enabled; if not selected, it is disabled.
*2
When "enable END processing time settings" in "scanning time related settings" of "CPU system
settings" is selected, the display is enabled; if not selected, it is disabled.
Calendar Timer Setting

Online edit
Debug(D)
Setup calendar timer(C)
Set the KV-5000/3000/1000/700 PLC's internal calendar timer.

There are two ways of setting the calendar timer.
Note
The range that the calendar timer can be set on KV STUDIO is 2000, January 1,
00:00:00 to 2037, December 31, 23:59:59.
By matching to the PC's clock
Select "Debug(D)"
"Setup calendar timer(C)" from the menu.
The "PLC calendar timer settings" dialog box is displayed.
Check that the "Match to PC clock" checkbox is marked, and click the "OK" button.
This changes the PLC's calendar timer to match the PC's clock.
10-15
10
DEBUG
Monitor
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
By entering the date and time
Select "Debug(D)"
"Setup calendar timer(C)" from the menu.
The "PLC calendar timer settings" dialog box is displayed.
Unmark the "Match to PC clock" checkbox, set the data

and time.
Enter the date.
10
Clear All PLC Devices
DEBUG
Monitor
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Online edit
Debug(D)
Clear all PLC devices(L)
Clear all DMs(D)

Clear all EMs(E)
Clear all FMs(F)
Clear all W(W)
Clear all ZF(Z)
Clear all Rs (hold)
Clear all Rs (R)
Clear all Bs (B)
Clear all LRs(L)
Clear all counters(C)
"Clear all PLC devices" initializes data memories (DM, EM, FM), relays (R01000 to R59915) set to be
held by the MEMSW instruction, latch relays (LR), and counters (C).
When Clear all devices is executed in Monitor, the devices registered on the PLC are initialized.
Select "Debug(D)"
"Clear all PLC devices(L)" from the menu, and specify the device to be
initialized. specify the device to be reset
TIP
All devices can be clearly only when PLC is in PROG mode.

"Clear all EMs (E)" "clear all FMs (F)" "clear all LR (L)", only displayed when KV-5000/
3000/ 1000 is selected.
"Clear all Ws (W)" " clear all ZFs (Z)" " clear all B (B)", only displayed when KV-5000/
3000 is selected.
10-16
Clear CMs For KV-D30

Monitor
Online edit
Select "Debug(D)"
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Debug(D)
Clear CMs for KV-D30(D)
"Clear CM for KV-D30(D)" from menu. display operation status in diagram form.
The area of control memory (CM) used by operating panel KV - D30 is initialized.
10
DEBUG
10-17
MEMO
10
DEBUG
10-18
11
TOOL
This chapter describes each of the tool functions.
11-1 About Tool Functions 11-2

TOOL
11-1
11-1 About Tool Functions

This section describes each of the functions contained in the "Tool(T)" menu.
Unit Editor
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Tool(T)"
"Unit Editor(U)" Ctrl + U
With KV-5000/3000/1000/700, connected units must be registered in advance to the CPU before a
ladder pro-gram is executed. Connected units are selected on Unit Editor to create a unit configuration,
and once the unit configuration is created it is transferred to the PLC.
As for unit editor, please refer to
"Chaper 3 UNIT EDITOR", Page 3-1.
11
TOOL
Switch Unit Configuration
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Tool(T)
Select "Tool(T)"
displayed.
"Unit config switch(N)" from the menu. The "Swith unit configuration" dialog box is
Other procedure Double click on the "Unit configuration switching" in workspace.
11-2
Unit config switch(N)
Item
Unit configuration library
Description
Display multiple unit compositions in library form.
and the configuration differs according different units.
Create unit configuration file.
(New)
After the name registered to library is specified, Unit Editor will start, so, set unit
composition to be registered.
(Edit)
Start Unit Editor.Change unit composition file registered.
(Delete)
Delete unit configuration file. The deleted file cannot be restored.
(Rename)
Change name of unit composition file registered.
(Save with other

name)
Set to current unit
configuration
(save current unit
configuration)
Note
Copy unit composition file selected, rename and save.

Overwrite the selected unit composition file to "current unit composition". In this case,
the confirmation message registering "current unit composition" to library is
displayed.
Name current unit composition and then register to library.
Switch unit composition via "Unit composition switch" dialog box, the device used
by Ladder will be not automatically converted.
11
TOOL
Logging/tracing Setting
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Tools (T)
Setup logging(L)
"Logging" refers to the recording of what kind of states devices are in at a certain timing. The
information of devices or triggers to be recorded is set on KV STUDIO, and records are saved to the
Memory Card. This logging data is saved in CSV format so it can be imported to Excel or other
spreadsheet software for analysis.
For log, please see

KV-5000/3000 series PLC
User's Manual, "2-3 logging / tracing".
11-3
Set Device Default Value
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"tools(T)"
Setup device defaults(V)
Set the device default value which is to be read when operating CPU unit,
Choose "Tool(T)" from the menu
"Setup device defaults(V)".
Other procedure Double click "device default" in work area.
Default value list
11
TOOL
Item
Explanation
Default enable device Set effective range of the device to whcih the default value is entered.
Device
Display the device and range to enable default setting *.
Number of points
Display the number of devices to enable default setting *.
(Set)
(Delete)
Display "Set Device" dialog box.

Set the device and range that enable default value setting.
Delete the valid device which set default value already.
Device
Select the type of device setting default value.
Display format
Select display format of the value displayed in the default value list.
Display defaults
After selecting checkbox, only the valid device among the devices with valid default
enable device only
value is displayed.
Display the default to be set. Initial Device No. is vertical, offset to initial Device No.
(Default value list )
is horizontal.
The valid device cell which was changed by the default value, display in green.
Select the cell to be entered, directly enter the value.
(Input method)
Double click on the cell, open "SJIS character string setting" dialog box, enter
character string.
CSV Import
Read the device default file saved as CSV format.
CSV export
Save the default device value that has been set in CSV format.
Read value from PLC Read current value from PLC to default data.
*Double click, and the "device set" dialog box pops up.
11-4
TIP
Complete default value setting, click "OK" button, save as device default value setting file
(filename: DevInit.dvi). Via "file (F)"
"import (I)"
"import device default value (D)"
step, can import device default value setting file from other projects.
"Setup device" dialog box

Click " setup" button in "device default value setup" dialog box, to open "device setup" dialog box.
Item
Select device
Explanation
Select the device type making the default setting of the device valid.
Leading No.
Specify device initial No. that enables default device value.
number
Specify the number (range) which start from valid device default value.
(Max. number)
The number calculated from start No. to end of Device No. is displayed as "number".
File Register Add / change Setting
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
11
Setup File Register (F)
Add (A)
Tools (T)
Setup File Register (C)
Change (C)
Add / change File Register setting.

On the menu, select "tools (T)"
"File Register setting (F)"
"add (A)" or "change (C)".
When selecting "Add (A)", display "File Register setting No." dialog box,
please specify setting No. as '0 to 999'.
TIP
Without File Register setting, fail to select [change (C)].
11-5
TOOL
Tools (T)
File Register setting list
Item
Setup No.
Comments
Add comment to File Register No. setting edited currently.
Display format
Select display format of the value displayed in File Register setting list.
(File Register setting list)
11
Explanation
If multiple File Registers (setting No.) are set, can be switched.
Display the default to be set. Initial Device No. is vertical, offset to initial
Device No. is horizontal.
Select the cell to be entered, directly enter the value
TOOL
(Input method)
Double click on the cell, open "SJIS character string setting" dialog box, enter
character string.
CSV Import
Read the File Register setting file saved as CSV format.
CSV export
Save the File Register that has been set in CSV format.
Read value from PLC
Read FM current value from PLC as File Register and set constant.
TIP
After File Register setting, click "OK" button, save as File Register setting file (filename: FR
(setting no.).dvi,). File Register setting file can be imported from other projects via "file (F)"
"import (I)"
"import File Register setting (F)" steps.
Mail Setting
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Tools(T)
For mail setting method, please see
Mail Command Maker
'KV-LE20V User's Manual'.
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Tools(T)
Mail command maker(R)
For application method of mail communication command Maker, please see

manual".
11-6
Setup mail(E)
"KV-LE20V user
CPU Positioning Parameter
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Tool(T)"
"Edit CPU positioning parameters(I)"
CPU positioning parameter

The KV-5000/3000/1000/700 PLC has a pulse output function for position/speed control. This function
enables you to control stepping motors and pulse type AC servo motors. Use the "Edit CPU positioning
parameters" to set startup speed, operating speed, acceleration/deceleration time, and other
parameters for trapezoidal control. There are two types of parameters: point parameters and system
parameters.
Point parameters These parameters are the basic parameters for trapezoidal control as they
set movement destination points (positions), operating/startup speed, and
acceleration/deceleration time.
System parameters These parameters are for setting sensor input, pulse output, comparators,
zero return, and jog operation.
Main Functions
11
Start up Edit CPU positioning parameters by the following procedure.
TOOL
Point parameters for 32 points can be set in advance on KV STUDIO. f more than 32 points are set,
the ladder program overwrites the contents of control memory (CM).
You can choose from two control modes: positioning control and speed control. Both incremental
values and absolute values can be set for target values/travel amounts.
Pulses can be output for two axes and each of their frequencies can be set within the range 50 Hz to
100000 Hz.
Both 1-pulse mode and 2-pulse mode are supported as pulse output modes. Select the output mode
best suited to the type of motor driver that is connected.
Select "Tool(T)"
"Edit CPU positioning parameters (I)" from the menu.
This starts up "Edit CPU positioning params".
11-7
Edit the parameters.

Sets the point parameters and systems parameters.
Parameters to Set
Description
Point parameter
To set up operation mode.

Set input settings such as sensor and Z-phase, and pulse output
I/O setting
System parameter
method.
Comparator
setting
Origin returning
JOG
Set operation of comparator 0 to 2.

Set origin returning
Set jog operation.
For setting methods of every parameter, please refer to

Motor (positioning) control.
'KV-5000 / 3000 series user manual' 2-12
When you have finished editing parameters, close "Edit CPU positioning params."
The point parameters and system parameters that you set are saved to file.
Use positioning instructions to program the ladder program.
CPU High-speed Counter Setting Wizard

Tools (T)
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
CPU high-speed counter setting wizard (H)
Start CPU internal high-speed counter settings guide Wizard.

For concrete operation methods of CPU high-speed counter setting guide, please refer to
5000 / 3000 series user manual" 2-8 high-speed counter ".
11
TOOL
KV-DN20 Setup
"KV-
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Tools (T)
Start device network element KV-DN20 setting tools.
For concrete operations of "KV-DN20 settings tools", please see
KV-CL20 Setup
Setting KV-DN20 (D)
'KV-DN20 user manual'.
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Tools (T)
Start CC-Link unit KV-CL20 settings tools.
For concrete operations of "KV-CL20 settings tools", please see
KV-L20 Setting(Protocol Builder)
SettingKV-CL20 (C)
'KV-CL20 User's Manual'.
KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Tools (T)
KV-L20 Setting(Protocol Builder)(B)
Start KV-L20 protocol macro setting software PROTOCOL BUILDER.

For detailed operating method of PROTOCOL BUILDER, please see "PROTOCOL BUILDER User's
Manual".
11-8
KV-H20S/40S/20G Setting (Motion Builder)

Tool(T)
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
KV-H20S/40S/20G Setting(MOTION BUILDER)(M)
Start positioning unit parameter setting software MOTION BUILDER.

For detailed operating method of MOTION BUILDER, please see
Manual".
Note
"MOTION BUILDER User's
When using MOTION BUILDER, the MOTION BUILDER should be setup, and set
positioning unit KV-H20/H20S/H40S/H20G with unit editor .
"Chaper 3 UNIT EDITOR", Page 3-1
KV-H20S/40S/20G Setting(Simple Settings)

Tools (T)
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
KV-H20S/40S/20G Setting(Simple setting) (S)
Use simple setting function of the positioning unit, can set the parameter of positioning unit KV- 20 /
H20S / H40S / H20G. Positioning unit parameters include major parameters and common parameters;
can simply set on the Ladder compilation image.
Simple setting and edit contents as follows.
points, stop sensor, stop standard pulse number of sensor.

System parameters
About setting I/O, reverting origin,/JOG and running speed.

Universal operational parameters.
Speed parameter . . . . .Setting speed No.1 to 16.

For detailed operating method of simple setting of positioning unit, please see
positioning unit simple setting software User's Manual".
Note
"KV-700 series
If the positioning unit parameters software MOTION BUILDER(KV-H1HW)Ver.2 is

setup, and the positioning unit KV-20/H20S/H40S/H20G is chosen, then this
function can be used.
Simple setting function fails to use positioning high-speed counter unit KV-H20.
Parameter transfer can not be made via modem mode.
KV-ML/MC setting (KV MOTION+)
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Tools (T)
KV-ML/MC setting (KV MOTION+)(T)
Start positioning/motion unit parameter setup software KV MOTION+.

For how to operate KV MOTION+, please see
"KV-ML/MC setup tool (KV MOTION+) User's Manual".
11-9
TOOL
Point parameters . . . . .Set action mode, target position / travel motion, operating speed at all
11
Note
It is necessary to preset-config positioning/motion unit KV-ML16V/MC40V/MC20V by

Unit Editor when KV-ML/MC setup tool(KV MOTION+) is used.
"Chapter 3 Unit Editor",Page 3-1
KV-L20V Setting(PROTOCOL STUDIO)

Tool(T)
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
KV-L20V setting(PROTOCOL STUDIO)(P) Shift + F12
Start KV-l20V / R communication macro support software PROTOCOL STUDIO.

For detailed operating method of PROTOCOL STUDIO, please see
"KV-L20V User's Manual".
Note
Please separately purchase communication macro support software PROTOCOL

STUDIO (KV- H1RW), install and use.
If using PROTOCOL STUDIO, configure KV-l20 V / R, on unit editor program, and
set action mode to PROTOCOL STUDIO mode.
When starting PROTOCOL STUDIO, the ladder program can aslo be edited.But if
the setting information in the unit is modified when starting PROTOCOL STUDIO,
the communication protocols will not be performed normally.Only after
11
PROTOCOL STUDIO is finished ,can the unit setting information be modified.
TOOL
MV-L40 Setting(MV LINK STUDIO)
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Tools (T)
MV-L40 setting(MV LINK STUDIO)(Y)
Start MV-L40 parameter setting software MV LINK STUDIO.

For detailed operating method of MV LINK STUDIO, please see
software MV LINK STUDIO User's Manual".
Note
"parameter settings monitoring
Please separately purchase parameter setting monitor software MV LINK STUDIO

(MV- H2), install and use.
If needing MV LINK STUDIO, MV-L40 should be configured in the unit edit program
in advance.
Panel Editor
KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Tools (T)
For concrete operation methods of panel editor, please refer to
PLC KV-P series User's Manual".
11-10
Panel editor(N)
'"Display internal panel installation
KV-N20V Setting (KL Address Setting)

Tools (T)
KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
KV-N20V setting (KL address setting)(A)
Start KV series address setup software.

For concrete operation methods of "KL series address setting software", please refer to
Master Station unit KL-N20V User's Manual".
Customize
"KL
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Tools (T)
Customize(K)
You can customize shortcut keys and the tool bars.
Select "Tool(T)"
"Customize(K)" from the menu.
The "Customize" dialog box is displayed.
Select the tab of the desired customize method.

For details on the settings of each setup tab, refer to the following:
11
Shortcut keys
TOOL
Item
(Batch change)
Shortcut key
create
Explanation
Batch-changes shortcut keys to initial format, GPPQ format,
GPPA format and CX format.
(Read)
Reads saved setup files (*.key) for shortcut keys.
(Save)
Saves the settings of customized shortcut keys.
(Initialize)
Returns shortcut key settings to their defaults.
(Register/delete
keys)
Registers/deletes shortcut keys.
11-11
Batch-change keys
Batch-changes keys to initial format, GPPQ format, GPPA format and CX format.
"GPPQ/GPPA Mode Shortcut Key List", Page A-19
Click "btch chng" button.
Select key form via the "Batch change key" dialog box.
Registering/deleting keys
Select the command to register/delete, and click the "Reg/delete key" button.
The "Register/delete key" dialog box is displayed.
11
TOOL
Item
(Select assigned (Assigned keys)
keys)
Delete
Ctrl/ Shift/ Alt
Explanation
Selects the key to assign from the pulldown menu.
Selects the key to be pressed simultaneously when using shortcut keys.
Deletes the shortcut key settings.
Toolbar
The tool bar can be customized. Mark the checkbox of items to display on the tool bar.
To display all, click "all ON" button, to hide all tool bars, click "All OFF".
11-12
Option
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Tool(T)
Option(O)
Ladder diagram color setting

Set the layout of the colors on the KV STUDIO screen.
1
2
Select "Tool(T)"
"Option(O)" from menu. and select " Ladder color setting" tab.
To change color, click "Color" button.
TIP
11
is next started up.

background mode" button.
Select color
TIP
If you cannot find the color you want, click the Define Custom Colors>> button.
Specify the hue and brightness of the color, and add the color to the custom colors by the
"Add to Custom Colors". The color that you added is added to "Custom colors".
11-13
TOOL
To set the background color of the ladder program edit window to black, click the "Black
Unit color setting

Set the color of each unit that is displayed on Unit Editor. When a relay/DM is assigned from Unit
Editor, the corresponding device on the ladder diagram is displayed in the color that you set.
TIP
Unit display colors can be change from either Editor or Unit Editor.
Newly set unit colors are reflected in both of these.
For details on how to set colors in Unit Editor, see
1
2
Select "Tool(T)"
"Set unit color", Page 3-42
"Option(O)" from the menu. and select "Set unit color" tab.
Select the item to change color, and click the "Color" button.
11
TOOL
TIP
is next started up.
Select color
TIP
If you cannot find the color you want, click the Define Custom Colors>> button.
Specify the hue and brightness of the color, and add the color to the custom colors by the
"Add to Custom Colors".
Online edit setting

Cells that have been edited by online edit are displayed with a light blue background. This indicates that
the program has been changed. Set the timing that indication of changes to the pro-gram is
automatically cleared.
For details, Please see
"Setup Online Edit", Page 9-95.
11-14
System setting
Select "Tool"
"Option(O)" from menu.and select the System setting tab.
Item
Explanation
The title screen is displayed when KV STUDIO is started up.
Display start title
To disable display of the title screen when KV STUDIO is started up, unmark this
checkbox. The title screen will not be displayed when KV STUDIO is next started up.
KV STUDIO has a "device auto-convert function." This function automatically
replaces device Nos. on the ladder program to match any changes that are made to
devices assigned to units that have already been assigned a device on Unit Editor.
When this checkbox is marked, the device auto-convert function is enabled.
Device auto-convert mode by
Note
When the device auto-convert function is not used, manually
change device Nos. on the ladder program after changing
assigned devices that were set on Unit Editor.
IME auto matic ON
When this checkbox is marked, IME automatically turns ON.
Change ladder set value at
Under monitor status, when setting value of timer / counter, etc. is changed,
monitor set value change
Ladder setting is also changed.
Display confirm dialog box of
After checked, confirm dialog box wiil be displayed during the switch from
PROGRAM mode switch
monitor status to PROGRAM status.
Confirm to change relay

status on a ladder diagram
Check duplicate coil
When operating relay under monitor status, confirmation dialog box will be
displayed.
Cancel check, immediately operate relay.
During Ladder entry, if entering (except copy, paste) duplicate coil command
operand, the alarm dialog box will pop up.
Use return Ladder insert in edit menu, execute return symbol (
) insert. If
dechecking, the action identical to original return will be executed.

Enable folding symbol of
ladder
Note
If using the edition lower than Ver.2 of KV STUDIO to read ladder

diagram which is established by the edition higher than Ver.3, (open
the file, open the memorizer datas, read fromPLC, PLC noumenal
monitor), the editions before Ver.2 do not support the echo symbol,
so sometimes the ladder diagram can not be read.
Enable Undo/Redo in batch
Make Undo and Redo functions of the batch-change menu valid.
change dialog
After removing check, cannot select "Undo" "Redo".
Check device confliction when After checking, when converting Ladder, test the device using race
converting
contention, output result to output window.

11-15
TOOL
changes to unit configu
11
Item
Explanation
(Setup)
Set sender's name in the

transfering data
(Setup)
Compare project name when
verifying
*1
*2
*3
Display "Device application status option setting" dialog box * 2 .

When tansmitting items to PLC, set the name of the sender.
Display "final addresser settings" dialog box *3 .
After checking, PLC verification, set project name to comparison target.
It can be set only when models KV-5000/3000/1000 are selected.

Can set via "Ignore ZRES command", "The device application status option setting" dialog box.
Can set the name of final addresser via "Final addresser setting" dialog box.
Script setting
Select "Tool(T)"
"Option(O)" from menu. and select the script setting tab.
Make script-related settings.
11
TOOL
11-16
Set display modes

Select Tool(T)
"Option(O)" from menu. and select the set display modes tab.
Item
Auto
200%
Display size
Explanation
According to Ladder edit window size, the displayed size is automatically changed.
Displays at the largest size, twice the standard size. Select this item when
small characters are difficult to read, for example.
150%
Displays at 1.5 times the standard size.
120%
Displays at 1.2 times the standard size.
100%(Standard) This is the standard size.

80%
Displays at the smallest size. This size displays the maximum number of
cells that can be displayed on screen. Select this size to check overall action.
Displays device name by XYM.
Display labels
Displays each of the devices by label name.
Display label device
Record label name and device No. for each device simultaneously.
Display unit device
Display device name for ladder by unit device.
During monitor, simulator, global device mark is used to display Ladder Local
devices during monitor
Device and assignment target of local label.
Display Ladder Monitor values The current values on the ladder diagram are displayed in HEX in the
in HEX
Monitor or Simulator mode.
Zero-suppress display ladder

device No.
Suppresses the display of zeros in device No. and numerical values on ladder diagrams.
Example)do not perform zero suppress processing: R00500
Zero suppress processing: R500
Display devices when expand
When expanding PACK command contained in KV-700 Ladder, use CM bit
pack-instruction
OUT command to display PACK command symbol
Display comment
Displays comments on ladder diagrams.
Number of comment lines

Font size
Specification
Device No.
Select from 2 to 4 as the number of display digits in comments.

Select the size of fonts to be displayed on device Nos.
Device comment Select the size of fonts to be displayed on device comments.

Rung cmnt/ Script Select the size of fonts to be displayed on rung comments and scripts.
Select
Comment 1
Display comments 1.
comments
Comment 2
Display comments 2.
11
TOOL
Display by XYM
11-17
Editing/key setting
Select Tool(T)
"Option(O)" from menu. and select the setup editing/key tab.
Item
Explanation
Displays the operand edit dialog box with Type List and
Zoom-out operand dialog box
Explanation of operands omitted.

Displays the direct entry dialog box with the comment field and
Zoom-out direct entry dialog box
11
TOOL
11-18
"Insert" button omitted.
Startup entry by Enter key
Start up srch dialog box during monitoring by Enter
Startip search dialog box during
Enables the search dialog box to be started up by the
monitoring by Enter key
monitoring.
Continuously entry comments in
Can use direct entry dialog box, continue entering comment after
directentry dialog box
command and operand entry.
Display candidate operand
Use each input box to display the candidate operand.
Search relay in the same CH for cross
When establishing a reference, other CH relays of the same number
refence
with the specified will also be searched.
key
key during
12
SCRIPT
This chapter describes how to input and edit scripts.
For script, please see KV-5000/3000/1000 Series Script Programming
Manual.
12-1 Insert Script 12-2

12-2 Convert Script 12-4
12-3 Display Converted Ladder Program 12-5
12-4 Input Auxiliary Function 12-8
SCRIPT
12-1
12-1 Insert Script

This section describes how to insert scripts.
For script, please see KV-KV-5000/3000/1000 Series Script Programming Manual.
Insert Area Script
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Script (S)"
"Insert area script (A)"
When using field scripts, the entire rung can be programmed as script.
1
2
Click the cell (rung) for which script is to be programmed.

Select "Script (S)"
Other procedure
"Insert area script (A)" from the menu.
Select "Edit script (X)"
"Insert area script (A)" from the menu that appears by right-
clicking in the ladder edit window.
3
4
12
input the script.

After inputing the script, press the
Other procedure
key.
Click the ladder edit window outside the script programming area.
SCRIPT
Press
key+
key
Insert Box Script
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Script(S)"
"Insert box script(B)"
Box scripts have ladder execution condition. These scripts can specify when and in which ladder program
defined by the script is to be executed.
Program the execution conditions in ladder edit program, and click the cell for which the box
script is to be programmed.
Select "Script (S)"

Other procedure
"Insert box script (B)" from menu.
Select "Script"
"Insert box script" from the menu that appears by right-clicking in the
ladder edit window.
3
12-2
input the script.
12-1 Insert Script
After inputing the script, press the

Other procedure
key.
Click the ladder edit window outside the script programming area.
Press
key+
key
Change Edit Method
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Script (S)"
"Change edit method (N)"
"Direct input (D)"

"Window (W)"
Select the method for editing scripts. Program directly in script editor or open a window to program.
Select "Script (S)"
"Change edit method (N)"
"Direct input (D)" or "Window (W)" from
the menu.
Direct input (script edit program)
12
SCRIPT
Window (script edit window)
12-3
12-2 Convert Script

Convert inputted script .
Convert Selected Script Only
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Script (S)"
Select "Script (S)"
"Convert selected script (S)"
"Convert selected script (S)" from converted script.
The selected script is converted, and
button appears on the converted rung
When an error exists in script, the error message is displayed, and the error location is displayed in the output
window.
Convert All Scripts
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Script (S)"
Select "Script (S)"
"Convert all scripts (C)"
"Convert all scripts (C)" from the menu.
The scripts are converted, and
button appears on the converted rung.
When an error exists in script, the error message is displayed, and the error location is displayed in the output
window.
Set Warning Level of Script Conversion Error
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Script (S)"
12
"Set script warning level (W)"
Set the level of warnings that are displayed during script conversion.
SCRIPT
Note
This function can be used for setting the script warning level, and the script can be
effectively converted without displaying normally displayed warnings. Program and
convert scripts carefully.
Select "Script (S)"
"Set script warning level (W)" from menu.
"Script warning level setting" dialog box appears.
The warning when a suffix different from the data type defined for global label is specified is not outputted.
After selecting, when specifying the suffix other than data type defined during all labels registration, warning is
not outputted.
Example) when "1 word unsigned integer: UINT" is specified in global label definition, and suffix .L etc. is
specified in script
Select warning level, click "OK" button.

Set warning level.
12-4
12-3 Display Converted Ladder Program

This section describes how to display scripts after ladder conversion.
The edited script is displayed or verified as conversion ladder.
Display Converted Ladder

"Script (S)"
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Display/hide converted ladder (V)"
Display the content of converted ladders according to following procedures.
Select desired script.
Select "Script (S)"
"Display/hide converted ladder (V)" from the menu. When "Display/hide
converted ladder (V)" is selected again after a ladder is displayed, the converted ladder is
closed and only the script is displayed.
Display converted ladder program.
The
programmed
script is displayed.
12
SCRIPT
The converted ladder

is displayed.
Other procedure
Click
button on the rung to be displayed.
12-5
Display Entire Content of Converted Ladder

"Script (S)"
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Display entire content of converted ladder (X)"
Display entire content of a folded converted ladder in the ladder program converted ladder displayed by
"Display/hide converted ladder," .
Select the ladder or script in the converted ladder to be displayed.
Select "Script (S)"
"Display entire content of converted ladder (X)" from menu.
The entire content of converted ladder is displayed.
12
SCRIPT
Right-click on the converted

ladder, and the right-click menu
for the script is displayed.
TIP
Rungs can be displayed or hidden by clicking a ladder in the converted ladder or
button on
script.
Other procedure
From right-click menu of converted adder, select "Script edit (X)"

ladderX".
12-6
"Display all converted
Fold Entire Content of Converted Ladder

"Script (S)"
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Fold entire content of converted ladder (O)"
Fold part of ladder in ladder program displayed by "Display/hide converted ladder," and only rung comments
with script is displayed.
Select the ladder or script in the converted ladder to be folded.
Select "Script (S)"
"Fold entire content of converted ladder (O)" from menu.
Fold part of ladder in ladder program displayed by "Display/hide converted ladder," and only rung comments
with script is displayed.
SCRIPT
Right-click on the converted

ladder, and the right-click menu
for the script is displayed.
TIP
Rungs can be displayed or hid in rung units by clicking a ladder in a converted ladder or the
button on the line of script.
Other procedure
From right-click menu of converted ladder, select "Script edit (X)"
"Display all converted
Ladder (O)".
12
12-7
12-4 Input Auxiliary Function

This chapter describes input auxiliary function of script.
Display Script Function List
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Script(S)"
"Script function list (F)"
(SPACE)
Display function list when the name of a function or input function is unknown.
Input part of the function name, and select "Script (S)"
"Script function list (F)" from the menu.
The script function list is displayed.
Select the desired function, andpress
key or double-click the function.
The selected function is inserted at the current cursor location.
Display Simple Format
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
"Script (S)"
12
"Script function tip (H)"
+ Shift + (SPACE)
SCRIPT
Display simple information such as whether arguments and return values are to be programmed as script
function tips when inputting.
Place the "|" mouse cursor to the right of the "(" , and select "Script (S)"
"Script function tip
(H)" from the menu.

A script function hint is displayed in a simple format.
Other procedure
12-8
A script function hint is automatically displayed when6 inputting "Function name (".
APPENDICES
Refer to error message tables if trouble occurs during use, or if you want to
know to remedy errors that occur during programming.
A list of shortcut key commands is also provided as a quick reference.
Error Message Lists A-2
List of Unavailable Characters A-11
Shortcut Key List A-13
Remedies for Frequently Occurring Communications Errors A-25
Index A-26
APPENDICES
E:\KEYENCE(en)\No10_Kv_studio_ver4_ver3\084160_kv_studio\FC-24SM_ap_J.fm
A-1
Error Message Lists
The following describes error messages and remedies to take when an error message is displayed.
Errors That Occur on Editor

The following error messages are displayed on Editor.
Error Message
Cause
Remedy
Dialog box
"Unusable text string is included at the
beginning."
"_" is used at the start of the module Use characters that are permitted in
name, macro name, etc.
module names and macro names
"Contain unusable text string."
A forbidden character is used in the

project name, macro name, label
name, etc.
Use characters that are permitted in

module names, macro names, label
names, etc.
A probable cause is that data is

corrupted.
Check the disk using scandisk, etc.,

and fix the file if it is abnormal. Then,
re-install KV STUDIO.
Empty project name
Please enter project name and then

save.

corrupted.
Use scandisk, etc. to check for disk

errors.
"Device comment cannot set for this device

category."
A probable cause is that the device

is an argument device.
Change to a device to which a

comment can be set.
"No mnemonics information."

corrupted.
Use scandisk, etc. to check for disk

errors.
"Duplicate identification No. of macro."
The ID No. of the macro is duplicated.
Change the ID No. of the duplicated

macro.
"No relay in the specified unit, fail to use UR."
The type of unit currently registered

Check the unit No.
by the macro argument setting
differs from the type of unit (unit No.) Check the unit configuration.
Check the macro argument setting.
currently specified by a macro
instruction.
"Invalid file."
"Failed to open file. "
"File reading fails."
"Project name invalid."
"Script information reading fails."
"Module information reading fails."
"Macro information reading fails."
"LD rung information reading fails."
"Rung comment information reading fails."
"Invalid comment/tab file."
"Undefined module/macro type."
APPENDICES
Output window
"No DM in the specified unit, fail to use UM."
A-2
"Device assigned to label is illegal. Fail to

reading [XXX]."
A text string that cannot be used for Use characters that can be used for
the label is used.
labels.
"Disconversion processing failure."
A syntax error occurred when the

ladder was converted.
Change the program.
Errors/Warnings That Occur in Conversion

The following error messages are displayed during conversion.
Eliminate the cause of the error before performing conversion.
Error message
Cause
"Will abort due to insufficient memory"
There is no more memory left for
Please check whether the space of
performing conversion.
memory and hard disk is enough.
"llegal N operand " (N: numerical value)
The mnemonic for the instruction is
"Nth operand type error"
wrong. (This error often occurs when
"llegal N operand value"(N: numerical value)

"Nth operand type error"
Remedy
the mnemonic list is edited after
Check the instruction specifications in
opening a third-party editor or a file
the manual or in Help.
created on a word processor is

opened.)
"Instruction duplicate"
An instruction that can be used only

once has been used twice.
Change the program so that the

instruction is used only once.
"Operand duplicate"
"Cannot be used in interruption"
Duplicate operands
An instruction that cannot be used in
Change the program and process by
an interrupt has been used.
another means.
A sub-routine or interrupt program is

"Instruction position error"
programmed before the END

instruction.
"Subroutine nesting overflow"
"Undefined subroutine"
"Subroutine No. duplicate"
"Pair instruction corresponding error"
"STG instruction parallel"
"END instruction exists"
"ENDH instruction exists"
"STG instruction position error"
"SFT instruction operand error"
"No corresponding CTH instruction"
Corresponding instruction undefined
instructions.
The program ended with the called
Change the program so that the number
sub-routine undefined.
of nested programs is under the limit.
The program ended with the called
Program the sub-routine program between
sub-routine undefined.
the END and ENDH instructions
Two or more of the sub-routine of the

same No. have been defined.
Nesting of instructions used in a pair
The sub-routine of the same No. cannot be

duplicated. Change the program so that
the sub-routine is not duplicated.
Change the program so that the number of
has exceeded the limit.
nested programs is within the limit range.
Instructed used in a pair are not in a
Change the program so that the
pair.
instructions are in a pair.
There is a block OR (parallel)
Do not OR (parallel) connect the STG
connected to the STG instruction.
instruction.
The END instruction could be found in the
Program the END instruction in the
program up to the ENDH instruction.
program up to the ENDH instruction.
APPENDICES
"Pair instruction nest overflow"
Program between the END and ENDH
The is no ENDH instruction on the final Program the ENDH instruction on the
rung of the program.
final rung of the program.
The STG instruction is not at the start
Program the STG instruction at the
of the block.
start of the block.
The SFT instruction operand is outside Change the operand to the settable
the settable range.
range.
The program does not contain the
Program the corresponding CTH
corresponding CTH instruction even
instruction in the program up to the
though the CTC instruction is used.
END instruction.
The program does not contain the
Program the corresponding instruction
corresponding instruction even though
in the program up to the END
timer, counter or other contacts are used. instruction.

Cannot be used in subroutine
An illegal instruction has been
Change the program and process by
programmed to the sub-routine.
another means.
A-3
Error message
Cause
Remedy
Model code error

The mnemonic for the instruction is
1st rung error
wrong. LD diagram can not be
The mnemonic symbol is wrong.
changed into.(This error often occurs
1st operand incorrect
when the mnemonic list is edited after
No need after the mnemonic symbol.
opening a third-party editor or a file
Operand the Nth line is not needed
created on a word processor is
(N:numerical value)
opened.)
Check the instruction specifications in

the manual or in Help.
Code file is not created.

"Not ladder"
"Too many instructions"
"No connected block on front side"
"No connected block on rear side"
"Instruction not paired"
Check the specifications of the
"CON instruction usage error"

"Connection error of multiple input
Cannot be converted to a ladder
elements"
drawing as the alignment of
"Output element cannot be paralleled"
instructions is incorrect.
instruction, and rewrite the program.
"Input element connected to output rung"

"Output element connected to power rail"
"Terminal element not connected to output rung"
"Please set the length of parallel block to
below 9 when parallel block starts from
The parallel connection block contains Change the network to reduce the
power rail or terminates on output line.
too many instructions and cannot be
number of instructions in the parallel
Please set parallel data block to below 8
converted to a ladder drawing.
connection block.
A single block exceeds 100 rungs in
Change the program so that the number
the ladder drawing.
of rungs in a single block is within 100.
There is no instruction symbol on the
Program instruction symbols on the
route between the power rails.
route between the power rails.
except this. "

"Exceed max. rung"
APPENDICES
"Not connected"
There is a short-circuit between two
"Invalid short circuit"
points that must not be shorted.
Do not short between the two points.
The connection between blocks is not Change the network so that a normal
"Invalid parallel connection"
"Invalid connection"
a normal parallel connection.
parallel connection is formed.
The instruction symbol connection
Change the network so that a correct
method is in error.
connection is formed.
Warning Messages
Cause
Remedy
"The 1st operand of ADRSET instruction is

used to set automatic assignment of local
device. Shall confirm assignment range of
Automatic assignment of the local
local device. "

"Index assignment is used in the local device
set to automatic assignment. Shall confirm
device has been set even though there

is the possibility that the range of use
of the local device in question exceeds
assignment range of local device."
the assignment range during ladder
"The numeral change operand of device is
operation.
used, local device with automatic

assignment is used. Shall confirm
assignment range of local device."
A-4
We recommend checking the

specifications of the instruction and
manually setting the assignment range
of the local device.
The alarm is no longer generated
when the automatic assignment
setting is canceled.
Errors at Start of Monitoring and Communications Errors

These error messages are displayed at start of monitoring or during communications.
Error Message
"The item mismatches the PLC model
Cause
Remedy
The model set in LD program is not conformable Shall set correct model again via "
connected to the target."
to communication destination model.
"Password error."
The password you entered is wrong.
model setting".
Enter the correct password.
"LC status changes in transfer, Ladder
The state of the PLC changed during
Return to editing again, and transfer the
conversion interrupted."
program transfer processing.
program again.
"Unstable USB communications."
USB communication becomes instable.
End monitor, communicate after

reconnecting USB cable. In case of frequent
occurrence, shall reinstall USB driver.
Via equipment manager of control celll,
"USB cannot be opened."
Cannot open COM port.
confirm whether USB driver is correctly

installed.
Check the USB cable connection. Use
"USB port disconnected"
Fail to use USB port.
Device Manager to make sure that the

USB driver has been installed.
"Fail to acquire PLC info."
The information of the PLC could not be
Check the communications cable
got at the start of communications.
connection and communications setup.

Make sure that the COM port selected
"COM port cannot be opened."
The communications port (COM port) can in Device Manager can be used.
no longer be used.
Make sure that the COM port is not being

used by another application.
"Modem not connected, or not powered

on."
"Connection session."
"NO CARRIER"
The modem did not return a response.
connection and power supply.
The connection destination is currently
Wait a while before trying the
communicating.
connection again.
Communications between the modem and

performed
APPENDICES
the connected device is not being

"NO DIAL"
Check the communications cable
Check the connection.
successfully.
A-5
Errors During Ethernet Communications

The following error messages are displayed during Ethernet setup or when communications using the
Ethernet port are performed.
Error Message
Cause
Remedy
Check the connection settings,
"Cannot open COM port."
Cannot establish the connection with the

set port.
connection path, connector cables, and

each of the port settings and states for
devices connected to the personal
computer.
"Device no. is incorrect."
"Enter address."
"llegal address settings"
"Illegal Port No."

"**(File name)
This file does not exist.
Either open existing file, or create new
file."
Connection destination name contains
illegal characters.
Illegal address specification
Illegal Port No.
An illegal value was entered for the device

No.
A value has not been entered to the IP
address during the Ethernet connection.
An illegal value was entered to the IP
Please input correct value.
Enter the IP address.
Enter the correct IP address.
An illegal value was entered for the port Enter a value within the range 0 to
No. during the Ethernet connection.
65535 for the port No.
Either there is no connection destination Either make a new connection

list file to reference, the file is already
destination list file, or retry the operation
opened, or the file is read-only.
after eliminating the cause on the left.
Text strings containing "=" cannot be

entered for the connection destination
name.
An illegal value was entered for the IP
An illegal value was entered to the IP
Enter a text string that does not contain

"=".
Enter the correct IP address.
Enter the correct port No.
APPENDICES
Connection destination name does not
The connection destination list file to
Correctly set the file to reference in the
exist.
reference does not exist.
connection destination list.

Set the Network setting on the Control celll
to Write.
Failed to get network settings.
The network adapter does not exist on

the PC you are using.
The above error message sometimes is

displayed when Windows is unstable. If the
above error messages are not remedied
by the above remedies, exit KV STUDIO
and reboot Windows.
A-6
PLC Unit Errors

These errors are displayed when an error occurs on the KV-5000/3000/1000/700 CPU unit.
Error Message
Cause
Remedy
CALL nesting error
Nesting of subroutine (nest) exceeds the

limit.
Occur during the execution of ladder. Please note

application method of subroutine, correct ladder.
FOR nesting error
FOR- NEXT instruction nest exceeds the

limit.
Occur during the execution of ladder. Please

note the application method of FOR- NEXT
instruction, correct ladder.
INT nesting error
Occur during the execution of ladder.

The interrupt concurrently exceeding the limit. Please note application method of INT
instruction, correct.
MPS nesting error
The nest of MPS-MPP instruction exceeds

the limit.
Occur during the execution of ladder.Please note

the application method of MPS-MPP instruction,
and correct ladder.
BREAK error
The number of BREAK instructions exceeds

the limit.
Occur during conversion. Limit the number of

BREAK instructions between FOR to NEXT to
within the specified limit.
Convert error
A system error occurred.
Please connect power again after

troubleshooting.Please contact the nearest
office in case of frequent occurrence.
Object size overflow error
The object size of the ladder is exceeded.
Code size overflow error
The code size of ladder exceeds the limit.
Macro nest error
Occur during the execution of ladder. Please

The number of macros exceeds the nesting
note the application method of macro
level.
instruction, correct ladder.
Please reduce the size of Ladder program.

The size of the ladder program can be
checked on KV STUDIO.
Invalid interrupt error

Macro error invalid
Indirect specifying error
APPENDICES
Address error invalid

troubleshooting. Please contact the nearest
Object invalid
Please correct Ladder program according
to the following conditions, check whether
exceeding scanning time.
Scan time over error
Scan time is 300 ms or more.
FOR-NEXT instructions, etc., performed repeatedly.

Jump processing instructions such as the
CJ/NCJ-LABEL instructions, etc.
Program calling instructions such as
CALL, MCAL instructions, etc.
The instructions with longer processing
time such as FMOV, WSR and MAX
instructions.
Frequently interrupt program or not.
Ladder stack overflow error

troubleshooting. Please contact the nearest
No Ladder error
The ladder program is not registered.
Transfer ladder programs to the PLC before

operation.
Unit setting info. error
Expansion/special unit setting damaged.
Unit setting info. lost error
Unit setting information not set.
Please use ladder support software or

memory card to transfer the unit setting
information to the PLC.
Unit unconnected error
Expansion/special unit exists under unit setting

information status, but not connected actually.
Turn the CPU unit OFF, then connect the

Expansion or Special Unit set in Unit Editor.
A-7
Error Message
Cause
Remedy
Unit BSI timeout error
Please remove noise source. Please

Bus communication may stop due to noise. contact the nearest office in case of
frequent occurrence.
Unit number
The actual number of connected units

differs from the number of expansion/
special units set in Unit Editor.
Turn the CPU unit OFF, then connect the

Expansion or Special Unit set in Unit Editor.
Unit type error
The actual unit type differs from the type of

expansion/special units set in Unit Editor.
Expansion bus communication

error
Remove any sources of noise. Please

Bus communication may stop due to noise. contact the nearest office in case of
End unit unconnected error
End unit not connected.
FROM abnormal
Flash ROM abnormality
SRAM abnormal
Hardware fault.
Backup battery voltage drop error
Backup battery voltage lower.
Please replace backup battery.
SRAM abnormality
The content (CMMWEMZFFM

R B CR LR T C CTH and CTC
current values) of RAM is corrupted as the
voltage of the backup battery has dropped.
Replace the backup battery, and execute

an SRAM clear. Only the device values and
alarm values are cleared. The ladder
program is not cleared.
RTC voltage low error
The clock value may be damaged due to

the drop in the backup battery voltage.
Replace the backup battery, check the clock

value, and set the clock again as required.
Memory card abnormal
The Memory Card may be damaged.

Communications may be down due to
electromagnetism or noise.
Check the file system of the Memory Card.

Check the file system using the chkdsk at the
Windows command prompt.
(Ex) When Memory Card is the E: drive
Turn the CPU unit OFF, and connect the

End Unit.
Contact your agent.
C:WINDOWS>CHKDSK E:
Please remove memory card according to
correct operation steps.
KV-5000/3000 Series User's Manual
"2-2 Memory Card"
APPENDICES
Memory card pulled out in access
The card is pulled out during memory card

accessing.
Memory card close in access
Please use memory card according to

Power is disconnected during memory card correct operation steps.
accessing.
KV-5000/3000 Series User's Manual
"2-2 Memory Card"
Memory card waiting completed
Multiple operations were executed before

accessing of the Memory Card was completed.
Wait until the Memory Card has finished
Clear the error, and turn the unit ON again.
being accessed.
Transfer data invalid

Monitor timer error
Stack overflow
System error
Please contact the nearest office in case of

Device range error
Resource error
Error buffer area overflow
System errors exceed the limit.
Error buffer abnormal

Automatic reading from Memory card fails
due to the following reasons.
Automatic reading error
No Error Message
A-8
Cancel write protection, and transfer the

autoload files to the main unit from the
Write protect is set by the MEMSW

Memory Card.
instruction in the unit program.
There is a problem in the details stored to Transfer files matched to the main unit's
configuration.
files on the Memory Card.
Clear the error, and turn the unit ON again.

Please contact the nearest office in case of
Errors That Occur on Unit Editor

These errors are displayed when an error occurs during operation of Unit Editor.
Explanations are omitted for errors that do not require an explanation excluding serious errors. Detailed
explanations are displayed in the message area. Follow the instructions of these descriptions to
remedy the error.
Errors that are displayed when KV STUDIO is started up

Error Message
Cause
Remedy
The PLC Link must be reset as there is
PLC Link information could not be
To save the unit setup information, the PLC
no data in the unit setup information.
acquired from the unit setup information. link and addresses must be set again.
File access errors

Error Message
Failed to read xxx information.
Failed to write xxx information.
Cause
Remedy
The file is damaged or an attempt was
Either open the correct file, or make the
made to open another file.
file in Unit Editor again.
Operation messages
These messages are displayed when an error occurs during setting up of units.
Error Message
Cause
Remedy
Adderss cannot be entered, since no

CPU is found.
Relays, DMs, etc. were set without a

CPU Unit placed.
Place the CPU Unit first.
Could not open Clipboard.
The Clipboard is in use by other

processes when Copying KL address
information.
Wait a while before trying again.
APPENDICES
Unit setting file not opened. Need verify The file specified in the previous import
the file name.
dialog box is deleted.
Enter the name of the new file.
Cannot open unit setup file. Verify

detailed message?
Check the detailed message in the

The unit setup information file could not
message display area, and remove the
be opened.
cause of the error.
Cannot input due to slave registration.

Delete slave, or change the setting of
slave.
An attempt was made to directly enter

the addresses without the slave device
setup deleted.
Delete all slave setups before directly

entering the addresses.
An attempt was made to manually enter

If the slave address is to be entered, the
Determine the relay/DM Nos. of the
the address of the slave device before
leading relay/DM No. of master needs to
master before manually entering the
determining the relay/DM Nos. of the
be entered.
address of the slave device.
master.
Cannot select due to slave setting.
Close slave setup window, or set in
slave setup window.
An attempt was made to change the

Change and save the settings on the
settings in the main window on a KL Unit
master
Cannot change as slave is being setup. on which the slave is currently being
in the slave setup window.
edited.
Either close slave setup window, or set
in slave setup window.
KL connection setup is already started
up.
The address setup software is already

started up.
Cannot save this unit setup information as

The unit setup information file is too
setup information of unit is too large.
large.
Reduce the number of units and try again.
Use the address setup software that is

started up to set the addresses.
The unit configuration must be reduced.
A-9
Unit configuration error check

These errors occur during execution of relay/DMs assignments and address checks.
Error Message
Cause
Remedy
Install the CPU Unit.
Check the placed state of the Extension
Unit.
Cannot find CPU.
The CPU Unit does not exist or the

Extension Unit is incorrectly configured.
The error might occur when the

Extension Unit is connected when the
auto-layout function is turned OFF. This
error is not displayed when operations
are performed with the auto-layout
turned ON.
Lower limit value of scaling setup is upper
Entered values exceed the upper/lower
limit value or higher.
limit value range.
Specify a value smaller than the upper

limit value as the lower limit value.
Check the placed state of the Extension
Unit.
Connection information of unit from xxx

rung onwards is illegal. Check
connection state.
The error might occur when the

The Extension Unit is incorrectly
Extension Unit is connected when the
configured.
auto-layout function is turned OFF. This

error is not displayed when operations
are performed with the auto-layout
turned ON.
Input address and output address
Input address areas overlap output
Set the areas so that input address areas
crossed.
address areas.
do not overlap output address areas.
When inter-PLC communications is set

to "ON", the number of relays is
Inter-PLC communications is not set to
calculated from the number of
"ON". So, the number of relays might
addresses. For this reason, when the 8- Pay attention to the number of relays in
not match the actual number of used
point I/O Unit is in use, the number of
relays.
relays might not match the actual
use.
number of used relays.
APPENDICES
(This is not an error.)
Printing-related errors
These errors occur when an attempt is made to execute printing.
If these messages are displayed, re-install the latest printer driver, and executing printing again. If this
does not remedy the error, change the printer.
Error Message
As this printer does not support clipping, it might not print out correctly.
As this printer cannot plot rectangles, it can not print correctly.
As this printer cannot plot lines, it can not print correctly.
A-10
List of Unavailable Characters
This section gives a list of characters that are not available for project names, module names, macro names, labels, and device comments.
Characters not available for project names and module/macro names

When choosing KV-5000/3000/1000
Unavailable characters
(space)
Characters that cannot be used at the beginning
Characters that cannot be used at the end
Global
Unusable character string
When choosing KV-700/700+M,KV-P16,KV-10(16),KV-24(40)

Characters that cannot be used for labels

(space)
*
Characters that cannot be used at the beginning
Global *
(case insensitive)
(same name as instruction)

(device name )
alphabet character +
or
+ number
alphabet character + number

+(
to
+(
to
The following key words are specified in KV script

IF, THEN, ELSE, END, SELECT, CASE, IS, TO, MC, MCR, FOR,
NEXT, WHILE, DO, UNTIL, TYPE
The following key words specified in IEC61131- 3
TRUE, FALSE
TIME, DATE,TIME_OF_DAY, TOD, DATE_AND_TIME, DT
BOOL, SINT, INT, DINT, LINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT,

REAL, LREAL, STRING, WSTRING, BYTE, WORD,
DWORD, LWORD
ANY, ANY_DERIVED, ANY_ELEMENTARY, ANY_MAGNITUDE,
ANY_NUM, ANY_REAL, ANY_INT, ANY_BIT, ANY_STRING,
ANY_DATE
ACTION, END_ACTION,
ARRAY, OF,
AT,
CASE, END_CASE,
CONFIGURATION, END_CONFIGURATION,
CONSTANT,
EN, ENO,
EXIT,
A-11
APPENDICES
F_EDGE,
FOR, TO, BY, DO, END_FOR,
FUNCTION, END_FUNCTION,
FUNCTION_BLOCK, END_FUNCTION_BLOCK,
IF, THEN, ELSIF, ELSE, END_IF,
INITIAL_STEP, END_STEP,
NOT, MOD, AND, XOR, OR,
PROGRAM, WITH, END_PROGRAM, R_EDGE,
READ_ONLY, READ_WRITE,
REPEAT, UNTIL, END_REPEAT,
RESOURCE, END_RESOURCE,
RETAIN, NON_RETAIN,
RETURN,
STEP,
STRUCT, END_STRUCT,
TASK,
TRANSITION, FROM, END_TRANSITION,
TYPE, END_TYPE,
VAR,VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT, VAR_IN_OUT, VAR_TEMP,
VAR_EXTERNAL, VAR_ACCESS,
VAR_CONFIG,VAR_GLOBAL,
END_VAR,
WHILE, DO, END_WHILE
Other (IEC61131-3 standard)
2 above continuous " _ " are not allowed in label forename.
"a_b_c" can be used, but, "a_bc" is forbidden.
* Unusable character (character string) only when the model is KV-1000.

APPENDICES
Characters that cannot be used for device comments

A-12
Shortcut Key List
The following table present shortcut key combinations that are used for executing various functions.
Shortcut Keys Valid on Unit Editor

Window
File
Import
Close
+
+
Edit
Cut
Copy
Paste
Unit placement area
Select unit
Unit Setup
Refresh setting
Message area
Help
Delete
Unit comments
Block comment
System comments
Unit preset
Batch input relay No.
Operations in unit placement area

Move cell
Move cell to start of rung

Move cell to end of rung
Delete placed units
Convert
Multiple selection
Jump to error rung

Auto-assign relay/DM
Operations in unit selection window
Device check
Move cell
Slave device setup
Add selected unit
Setup slave
KL Unit information copy
Paste KL unit information
KL address setting
Operations in unit setup window
display move module
Input
View
Input/confirm
Cancel
View Unit setup

Unit Monitor
Customize monitoring
Buffer memory monitor
Operations in message area

Move cell
Shortcut Keys Valid on Unit Editor "Slave Setup Screen"

File
Close
Paste
+
+
Edit
Cut
Copy
Delete
Input unit/slave comment
Reserve unit slave
A-13
APPENDICES
Move cell
Convert
Operation in slave configuration area
Jump to error rung
Move cell
Auto Address Assignment
The Unit Setup window of the
Check addresses
selected unit is displayed.
Delete configured unit
View
Operations in unit selection window
Unit/slave setting content
Move cell
Window
Unit Selection window
Unit Setup window
Address Setup window
Message area
Add selected unit
Operations in unit setup window

Move cell
Input
Input/confirm
Help
Cancel
Operations in address setup window

Move cell
Shortcut Keys Valid on KV STUDIO

For project, shortcut keys can be set to change.
"Customize", Page 11-11
Shortcut keys valid in the initial screen

APPENDICES
File
Monitor/simulator
New project
PLC Monitor
Open project
Read from PLC
View
Workspace
Output window
Shortcut keys valid in the Editor mode

File
A-14
Edit
New project
Undo
Open project
Redo
Save project
Cut
Print
Copy
Paste
Multiple paste
Search
Replace operand
New cross-reference
Make list of cross-reference
rung comments
"Previous cross-reference(Z)"
Next cross-reference
Jump
connection line
Input/delete
horizontal
Top
Bottom
datum mark of cell location
Previous block
Delete instruction to the
Next block
left of cell position

Delete instruction at cell position
Previous symbol
Directly enter
instruction at cell position
Right-shift cursor position
End
Change previous block
Change next block
Insert empty rung
Enter NO contact
Enter NC contact
Enter NO contact
Insert a loopback ladder
Enter NO contact coil

+
Disable rung - Settings
Disable rung - Cancel
Insert
Set
Release

+
RES
TMR
TMS
DIFU
DIFD
MOV
+
+
+
)*1
LDA
*2
STA
SET
APPENDICES
+
(
Delete rung
OR
Enter NC contact OR
Rung comment
Select rung
connection line
Home
Bookmark
display the device cross
Next symbol
Jump
vertical
LDP
LDF
Change operand
ORP
ORF
Input vertical
MEP
connection line
MEF
INV
Arrange ladder
Edit list
Input horizontal
connection line
Edit
connecti
on line
Change NO-NC contact,
Delete vertical
change suffix, enter NC contact
Input horizontal connection

line to end of rung
Previous cell
connection line
*1
*2
Direct input/current value change

Next cell
connection line
Delete horizontal
Only valid when the cell is on the left (the first line)
Only valid when the cell is on the right (the tenth line)
+
*
+
+
+
*
increment of the device number
Decrement of the device number
* Only valid when displaying the edit window of divided ladder diagram
A-15
View
Script
Workspace
Insert area script
Output window
Insert box script
Convert selected script
Instruction/macro
palette
)*
display/not display the
Comment edit window
converted ladder diagram
Device use list
Script function list
Enlarge display
Reduce display
display comments
Edit window switching
+
+
* Only valid when no instruction is input in chosen cell.
Convert
Convert individual
modules/macros
Monitor/Simulator
Monitor mode
PLC transfer -> Monitor mode
PLC Read-> Monitor mode
Read from PLC
Online edit Start

Simulator
Tool
Unit Editor
Help
Instruction help
APPENDICES
Shortcut keys valid in the Monitor mode

Edit
Previous cross-reference
+
Search
Jump
Make list of cross-
Bottom
reference rung comments
Previous block
Select rung
Next block
Contact ON/OFF switching
Next symbol
Home
End
Change previous
block
Change next
block
New cross-reference
A-16
Top
Previous symbol
Convert
display devices for unit
+
+
Script tip
display labels
View
End Monitor
Workspace
Output window
Online edit
Start
Set
Enlarge display
Simulator
Reduce display
display/hide
display labels
observation window
display comments
Execute 1 scan
Change device value

Edit window switching
Debug
Execute 1 step
Help
Monitor/Simulator
Return to Editor
Instruction help
Instruction Reference
Manual
Start Monitor
Shortcut keys valid in the Simulator mode

Edit
Search
display labels
comments
display
Top
Bottom
Change device value
Previous
Select rung
+
+
Monitor/Simulator
block
Return to Editor
Next block
Monitor mode
+
+
APPENDICES
Previous
Jump
Reduce ladder display
symbol
Online edit Start
Next symbol
Home
Debug
End
+
Change
Execute 1 scan
Execute continuous step
previous block
+
Change next block
Execute 1 step
Execute reverse
New cross-reference
+
Previous cross-reference
consecutive steps
Execute continuous
reverse step
rung comments
Pause
Help
Contact ON/OFF
switching
Instruction help
Instruction Reference
View
Manual
Workspace
Output window
Enlarge ladder display
+
A-17
Shortcut keys valid during online editing

Edit
Input/delete
Undo
Redo
Cut
Copy
Paste
connection
line
connection line
Input/delete
horizontal
connection line
Insert a loopback ladder
+
+
Search
Verify Ladder
Edit list
Top
Change operand
Bottom
Previous block
Delete instruction to the
Next block
Delete instruction at cell position

Directly enter
Next symbol
instruction at cell position
Home
Enter NO contact
End
Change previous block
Change next block
Enter NC contact
"Previous cross-reference(Z)"
Enter NO contact OR
Enter NC contact OR
Enter NO contact
APPENDICES
RES
TMR
TMS
LDP
DIFU
DIFD
Insert empty rung

Delete rung
Disable rung - Settings
Disable rung - Cancel
Insert
+
+
Set
Release
LDF
ORP
ORF
Input vertical
connection line
Input horizontal
connection line
Edit
line
Input horizontal
connection connection
MOV
Select rung
SET
+
Insert rung comments
coil
rung comments
New cross-reference
Bookmark
left of cell position
Previous symbol
Jump
Multiple paste
Replace operand
A-18
vertical
Edit
line to end of rung
STA
MEP
MEF
INV
Change NO-NC contact, change

suffix, enter NC contact
Direct input/current
Delete vertical
connection line
Delete horizontal
connection line
LDA
value change
View
Convert selected script
Workspace
Output window
Instruction/macro palette
Monitor/Simulator
+
Return to Editor
Monitor mode
Comment edit window
Start Monitor*
Device use list
Stop monitor*
Enlarge display
Reduce display
display labels
display comments
Transfer
Online edit
Cancel
Set
Simulator
*Online editor, shortcut keys are not valid.
* Only valid when no instruction is input for chosen cell.
Help
Script
Instruction help
Insert area script
Insert box script
GPPQ/GPPA Mode Shortcut Key List

Changeable shortcut keys setting.
LDF
Enter NO contact
Enter NC contact
Enter NC contact OR
ORP
GPPA mode
ORF
GPPQ mode
DIFU
Not assigned
GPPA mode
+
DIFD
Not assigned
MOV
Not assigned
Coil input
LDA
Not assigned
Enter NC contact coil Not assigned
STA
Not assigned
MEP
Input vertical
GPPQ mode
connection line
GPPA mode
Delete vertical
connection line
Convert
Mark/unmark
connecting line (right)
Input transverse
Mark/unmark
connecting line
connecting line (left)
Delete transverse
connecting line
Mark/unmark
connecting line(down)
SET
Not assigned
Mark/unmark
RES
Not assigned
connecting line (up)
TMR
Not assigned
Convert individual
TMS
Not assigned
modules/macros
Not assigned
Direct input/change
LDP
current value
APPENDICES
Enter NO contact OR
GPPQ mode
Not assigned
A-19
Previous cross-reference Not assigned
Monitor mode
Move to next cross-
Display comments
reference
Not assigned
Instruction/
PLC transfer ->
macro input celll
+
+
Monitor mode
Read from PLC Not assigned
Start online edit
Returning to Editor
Next cell
Previous cell
CX Mode Shortcut Key List

Changeable shortcut keys setting.
Enter NO contact
Enter NC contact
MEP
Not assigned
connecting line(right)
Enter NC contact OR
Mark/unmark
Coil input
connecting line (left)
Mark/unmark
Input vertical
connecting line(down)
connection line
Mark/unmark
APPENDICES
connection line
Convert
Convert individual
connecting line
modules/macros
connecting line
Direct input/change
+
current value
SET
Previous cross-
RES
reference
TMR
TMS
Not assigned
Not assigned
LDP
Not assigned
LDF
Not assigned
ORP
Not assigned
ORF
Not assigned
DIFU
Not assigned
DIFD
Not assigned
MOV
Not assigned
LDA
Not assigned
STA
Not assigned
Move to next crossreference

PLC transfer ->
Monitor mode
Read from PLC
Start online edit

Returning to Editor
Next cell
Previous cell
Monitor mode
display comments
Instruction/macro
pack pallet
A-20
Without configurate
connecting line (up)

+
Input transverse
Delete transverse
Mark/unmark
Enter NO contact OR
Delete vertical
+
+
How to use "
" key
KV-5000 KV-3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
Cursor position setting will be displaced after pressing / or Ctrl + / .

Settings may be changed are as below.
N.O./N.C.
Up/Down
+ /
+ /
+ /
+ /
+ /
+ /
Note
Change status are as below when pressing " Ctrl + / " in line position using KV5000/3000.
APPENDICES
+ /
+ /
+ /
SET/RSET
/
A-21
Suffix
Press on the cell without command, contact b will be entered.
APPENDICES
A-22
Input Instruction by Omission Method

Partial instruction entry can adopt omission method.
Input character string after omission
Instruction
KV-5000/3000
KV-1000
A,X,AND,OR
B,LDI,LDNOT,ANI,ANDNOT,ANB,/
ORI,ORNOT
P
F
BA
BB
=
<
>
<=
>=
<>
O,Y
OB
S
R,RST
PLS,U
PLF,D
BO
BOB
BS
BR
T,TIM,OUTT
T,TIM
TH,TIMH,OUTH
TH,TIMH
TS,OUTS
TS
CNT
CNTR
E,FEND
H
WON
WOFF
WUE,WU
WDE,WD
IL
ILC
FROM
instructions
UWRIT
TO
Contact
Instructions
Bit contact
instructions
Compare
instruction
Output
instructions
Bit output
instructions
Timer/counter
instructions*1
Connection/end
Instruction
Stage instruction
Flow instructions
ADD
SUB
MUL
Arithmetic/
DIV
comparison
INC
instructions
DEC
ROOT
Logical Operation EORA
Instructions
ENRA
DASC
RDASC
Text Processing HASC
Instructions
RHASC
FASC
RFASC
KV-10(16)/
24(40),KV-P16
APPENDICES
Buffer memory
LD
LDB
ORB
LDP,ANP
LDF,ANF
BLD,BAND
BLDB,BANB
LD=,AND=
LD<,AND<
LD>,AND>
LD<=,AND<=
LD>=,AND>=
LD<>,AND<>
OUT
OUB
SET
RES
DIFU
DIFD
BOUT
BOUB
BSET
BRES
TMR
TMH
TMS
C
UDC
END
ENDH
W-ON
W-OFF
W-UE
W-DE
MC
MCR
UREAD
KV-700/700+M
+
*2
*
/*3
++
SQRT
XORA,XOR
XNORA
DSTR
DVAL
HSTR
HVAL
FSTR
FVAL
A-23
Input character string after omission

Instruction
Simple
Operation
Instructions
High-speed
Processing
Instructions
KV-5000/3000
CAL+
CALCAL*
CAL/
CAL&
CAL I
CAL~
+
-*4
*
/*5
&,WAND
I,WOR
~
CAL
CAL>>
CAL<<
INT
,NOT,CML
>>,SFR
<<,SFL
I
RETI
IRET
KV-1000
KV-10(16)/
24(40),KV-P16
*1
Timer / counter instructions, can be entered even if there no space between command and Device No.
*2
"-" directly entered in "Ladder edit" window, will become horizontal connecting line.
Input "-" in the "input directly" dialog box(
*3
*4
), will become "DIV instruction".
"-" directly entered in "Ladder edit" window, will become horizontal connecting line.
Input "-" in the "input directly" dialog box(
*5
),will become"SUB instruction".
"/" directly entered in "Ladder edit" window, will become LDB instruction.
Input "/" in the "input directly" dialog box(
), will become "CAL- instrution."
"/" directly entered in "Ladder edit" window, will become LDB instruction.
Input "/" in the "input directly" dialog box(
), will become "CAL/ instruction."
APPENDICES
A-24
KV-700/700+M
Remedies for Frequently Occurring Communications Errors
This appendix describes the items to check and how to remedy frequently occurring communications
errors when monitoring KV-1000 on KV STUDIO.
Note
The items that need to be set vary according to the PC you are using. For details on how
to set items, refer to the User's Manual provided with the PC you are using, or directly
contact your PC manufacturer.
Is the communications port available on Windows?

In the Device Manager on Windows, check whether or not use of the communications port specified in
KV STUDIO is enabled.
First inspect from device management.
To do this, select "Settings" -> "Control celll" from the
Start menu to open the Control celll. Next, double-click
the "System" icon to open the "System Properties"
window, and click the "Device Manager" tab. This
displays the Device Manager. Make sure that nothing is
assigned to the communications port.
Is the modem assigned to the

communications port?
On some PCs, a modem might already be assigned to the communications port. If it is assigned, either
disable the modem connection, or set a different communications port.
Is the serial mouse assigned to the communications port?

mouse and communications cable are swapped only during communications. When communications is
performed, specify the port in the communications setup if there are any available communications
ports. If there are no available communications ports, the serial mouse must be disconnected and the
PC rebooted.
Has infra-red communications been set?

On some PCs, infrared communications is sometimes assigned to the communications port. In this
case, specify the port in the communications setup if there are any available communications ports. If
there are no available communications ports, setting of infrared communications must be disabled.
Has the USB driver been correctly installed?

If communications errors frequently occur in USB communications, turn the KV-1000 and PC OFF and
then back ON again. If this does not rectify the problem, delete the USB driver from the Device
Manager, and then re-install the USB driver.
A-25
APPENDICES
When using a serial mouse on a notebook PC, the communications port will not be enabled even if the
Are many other applications running in addition to KV STUDIO?

If communications is interrupted by processing by other applications, communications will be
discontinued for the duration of the interrupt, and time-out error will sometimes occur. If time-out errors
frequently occur, quit all applications except KV STUDIO, and then retry communications.
Set the Save Power mode on the PC to OFF.

On some PCs, processing to save power is executed periodically, which causes applications including
KV STUDIO to sometimes pause. The time-out error will sometimes occur as KV STUDIO no longer
functions during power save processing. If time-out errors frequently occur, set the Power Save mode
on the PC to OFF referring to the User's Manual provided with the PC.
Is Ethernet set up correctly?

When communications errors frequently occur on Ethernet, check the following points. If this does not
remedy the error, contact your network administrator.
Are the correct cables being used?
Are the Link indicators on the personal computer and Ethernet Unit lit?
Is the IP address correctly entered?
Issue a ping to the communications destination IP address, and check that the IP address exists or
packet loss is occurring?
When the message "USB cannot be used" is displayed

Disconnect and then reconnect the USB cable to see if it
is recognized on Windows. If this does not remedy the
problem, select "KEYENCE KV-1000 (USB)" at "System
Properties" -> "Device Manager" -> "Universal Serial
APPENDICES
Bus", and click the "Update Driver" button on the "Driver"

tab. This displays the device driver update wizard. Reinstall the driver. For details on installing the driver,
"1-5 USB Driver Installation", Page 1-11.
For KV-5000/3000/1000
A-26
Index
Number
"Device setup" dialog box .................................... 11-5
"Project" tab ........................................................... 6-5
1 Execute 1 Block ............................................... 10-4
16-, 32- and 64-point Unit Monitor ...................... 9-82
B
Backup ................................................................ 4-15
Basic operation of Unit Editor ............................. 3-13
System configuration flow ............................... 3-13
Batch change ............................................. 9-35, 9-83
Save CSV file ................................................. 9-84
C
Change device comment .................................... 5-30
Change device value window ............................. 9-39
Change model...................................................... 4-14
Change previous / next block .............................. 5-17
Change the display mode of bitmap .................... 3-30
Changing Operands ............................................ 5-29
Check address assignment of system ................ 3-36
Check the Package Contents ................................ 1-2
Clear all PLC devices ........................................ 10-16
Clear all PLC devices .......................................... 9-40
Clear CMs for KV-D30 ...................................... 10-17
Clear changed background color ......................... 6-31
Clear invalid operands .......................................... 8-4
Clear KV-D30 control memory (CM) ................... 9-40
Close module/macro ............................................. 7-3
Close project ......................................................... 4-3
Combination search ............................................ 9-60
Comment 2 ...................................................... 11-17
Comment 1 ....................................................... 11-17
Comment transfer setup ..................................... 9-16
Comments input .................................................. 3-37
Communication setting ................................ 9-4, 9-70
Compress/save project ......................................... 4-4
Connect Ethernet .................................................. 9-7
Searching connection destination .................... 9-8
Connection test ................................................ 9-9
Connection line edit mode ................................... 5-25
Connection with D-Sub 9-pin serial port ............... 9-3
Control bit device ON/OFF................................... 9-38
E:\KEYENCE(en)\No10_Kv_studio_ver4_ver3\084160_kv_studio\KVSUSEIX.fm
A-27
APPENDICES
About "batch change"window .............................. 9-83

About basic operation .......................................... 1-14
About Conversion Functions.................................. 8-2
About Debugging Functions................................. 10-2
About Edit Functions.............................................. 5-2
About Editor ........................................................ 1-19
Names and Functions of Editor Screen .......... 1-20
Editor function overview ................................. 1-19
Limit when editing .......................................... 1-19
About ladder editing window .......................... 1-22
About Help ........................................................... 1-16
Select menu of KV-1000 ................................. 1-17
Select menu of KV-10(16)/KV-24(40) ............ 1-17
Select menu of KV-5000/3000 ........................ 1-16
Select menu of KV-700/KV-700+M................. 1-17
Select menu of KV-P16................................... 1-18
About Monitor/Simulator Functions........................ 9-2
Return to Editor ................................................ 9-3
High-speed time chart monitor ....................... 9-31
Set simulator .................................................. 9-29
Monitor mode ................................................. 9-17
About project folder ............................................... 2-2
About Screen ....................................................... 1-15
About screens of modes ................................. 1-15
About current window .................................... 1-15
About the data compatibility .................................. 1-5
Ladder program generated by using KV BUILDER 1-5
KZ Ladder program .......................................... 1-8
Read Precautions ............................................. 1-5
About Tool Functions ........................................... 11-2
About user data file ............................................... 2-3
About View Functions ............................................ 6-2
Access window displays comments ............... 4-2, 4-5
Add / change File Register setting ...................... 11-5
Address setup icon ............................................. 3-33
Assign addresses automatically .......................... 3-35
Assign addresses manually ................................ 3-35
Auto-hide function ............................................... 1-21
Auto-load ............................................................. 4-16
Automatic multiplying power ............................... 6-29
Auto-save ............................................................ 4-15
Save the CSV file by another name ............... 9-84

New CSV File ................................................ 9-83
Open CSV file ................................................ 9-84
Read all projects (P) from PLC ...................... 9-89
Read selected range from PLC ..................... 9-89
Write all projects to PLC ................................ 9-89
Write selected range to PLC .......................... 9-89
Batch insert .................................................... 9-90
Limits for "Batch change" window................... 9-83
Insert increment ............................................. 9-91
Exit window .................................................... 9-86
Delete rung .................................................... 9-88
Insert rung ...................................................... 9-90
Verification ..................................................... 9-86
Cut selected range/Copy/Paste ..................... 9-88
Delete selected range .................................... 9-88
Rearrange as per device sequence ............... 9-88
Close file ......................................................... 9-86
Save to memory card ..................................... 9-85
Read memory card ........................................ 9-85
Batch change window ......................................... 9-32
Batch monitor ............................................. 9-35, 9-46
Change current value .................................... 9-47
Current value is restored to the default value 9-48
Change displayed device ............................... 9-46
Batch monitor overview ....................................... 9-46
Batch monitor window ......................................... 9-32
Batch replace ...................................................... 5-13
Block comment ................................................... 3-26
By matching to the PC's clock ........................... 10-15
APPENDICES
Control relays and control memories supported by

Simulator ..................................................... 9-97
Supported control memories CM ............. 9-98
Supported control relays CR .................... 9-97
Convert ...................................................3-4, 3-7, 8-2
Convert NO/NC Contacts .................................... 5-10
Convert result ........................................................ 7-2
Convert unit device ............................................... 7-6
Converting Individual Modules and Macros .......... 8-3
Copy ...................................................................... 5-4
Copy ...................................................................... 5-4
Copy KL Unit information .................................... 3-29
Copy/move configured slave................................ 3-35
CPU system setting ..................................... 6-6, 6-42
System setting .................................................. 6-7
Program settings .............................................. 6-6
CPU unit buffer capacity setting .......................... 6-52
Create project folder ............................................. 2-2
CSV formatted file output (browse message) ..... 4-13
Cursor display ..................................................... 9-69
Cursor A&B choice ......................................... 9-70
Select Cursor A .............................................. 9-70
Cursor B choice ............................................. 9-70
Hide cursor ..................................................... 9-70
Cursor display ................................................ 9-70
Customize ......................................................... 11-11
Customize monitoring .................6-5, 9-33, 9-35, 9-49
Registering Custom Monitors ......................... 9-50
The features of customize monitoring ............ 9-49
Display customize monitor ............................. 9-49
Cut ........................................................................ 5-4
Cut/Copy/Paste...................................................... 5-2
Connect Ethernet port ........................................... 9-2
D
APPENDICES
Delete all device comments ................................ 5-30

Delete configured slave ...................................... 3-34
Delete module/macro............................................. 7-3
Deleting Rungs ................................................... 5-19
Deveice search/replace ....................................... 5-12
Device break ........................................................ 10-8
Delete registered contents .............................. 10-9
Change registered contents ........................... 10-9
Disabling registered conditions ....................... 10-9
To execute operation again ......................... 10-10
Operation according to the maximum number of set break
conditions and debugging functions ............. 10-7
Device Comment .................................................. 6-6
Device default value .............................................. 6-9
Device list display ................................................ 9-63
Device list/setting trigger area ............................. 9-52
"Device List" icon ............................................ 9-52
Device registration/setting trigger area
Display device comments .............................. 9-53
Increment registration of the device................ 9-53
Device registration/change mode .................. 9-52
Delete device ................................................. 9-53
"Set trigger" icon ............................................. 9-54
Device use list ..................................................... 6-25
Directly Entering Instructions Using Mnemonics . 6-35
Correcting/changing an entered instruction .... 6-35
A-28
Display ...........................................................3-5, 3-7

Display "Slave setup screen" ....................3-28, 3-33
Display by XYM ................................................. 11-16
Display comment ............................................... 11-17
Display converted ladder program ...................... 12-5
Fold entire content of converted ladder .......... 12-7
Display entire content of converted ladder ..... 12-6
Display ladder conversion ............................... 12-5
Display CPU system setting ................................ 6-27
Display device comments ................................... 9-63
Display help information .............................3-30, 3-38
Display instruction / macro / pack pallet ............... 6-14
Display Ladder Monitor values in Hex................ 11-17
Display range is automatically adjusted .............. 9-69
Display registration monitor window..................... 9-41
Display size ....................................................... 11-16
Display startup title ............................................ 11-15
Display time on scale of lateral axis .................... 9-69
Display use status ............................................... 6-26
Display version information of real-time timing curve
monitor ......................................................... 9-72
Display/hide monitor window ............................... 9-33
Displaying Comments ..............................6-29, 11-17
Displaying Devices for Units ....................6-30, 11-17
Displaying Labels .............................................. 11-17
Displaying Labels ................................................ 6-29
Displaying the Comment Edit Window ................ 6-17
Displaying the Label Edit Window ....................... 6-20
When support model is KV-1000/700 / 700+M / P16
/ 10 / 16 / 24 / 40 ..................................... 6-22
When support model is KV-5000 / 3000 ........ 6-20
Docking Navigator ............................................... 1-21
Drag, change from Ladder monitor window ........ 9-46
Drag, register from Ladder monitor window ........ 9-42
Duplicate coil check .............................................. 8-5
E
Edit .................................................................3-4, 3-7
Edit connection line ............................................. 5-26
Deleting connection lines ............................... 5-26
Inputting connection lines ............................... 5-26
Edit CPU positioning parameters .................6-5, 11-7
Edit device comment ............................................ 5-30
Edit list ................................................................. 5-27
Displaying and editing mnemonic list .............. 5-27
Mnemonic list format ...................................... 5-28
Edit mode ............................................................ 5-24
Empty rung .......................................................... 5-18
Enlarging/Reducing Displays .............................. 6-29
Enter the date and time manually ..................... 10-16
Entering and Deleting Instructions ....................... 6-32
Entering CPU positioning instructions ................. 6-39
Entering from the Instruction/Macro/Palette ........ 6-33
Changing operands ........................................ 6-34
Entering set, reset, time, count, differential contacts,
differential output, and data transfer instructions 6-38
Entire assignments settings of local devices ......... 8-6
Environment setting ............................................ 3-39
Color setup ..................................................... 3-40
Other Settings ................................................ 3-43
APPENDICES
Device assignment setting ............................. 3-41

View setup ..................................................... 3-39
About environment setting of unit editor ......... 3-39
Set unit color ................................................... 3-42
Error Message Lists ............................................... A-2
PLC Unit Errors.................................................A-7
Errors During Ethernet Communications ..........A-6
Errors That Occur on Editor ..............................A-2
Errors/Warnings That Occur in Conversion ..... A-3
Errors at Start of Monitoring and Communications Errors .A-5
Errors That Occur on Unit Editor ......................A-9
Error monitor window ........................................ 10-12
Errors that are displayed when KV STUDIO is started
up .................................................................. A-9
Execute 1 scan .................................................... 10-3
Execute 1 step .................................................... 10-4
Execute continuous step ..................................... 10-3
Execute Reverse 1 Block .................................... 10-5
Execute reverse 1 step ....................................... 10-6
Execute reverse consecutive step ...................... 10-5
Execute RUN/continuous scan ........................... 10-2
Execution sequence unassigned module ........... 9-27
Delete execution sequence unassigned module ... 9-27
Operation sequence unassigned module ...... 9-27
Exit real-time Time Chart Monitor ........................ 9-59
Exit ....................................................................... 4-16
Expanded Ladder Mode....................................... 5-24
G
Global device comments transfer range setting .. 9-15
Globally annotate local devs during monitor ..... 11-17
Help ................................................................3-6, 3-8

High-speed time chart monitor ...................9-36, 9-73
Names and Functions of Parts in High-speed Time
Chart Monitor .......................................... 9-73
Features of High-speed Time Chart Monitor .. 9-73
Display high speed time chart monitor ........... 9-73
Saving time charts as bitmaps ........................ 9-80
Saving Time Charts......................................... 9-79
Reading time charts ....................................... 9-79
I
ID No.("bit in executing") ...................................... 6-15
IME auto-ON ..................................................... 11-15
Import comments/labels ........................................ 4-7
Import CPU locating parameter ............................. 4-9
Import default value of device ............................... 4-8
Import logging info.................................................. 4-8
Import modules/macros ......................................... 4-7
Import settings of file register ................................ 4-8
Import Slave Information ............................3-28, 3-36
Inhibit input refreshing ........................................ 10-13
Inhibit output....................................................... 10-14
Initialize module .................................................... 7-2
Input auxiliary function ........................................ 12-8
Display simple format ..................................... 12-8
Display script function list ............................... 12-8
Input refresh disable / output disable setting ....... 9-40
Insert Script ......................................................... 12-2
Insert area script ............................................ 12-2
Switch edit method ......................................... 12-3
Insert box script .............................................. 12-2
Insert .................................................................... 5-18
Inserting Empty Rungs ........................................ 5-18
Install in Windows XP .......................................... 1-11
Install Software....................................................... 1-9
Uninstall KV STUDIO ..................................... 1-10
RS-232C serial port) ..................................... 1-9
USB USB port............................................. 1-9
Precautions on Windows XP/2000 ................... 1-9
Windows Environment and Installation Directory ..... 1-9
Ethernet (Ethernet card port) ........................... 1-9
Installation ...................................................... 1-10
Preparing for Installation ................................... 1-9
Free Space Available on Hard Disk ................. 1-9
Install the USB Driver ........................................... 1-11
Instruction search/replace ..................................... 5-8
Deleting instructions ....................................... 6-41
Instruction input .............................................. 6-32
Instruction selection panel.................................... 6-14
Interrupt setting ................................................... 9-40
Invalid operands .................................................... 8-4
J
Jump and search ................................................. 9-39
A-29
APPENDICES
File ................................................................. 3-4, 3-7

File access errors ..................................................A-9
File operation of project folders ............................. 2-4
File register setting ................................................ 6-9
Fixed cycle execution and user interrupt setting . 6-43
Flow and mode of creating Ladder Program ....... 1-14
Folding Ladder .................................................... 5-19
Forced set/reset register .......................... 9-40, 10-11
Forced set/reset register ..................................... 9-48
Frame magnify, reduce ....................................... 9-68
Magnify vertical frame .................................... 9-68
Reduce vertical frame .................................... 9-68
Magnify horizontal frame ................................ 9-68
Reduce horizontal frame ................................ 9-68
From Ladder monitor window, click right-click register 9-42
Outline of step execution function ................ 9-102
Common restrictions ...................................... 9-96
Device states when Simulator is stopped ...... 9-98
About the Mnemonic List window ................. 9-102
Setting breaks .............................................. 9-101
Reset ............................................................ 9-103
Device states when operation is reset ........... 9-99
Continuous-scan execution .......................... 9-101
APPENDICES
Jump to bottom ................................................... 5-16

Jump to error rung ............................................... 3-37
Jump to the specified data No. ........................... 9-62
Jump to triggered position.................................... 9-62
Jump .................................................................... 5-15
Jumping to cursor A ............................................ 9-62
Jumping to cursor B ............................................ 9-62
Jumping to the end of a rung .............................. 5-17
Jumping to the next network block ...................... 5-16
Jumping to the next program changed block ...... 5-17
Jumping to the next symbol ................................ 5-16
Jumping to the previous network block ............... 5-16
Jumping to the previous program changed block 5-17
Jumping to the previous symbol ......................... 5-16
Jumping to the start of a rung ............................. 5-17
Jumping to the top rung ...................................... 5-16
K
KL connection setting ........................................ 11-11
KV STUDIO brief introduction ............................... 1-3
KV STUDIO functionality .................................. 1-4
Editor function .................................................. 1-4
simulation function ........................................... 1-4
Operating Environment and System Configuration
1-3
Monitoring function............................................ 1-4
Unit Editor function ........................................... 1-4
KV STUDIO Ver.4 Major CD ................................. 1-2
KV-CL20 setting .................................................. 11-8
KV-DN20 setting ................................................ 11-8
L
APPENDICES
Label ..................................................................... 6-6

Ladder arrangement ........................................... 5-27
Ladder diagram color setting ............................. 11-13
Ladder program ........................................... 6-8, 6-11
Right click on menu in Ladder ................. 6-8, 6-11
Ladder program monitor brief introduction........... 9-37
Library ................................................................. 6-10
Right-click the menu in system ....................... 6-10
User ............................................................... 6-10
Local comment 1 ................................................. 6-17
Local comment 2 ................................................. 6-17
Local devices settings by module/macro .............. 8-6
Local/whole assignment setting .......................... 6-47
Window display .............................................. 3-16
Jump to error rung .......................................... 3-27
Customize monitoring .................................... 3-23
Comments input ............................................. 3-26
Check relay/DM assignment of system .......... 3-21
Delete configured unit .................................... 3-17
Copy/move configured unit ............................. 3-17
Assign automatically relay/DM of unit ............. 3-18
Assign manually relay/DM of unit ................... 3-18
Relay No. of configuration unit can be assigned in
batch ....................................................... 3-20
Set up configuration unit ................................ 3-22
Display buffer memory monitor ...................... 3-24
A-30
Start Unit Editor .............................................. 3-15

Exit Unit Editor ............................................... 3-15
Import unit setting info and unit comments .... 3-25
Detail setting of display unit ........................... 3-22
Display unit monitor ........................................ 3-23
Unit configuration ........................................... 3-16
Reserve unit/dereserve .................................. 3-27
Moving units with relays/DMs assigned ......... 3-18
M
Macro .................................................................... 6-9
Right-click menu in macro................................. 6-9
Macro argument setting ........................................ 7-5
Macro selection board .......................................... 6-15
Macro type ............................................................. 7-3
Mail communication instruction Maker ................ 11-6
Mail setting .......................................................... 11-6
Making reference ................................................ 9-48
Menu list in Unit Editor .......................................... 3-4
Mnemonics list .................................................... 6-28
Rung interrupt setting ..................................... 6-28
Modem communications ....................................... 9-9
Modem Initialization ........................................ 9-10
Communication with modem mode................. 9-13
Modem transfer mode overview........................ 9-9
Module library....................................................... 6-13
Display/hide module library ............................. 6-13
Module register and call ...................................... 6-14
Module type............................................................ 7-2
Module/macro ....................................................... 7-2
Module/macro properties ....................................... 7-4
Monitor mode
When the project being edited is identical to that of
PLC ......................................................... 9-17
When the project being edited is different from that
of PLC...................................................... 9-17
Monitor register ...........................................9-35, 9-41
Save as customize monitor ............................ 9-45
Change current value ..................................... 9-43
Current value is restored to the default value 9-44
Switch comment ............................................. 9-44
Display/hide the setting value and contact of timer /
counter (status of timer / counter contact) .... 9-44
Switch time chart ............................................ 9-45
Display/hide device reference destination....... 9-45
Device registration ......................................... 9-42
Sort device ...................................................... 9-44
Change display sequence of device by required
........................................................................ 9-44
Delete the device from register monitor program.... 9-44
Real-time chart monitor/high-speed time chart
monitor .................................................... 9-45
Monitor window ................................................... 9-35
Monitoring function ............................................... 9-34
Communication with PLC................................ 9-34
PLC setting and operation .............................. 9-40
Precautions when using USB port ................. 9-35
About screen display ...................................... 9-37
Change current value/setting value ................ 9-39
Precautions when using serial port ................ 9-34
APPENDICES
Control bit device ON/OFF.............................. 9-38

Various monitor functions .............................. 9-35
Monitor limit..................................................... 9-34
Names and functions of monitor screen ........ 9-37
Ladder monitor ............................................... 9-37
MOTION BUILDER ...................................... 6-5, 11-9
Moving the unit by preserving the existing address
setting .......................................................... 3-35
MV LINK STUDIO ............................................. 11-10
N
Names and Functions of Editor Screen ............... 1-20
New a project ......................................................... 2-4
Names and Functions of Different Parts of Unit Editor
3-9
Names and functions of different parts of slave setup
screen .......................................................... 3-31
New a project ........................................................ 4-2
New module ........................................................... 7-2
New macros ........................................................... 7-2
Names and functions of monitor screen ............. 9-37
Names and Functions of Parts in High-speed Time
Chart Monitor ............................................... 9-73
New CSV File ...................................................... 9-83
Names and Functions of Screen Parts ............. 9-100
P
Precautions when changing KV-700 to KV-5000/3000/
1000 ............................................................... 1-7
Precautions on Windows XP/2000 ........................ 1-9
Preparing for Installation ........................................ 1-9
Precautions when editing Ladder Program ......... 1-19
Project management .............................................. 2-2
Preset unit / preset client / remove preset ........... 3-37
Project-project verify ............................................. 4-4
Project properties ................................................... 4-5
Project ID .............................................................. 4-5
Print ............................................................4-17, 9-58
Print preview ........................................................ 4-19
Printer setting ...................................................... 4-20
Paste ...................................................................... 5-4
Previous /next block ............................................ 5-16
Previous/next symbol .......................................... 5-16
"Project" tab............................................................ 6-5
Program settings ................................................... 6-6
Pack pallet ........................................................... 6-16
Program settings ................................................. 6-42
Protection setting ................................................ 6-46
PLC transfer -> Monitor mode ............................. 9-17
PLC read -> Monitor mode .................................. 9-23
PLC transfer ......................................................... 9-24
PLC verify/synchronize ........................................ 9-25
Program memory space confirm ......................... 9-26
PLC verification ................................................... 9-28
Precautions when using serial port ..................... 9-34
Precautions when using USB port ...................... 9-35
PLC error verification .......................................... 9-39
PLC setting and operation ................................... 9-40
Power OFF hold setting ...................................... 6-53
Print setting ......................................................... 9-57
Print preview ........................................................ 9-59
Pausing/stopping program execution ................. 9-103
PROGRAM/stop .................................................. 10-2
Pause .................................................................. 10-6
PROTOCOL BUILDER ....................................... 11-8
PROTOCOL STUDIO ....................................... 11-10
Panel editor ....................................................... 11-10
PLC Unit Errors ......................................................A-7
Printing-related errors .........................................A-10
R
Read Precautions................................................... 1-5
RS-232C serial port) .......................................... 1-9
Refresh setting tab ............................................... 3-11
Relay No. of configuration unit can be assigned in batch
3-20
Read unit configuration from PLC ....................... 3-26
Reserve unit/dereserve ....................................... 3-27
Reading Text Format Comments ........................ 4-10
Read mnemonics list ........................................... 4-12
Redo....................................................................... 5-2
A-31
APPENDICES
Operating Environment and System Configuration 1-3

Option ........................................................ 3-5, 11-13
Operation of Unit Editor ...................................... 3-15
Other Settings ..................................................... 3-43
Open project ......................................................... 4-3
Outputting CSV Files (Unit Specifications) ......... 4-13
Output window .................................................... 6-12
Operation setting during error ............................. 6-54
Open Module/macro ............................................. 7-3
Operation sequence unassigned module ........... 9-27
Online edit............................................................ 9-28
Online edit function .................................... 9-36, 9-92
Open file .............................................................. 9-57
Overlay waveform display ................................... 9-67
Open CSV file ..................................................... 9-84
Online Edit Features ........................................... 9-92
Overview ............................................................. 9-96
Outline of scan execution function .................... 9-100
Outline of step execution function ..................... 9-102
Operation according to the maximum number of set break
conditions and debugging functions .................. 10-7
Only convert selected script ................................ 12-4
Operation messages.............................................. A-9
Operations in message area................................A-13
Operations in unit setup window ..........................A-13
Operations in unit selection window.....................A-13
Operations in unit placement area ....................... A-13
Operations in unit setup window ..........................A-14
Operations in unit selection window.....................A-14
Operations in address setup window ..................A-14
Operation in slave configuration area .................A-14
APPENDICES
APPENDICES
Replace.................................................................. 5-7
Replace.................................................................. 5-9
Rung/step No. ..................................................... 5-15
Rung comment..................................................... 5-18
Rung settings ....................................................... 5-21
Right-click menu for unit setup............................... 6-5
Right click on menu in Ladder ...................... 6-8, 6-11
Right-click menu in macro...................................... 6-9
Right-click the menu in system ............................ 6-10
Right-click the menu in system ............................ 6-10
Right-click menu in module library ....................... 6-13
Right-click menu for comment1/2 and local comment1/ 2 6-18
Replacing text strings .......................................... 6-19
Right click on the menu in label edit window ...... 6-22
Replacing text strings........................................... 6-24
Rung interrupt setting .......................................... 6-28
Return to Editor ..................................................... 9-3
Route setup ......................................................... 9-14
Read PLC ........................................................... 9-25
Real-time chart monitor .....................9-30, 9-36, 9-51
Register monitor window ..................................... 9-31
Read and monitor program ................................. 9-36
Real-time chart monitor/high-speed time chart monitor
9-45
Registering Custom Monitors .............................. 9-50
Real-time chart monitor display .......................... 9-51
Reduce vertical frame ......................................... 9-68
Reduce horizontal frame ..................................... 9-68
Read PLC internal trace data............................... 9-71
Reading time charts ............................................ 9-79
Read memory card ............................................. 9-85
Rearrange as per device sequence .................... 9-88
Read all projects (P) from PLC ........................... 9-89
Read selected range from PLC ........................... 9-89
Reset.................................................................. 9-103
Reset.................................................................... 10-7
Rung break ....................................................... 10-10
Register/delete keys .......................................... 11-12
Remedies for Frequently Occurring Communications
Errors ...........................................................A-24
S
Simulation function ................................................ 1-4
Switch model.......................................................... 1-7
Safety Precautions............................................... 1-13
Select menu of KV-5000/3000 ............................. 1-16
Select menu of KV-1000 ...................................... 1-17
Select menu of KV-10(16)/KV-24(40) ................. 1-17
Select menu of KV-700/KV-700+M ...................... 1-17
Select menu of KV-P16........................................ 1-18
Set password ........................................................ 2-4
Set slave ............................................................... 3-5
System configuration flow .................................... 3-13
Start Unit Editor ................................................... 3-15
Set up configuration unit ..................................... 3-22
System comments .............................................. 3-27
Start KL Address Setup Software ....................... 3-30
Slave Configuration Area ..................................... 3-31
Switch cursor position ......................................... 3-34
Switch cursor position ......................................... 3-34
Save project .......................................................... 4-3
A-32
Save project as ..................................................... 4-3

Set password ......................................................... 4-6
Save/Read memory card ....................................... 4-9
Save in text format ............................................... 4-10
Save mnemonic list ............................................. 4-11
Selecting by the mouse ......................................... 5-3
Selecting a range .................................................. 5-3
Search ................................................................... 5-6
Search ...................................................5-6, 5-8, 9-59
Search Rung Comments ...................................... 5-11
Select the next verification .................................. 5-14
Select previous Verification ................................ 5-14
Setting Disabling Rungs and Canceling Disabled Rungs5-20
Switch shortcut column ......................................... 6-3
Set logging ...................................................6-5, 11-3
System setting........................................................ 6-7
Switch the display of tab ...................................... 6-13
Searching for text strings .................................... 6-18
Searching for text strings .................................... 6-23
Specifying the default suffix ................................ 6-41
Set module execution order ................................. 6-42
Settings of fixed cycle module ............................. 6-43
Setting of interrupt priority ................................... 6-44
Set related scan .................................................. 6-45
System setting...................................................... 6-47
Setup module/macro device................................. 6-51
Standby module .................................................... 7-2
Subroutine macro .................................................. 7-3
Self-hold macro ..................................................... 7-3
Setting a password to a macro............................... 7-4
Set execute sequence of module ........................... 7-6
Serial connection ................................................... 9-5
Set up unit No. ....................................................... 9-6
Searching connection destination ......................... 9-8
Stop monitoring .................................................... 9-28
Start monitor......................................................... 9-28
Set simulator ....................................................... 9-29
Simulator ............................................................. 9-29
Start from KV STUDIO ........................................ 9-30
Start and Exit Monitor........................................... 9-36
Start and stop monitor .......................................... 9-39
Set up operation mode of PLC ............................ 9-40
Scan time monitor ....................................9-40, 10-14
Set up calendar timer ...............................9-40, 10-15
Specify device and register ................................. 9-42
Switch comment .................................................. 9-44
Sort device ........................................................... 9-44
Switch time chart ................................................. 9-45
Save as customize monitor ................................. 9-45
Specify device and change ................................ 9-46
Switch comment display ...................................... 9-48
"Set trigger" icon................................................... 9-54
Set trigger type .................................................... 9-55
Save ..................................................................... 9-57
Save As ................................................................ 9-57
Save CSV file ...................................................... 9-57
Search the up point ............................................. 9-61
Search the next point .......................................... 9-61
Set display............................................................ 9-63
"Scale" icon ......................................................... 9-65
Select Cursor A ................................................... 9-70
Start tracing ......................................................... 9-71
Saving Time Charts.............................................. 9-79
APPENDICES
The features of customize monitoring ................. 9-49

The features of real-time chart monitor ................ 9-51
The Composition of Real-time Chart Monito ....... 9-51
Trigger type "NORMAL" ....................................... 9-55
Trigger type "SINGLE" 9-55Time chart display area 956
Trigger setting display .......................................... 9-63
Time axis zoom in ............................................... 9-67
Time axis reduce ................................................. 9-67
Tracing stop ........................................................ 9-71
Tracing pause ..................................................... 9-71
Transfer online edit ............................................. 9-94
To cancel a rung break setting ........................... 10-10
To execute operation again ............................... 10-10
Toolbar .............................................................. 11-12
Through change of unit configuration, the device
converts its mode automatically ................. 11-15
Tool ......................................................................A-16
U
Unit Editor function ................................................ 1-4
User Rights ........................................................... 1-9
USB USB port.................................................. 1-9
Uninstall KV STUDIO .......................................... 1-10
Unit selection icon ............................................... 3-10
Unit configuration area ........................................ 3-10
Unit setup icon ..................................................... 3-11
Unit configuration ................................................ 3-16
Unit comments .................................................... 3-26
Use slave setup screen ....................................... 3-31
Unit selection icon ............................................... 3-32
Undo....................................................................... 5-2
Unit setup ............................................................... 6-5
Unit Monitor ................................ 6-5, 9-33, 9-36, 9-81
Unit configuration switching ................................... 6-6
User ..................................................................... 6-10
Upper value setting of digital trimmer .................. 6-55
USB port................................................................. 9-2
USB connection .................................................... 9-5
"Universal"icon ..................................................... 9-66
Unit Editor ............................................................ 11-2
Unit configuration error check ..............................A-10
Unusable character list.........................................A-11
To cancel the auto-save function ........................ 4-15

To cancel the auto-load function.......................... 4-16
Top/bottom .......................................................... 5-17
Top/bottom .......................................................... 5-16
Toolbar/Status bar ................................................ 6-2
Test race contention of device .............................. 8-3
Test race contention of device .............................. 8-3
Transfer item "global device comment" ............... 9-19
Transfer item "program" ....................................... 9-19
Transfer item "Mail setting message" .................. 9-20
Transfer item "Logging/tracing setting message" 9-20
Transfer item "positioning unit parameter" ........... 9-21
Transfer item "File Register setting" .................... 9-21
Transfer and monitor program ............................ 9-36
View setup ........................................................... 3-39

Various file commands ........................................... 4-2
Verification .......................................................... 5-14
Various monitor functions .................................... 9-35
"View(V)"menu .................................................... 9-63
Verification .......................................................... 9-86
W
Windows Environment and Installation Directory .......... 1-9
When CPU unit is KV-5000/3000 ........................ 9-18
A-33
APPENDICES
Saving time charts as bitmaps ............................. 9-80

Save CSV file ...................................................... 9-84
Save the CSV file by another name .................... 9-84
Save to memory card .......................................... 9-85
Start online edit ................................................... 9-93
Set online edit ..................................................... 9-95
Simulator ............................................................. 9-96
Simulator Restrictions ......................................... 9-96
Supported control relays CR ......................... 9-97
Supported control memories CM .................. 9-98
Starting Up and Exiting Simulator ....................... 9-99
Scan Execution ................................................. 9-100
Starting up and stopping Simulator ................... 9-100
Setting the scan time ........................................ 9-101
Setting the wait time .......................................... 9-101
Setting the watchdog timer ................................ 9-101
Setting breaks ................................................... 9-101
Step control ....................................................... 9-102
Set device break .................................................. 10-7
Switch unit configuration ...................................... 11-2
Set device default value ...................................... 11-4
Shortcut keys ..................................................... 11-11
Setting online edit ............................................. 11-14
Setting the unit color .......................................... 11-14
System setting .................................................. 11-15
Script setting ..................................................... 11-16
Set display modes.............................................. 11-16
Setting editing/key ............................................. 11-17
Switch edit method .............................................. 12-3
Script conversion ................................................ 12-4
Setting the Warning Level of Script Conversion Errors 12-4
Shortcut Key List..................................................A-13
Shortcut Keys Valid on Unit Editor ...................... A-13
Shortcut Keys Valid on Unit Editor Window .........A-13
Slave setup .........................................................A-13
Shortcut Keys Valid on Unit Editor "Slave Setup Screen" . A-13
Shortcut Keys Valid on KV STUDIO ...................A-14
Shortcut keys valid in the initial screen ................A-14
Shortcut keys valid in the Editor mode ................A-14
Script....................................................................A-16
Shortcut keys valid in the Monitor mode ..............A-16
Shortcut keys valid in the Simulator mode ..........A-17
Shortcut keys valid during online editing .............A-18
Script....................................................................A-19
Set the Power Save mode on the PC to OFF ......A-25
APPENDICES
Window display ................................................... 3-16

Width.................................................................... 5-21
Workspace ............................................................ 6-3
Witch the display of tab ......................................... 6-3
When support model is KV-5000 / 3000 ............. 6-20
When support model is KV-1000/700 / 700+M / P16 / 10
/ 16 / 24 / 40 ................................................ 6-22
Whole setting of fixed cycle module and interrupt
priority .......................................................... 6-44
When support model is KV-5000 / 3000 ............. 6-47
When the model is KV-1000 ............................... 6-50
When the project being edited is identical to that of PLC
..................................................................... 9-17
When the project being edited is different from that of
PLC .............................................................. 9-17
When search target is bit device ......................... 9-59
When search target is word device ..................... 9-60
Waveform display in parallel ............................... 9-67
Write all projects to PLC ..................................... 9-89
Write selected range to PLC ............................... 9-89
Window ................................................................ A-14
When the message "USB cannot be used" is displayed
A-25
Z
Zoom in/ zoom out indicating range .................... 9-68
Zoom out indicating range ................................... 9-69
APPENDICES
A-34
MEMO
Revision History
Printing Date
Version
Dec 2008
Initial version
Details of Revision
E:\KEYENCE(en)\No10_Kv_studio_ver4_ver3\084160_kv_studio\cover3.fm
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS:

(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such
models or samples were used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and
not to represent that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any
Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer
or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE,
KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any
Products found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any
action of Buyer, including but not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper
repair, unauthorized modification, misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive
current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not
warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only
suggestions, and it is Buyer's responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyer's
intended use. KEYENCE will not be responsible for any damages that may result from the use of
the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples ("Products/Samples") supplied to Buyer are not to be used
internally in humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or failsafe systems, unless their
written specifications state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or
misused in any way, KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify
KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any
misuse of the Products/Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO
OTHER
WARRANTIES
WARRANTIES,
WHATSOEVER.
INCLUDING,
ALL
WITHOUT
EXPRESS,
LIMITATION,
IMPLIED,
THE
AND
STATUTORY
WARRANTIES
OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF

PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE
AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF
PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS,
SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE
OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY'S
CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some
of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may not apply.
BUYER'S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:

If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must
provide such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and
written information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples
E:\KEYENCE(en)\No10_Kv_studio_ver4_ver3\084160_kv_studio\cover3.fm
31-642-1270
31-642-1271
KEYENCE CORPORATION, 0128-1 084192 E Printed in Japan

KV Studio Ver5 Man Ks

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

KV Studio Ver5 Man Ks

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Ladder Support Software

KV STUDIO related manuals

This Manual describes the composition/ specification, CPU

This manual describes various instructions available in ladder

This manual describes the script programming method and

KV STUDIO User's Manual

This manual describes how to operate KV STUDIO.

This manual describe the system macros available for the

KV-1000 Series Introduction Manual

Guide manual for the import of "KV-1000". please carefully

This manual describes the specifications, integrated functions

This manual describes how to make ladder programs using

Describes the specifications, integrated functions and

and operating method of the KV-1000 PLC.

Describes the specifications, integrated functions and operating

Describes the specifications, integrated functions and

method of the KV-10/16/24/40PLC.

Indicates useful information or information that aids understanding of text descriptions.

- KV STUDIO Ver.5 Users Manual -

- KV STUDIO Ver.5 Users Manual -

Software License Agreement

- KV STUDIO Ver.5 Users Manual -

- KV STUDIO Ver.5 Users Manual -

How This Manual Is Organized

Describe packaging content confirmation, product function,

computer connection methods and general operating methods.

Describe project management.

compilation and transfer unit.

FILE AND PRINT

Describe file management and print function.

Describe the function of editing Ladder using editor.

Describe display method of various function windows,

command or macro command entry method.

Describe module or macro edit window.

Describe functions such as Ladder conversion, invalid

Describe application of monitor and simulator functions.

Describe the function of debugging program using monitor

Describe script entry and edit method.

Error Codes table, fault processing method and shortcut

- KV STUDIO Ver.5 Users Manual -

Chapter 1 Before Using

1-3 About the data compatibility 1-5

1-4 Install software 1-9

1-5 USB Driver Installation 1-11

1-6 Safety Precautions 1-13

About Help 1-16

1-8 Editor 1-19

Chapter 2 Project Management

Chapter 3Unit Editor

- KV STUDIO Ver.5 Users Manual -

Settings on Unit Editor 3-2

3-2 Menu list in Unit Editor 3-4

3-3 Menu list of slave setting screen 3-7

3-4 Names and Functions of Different Parts of Screen 3-9

3-5 Basic Operation of UE 3-13

3-6 Operation of UE 3-15

- KV STUDIO Ver.5 Users Manual -

3-7 Use the Slave Setup Screen 3-31

Display the "Slave Setup" screen 3-33

3-8 Environment Setting 3-39

Chapter 4 FILE & PRINT

- KV STUDIO Ver.5 Users Manual -

4-2 Print 4-17